H12-211.prepaway.premium.exam.

324q

Number: H12-211
Passing Score: 800
Time Limit: 120 min
File Version: 10.1

H12-211

Huawei Certified Network Associate- Huawei Networking Technology and Device

Version 10.1

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Exam A

QUESTION 1
An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the
company wishes to introduce another two administrators and provide unique user credentials and privilege
levels for telnet access to the network devices.

What action can be taken? (Choose three)

A. Configure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a different password.
B. The authentication mode must be changed to AAA.
C. Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
D. A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 2
Which of the following authentication methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)

A. Password authentication
B. AAA local authentication
C. MD5 authentication
D. No authentication

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 3
On Huawei AR G3 Series routers, which authentication modes does AAA support? (Choose all that apply.)

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 4

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Refer to the configuration output. RTA has been configured using AAA as shown, and associated with the
“huawei” domain. For users in the huawei domain, which authentication-scheme will be used?

A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 5
A user accesses a server supporting AAA, for which the authorization mode on the AAA server has been
configured using the command “authorization-mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”.

Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).

A. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using local authentication.
B. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using remote authentication.
C. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentication.
D. The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 6
Which of the following descriptions regarding eSight is not correct?

A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.

B. eSight supports only Huawei devices.
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of configuration files and network traffic analysis.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 7

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?

A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 8
Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?

A. Source interface
B. Destination port number
C. Protocol number
D. Time-range

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 9

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?

A. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 10

Refer to the configuration output. A network administrator configured the ACL on router RTA, as shown.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which of the following statements regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).

A. The rule-number of the first rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the first rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 11
Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the configuration in one of the
enterprise routers had been changed.

What actions can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes? (Choose three)

A. The administrator should limit access by setting the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should configure AAA to manage user authorization on the router.
C. The administrator should configure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should configure port-security on the router.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 12

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the configuration of the
ACL on RTA?

A. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 13

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the configuration of
the ACL on RTA? (Choose two).

A. Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied.
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 14
The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the
administrator take? (Choose two)

A. Change the work mode to full duplex of each end station.

B. Link the end stations together using a switch.
C. Change the work mode to half duplex of each end station.
D. Link the end stations together using a hub.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 15
On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
negotiation"? (Choose two)

A. duplex negotiation auto

B. duplex auto-negotiation
C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 16
The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface cards of
both devices operates at 100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.

What will occur as a result?

A. The end stations cannot communicate.

B. The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
C. The end stations will operate normally
D. The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of large amounts of traffic.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 17
An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only supports one
single mode.

Which of the following represents this mode?

A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 18
While inspecting packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destination MAC
address of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3.

What can the administrator determine from this?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. The MAC address is a unicast address.
B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multicast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 19
According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow control?

A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 20
Which of the following mechanisms are used for flow control? (Choose three)

A. Acknowledgement
B. Buffering
C. Source quench messages
D. Windowing

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 21

Refer to the capture output. The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement
regarding the captured packets is incorrect?

A. This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

B. 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. The three packets contain no application data.
D. 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connection.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 22
An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length field is 0x0800.

Which of the following statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)

A. The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 23
Which of the following descriptions regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is correct?

A. The TTL defines how many packets the source can send.
B. The TTL defines the duration during which the source can send packets.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each time the packet is routed.
D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 24
Which of the following statements are correct about TTL field in IP packet? (Choose two)

A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535.

B. Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
C. The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulating endlessly in a network which can
consume a lot of bandwidth.
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switch
and router.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 25
In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operating system
used to set?

A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destination IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 26
To provide the information about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the
destination, which of the following does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?

A. Destination port
B. Source port
C. Destination IP address
D. Source IP address

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 27
Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectivity are false? (Choose three)

A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the
host’s Ethernet port.
B. The ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCP/IP
protocol suite is functioning correctly.
C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
D. The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and the
local gateway.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 28
A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which protocols will be used during this process? (Choose two)

A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 29
A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destination IP address of an external
website, however the trace path displayed only a timeout result.

Which of the following statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP function.

B. This destination IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway cannot find a route to the destination.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 30

A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR
series router.

Which statement regarding the output is correct?

A. The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. The path between the source and destination is not OK.
D. The network administrator changed the default TTL value.

Correct Answer: A
H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 31
Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect function? (Choose two)

A. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the
source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the
source.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destination IP of the
data, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
C. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the
source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP Redirect message will be sent by the source to
the router.
D. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the
source is on a different segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to
the source

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 32
Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destination MAC address.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which statement is true?

A. The destination IP address of the ARP request is Host C.

B. The destination MAC address of this ARP request is Host C.
C. The destination IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 33
An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destination MAC address of host D.

Which statement is true about regarding the ARP reply?

A. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A.
B. The destination IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A.
C. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A.
D. The destination IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 34
Which of the following applications can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are
transmitted from the source to the destination?

A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 35
How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along
which packet is sent from source to destination?

A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 36
Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classified into? (Choose two)

A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reporting packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP application packet

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 37
On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to specify
the source address of an echo request message?

A. -a
B. -s
C. -d
D. -n

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 38
A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination address in the
packet is not intended for itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

A. Discard the packet.

B. Check for a route that matches the destination address.
C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the destination address is
available.
D. Broadcast the ARP request packet.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 39
Two end stations in a point-to-point network perform address resolution.

Which of the following statements is correct?

A. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
D. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a broadcast MAC address.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 40
What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when the router is
the IP destination?

A. The MAC address of the switch.

B. The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
C. The MAC address of the host.
D. The destination MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 41
Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)

A. A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 42
UDP is connectionless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?

A. Internet Protocol
B. Application Layer Protocol
C. Network Layer Protocol
D. Transmission Control Protocol

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 43
Refer to the graphic.

The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure a default
gateway.

What effect will this have on the hosts?

A. Neither host will be affected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the peer.
B. Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.
C. Hosts will be unable to communicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 44
Refer to the graphic.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0.

Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface
G0/0/0.
B. The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the switch.
C. The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destination IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the Router interface G0/0/0.

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 45
The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website www.huawei.com.

The command line shows a request time out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.

Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?

A. The MAC address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
B. The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.
C. The IP address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
D. The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 46
When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)

A. The source MAC address

B. The destination MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destination IP address

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 47
If Host B also configured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address config will occur.
What will happen as a result?

A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destination with the configured IP address. If a reply is received,
the host will notify of an address conflict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, for
which Host B will reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, for
which Host A will reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destination 192.168.1.1.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 48

Refer to the graphic. A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 5489-98ec-f011. What
operation will occur on the switch?

A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will flood the frame via all ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 49
Host A has been connected to a four port switch A on port G0/0/1and configured with an IP address.

When Host A initially forwards a frame, what action will be taken by Switch A?

A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will attempt to flood the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 50
A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server to be
linked to this interface on the switch.

Which method can be used to achieve this?

A. Configure a static ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.
B. Configure a static MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the switch.
C. Configure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 51
An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support
Fast Ethernet, while the ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are
able to communicate, however communication between the two switches fails.

What is the possible reason for this?

A. The ports have disabled auto-negotiation.

B. One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using full
duplex mode.
D. A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.

Correct Answer: A

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 52
A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.

A. Source MAC address

B. Destination MAC address
C. Source IP address
D. Destination IP address

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 53
Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

A. Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 54
Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?

A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatically.

B. The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
C. The layer-2 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 55

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?

A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defined route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 56
Which of the following statements regarding static and dynamic routing is incorrect?

A. The static route can be easily configured and managed on the enterprise network.
B. The use of dynamic routing is more convenient for the administrator to manage the network following
network convergence.
C. The static route can automatically recover when a link failure is encountered.
D. Dynamic routing will use more resources than static routes.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 57
Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose all that apply.)

A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 58
Which of the following statements regarding the routing table are correct? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packet
forwarding.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
B. The routes from generated by different protocols have different preferences.
C. The metrics of different routing protocols are comparable.
D. The metrics of different routing protocols are not comparable

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 59
Which of the following commands can be used to display the routing table on a Quidway router?

A. display ip path
B. display ip routing-table
C. display interface
D. display current-configuration

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 60
Which of the following entries is not included in the routing table?

A. source address
B. next hop
C. destination address
D. cost

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 61
Which of the following problems are caused by routing loops? (Choose three)

A. Slow convergence
B. Packets circulate between routers
C. Router restarting
D. Inconsistency of routing information

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 62
An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch office, which method can be used?

A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connection
D. DHCP

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 63
The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectivity to
the router and has been informed that other administrators have no difficulties using telnet.

Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The user’s status has been blocked

B. The user’s privilege level has been changed to 0.
C. The user has been deleted.
D. The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 64
A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the device, found
that he is unable to use the system-view command to enter the system-view.

What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)

A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the system-view
command.
B. The user’s telnet software restricts use of this command.
C. The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view command.
D. The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the user.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 65
The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
What is the possible reason?

A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 66
Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

B. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
C. A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
D. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 67
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been
configured.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which following statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

B. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routing-table
D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routing-table

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 68
Refer to the graphic.

The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of
the following steps can be used to help the administrator identify the problem? (Choose two)

A. Check whether the host has configured the gateway IP address.

B. Check whether the switch has configured the gateway IP address.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. Use the ping tool to check connectivity between host and router.
D. Check the telnet server configuration is right on the router.

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 69
Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platform to configure the router? (Choose three)

A. Through the Console port

B. Through Telnet
C. Through the AUX port
D. Through FTP

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 70
The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB cable.

How can this be achieved? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the
AR2200 router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the AR2200
router.
C. The AR2200 router cannot support configuration updates through a USB cable.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after connecting the USB.

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 71
The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router.

How can this be achieved?

A. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of the
router.
B. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the
router.
C. A connection should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the
router.use console cable connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connection should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of the

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
 router.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 72
Whilst configuring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands.

Which of the following will help support the administrator? (Choose two)

A. TAB
B. question mark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 73

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator configured the device using the commands in the
configuration output. Regarding these commands, which statement is false?

A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following configuration, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 74
Which of the following is abbreviation of VRP?

A. Versatile Routine Platform

B. Virtual Routing Platform

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. Virtual Routing Plane
D. Versatile Routing Platform

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 75
Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is powered on
for the first time?

A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 76
Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a Huawei router
through the Console port?

A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 77
Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei router?

A. system-view
B. enable
C. configure terminal
D. interface system

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 78
On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring
level, Configuration level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is permitted to configure service
but is not permitted to operate the file system?

A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
C. Configuration level
D. Management level

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 79
On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the
command line interface? (Choose two)

A. Up cursor key < >

B. Left cursor key < >
C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 80
Which of the following commands can be used to view the current configurations on a Huawei router?

A. display current-configuration
B. display saved-configuration
C. view saved-configuration
D. show startup-configuration

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 81
The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator be in order
to achieve this?

A. User-view
B. System-view

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 82
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save

Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

A. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

B. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the configuration.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 83
<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei]history-command max-size 20

Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose two)

A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer.
B. The default value of the history command buffer is 5.
C. The command should be configured in the user-interface view.
D. Once configured, commands totaling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 84
An AR2200 router is required to be reconfigured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve this?
(Choose all that apply.)

A. Reset the saved configuration.

B. Clear the current configuration.
C. Reboot the AR2200.
D. Assign the configuration file to be used at next startup.

Correct Answer: AC
H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 85
An administrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The
administrator has been instructed that after logging into the router, he must first permanently erase the current
configuration file config.zip from the system.

Which command should he use to achieve this?

A. delete /force config.zip

B. delete /unreserved config.zip
C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 86
Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?

A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit
D. User-view

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 87
Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select four)

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card

Correct Answer: ABCE

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 88
Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a router?

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 89
<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
Warning: The action will delete the saved configuration in the device.
The configuration will be erased to reconfigure. Continue? [Y/N]:

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)

A. A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved configuration file.
B. The saved-configuration file that the device starts with can be erased.
C. The saved-configuration will be deleted after typing N
D. The saved-configuration file will be replaced with the current-configuration.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 90
When a router is powered on, the router reads the configuration file saved in the default save directory to get
itself initialized. If the configuration file does not exist in the default save directory, what does the router use to
initialize itself?

A. New configuration file

B. Initial configuration file
C. Default parameters
D. Current configuration file

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 91

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?

A. The current configuration file has not been saved.

B. The current startup system software is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The next startup system software cannot be changed.
D. The next startup system software can be changed by using the “startup system software <startup-
softwarename>.cc” command.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 92
<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations
when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop
Auto-Config? [y/n]:

When an administrator first initializes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this
warning is correct?

A. If Auto-Config is required, the administrator should select ‘y’.

B. If Auto-Config is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent configuration of the
DHCP server, routing, DNS server and VTY user configuration is lost.
C. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is active.
D. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is inactive.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 93
An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator wishes to
update the VRP software.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
What should he/she do?

A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade the
device.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP software, by configuring the AR2200 router as an
FTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP client
to download the VRP software from the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and upgrade
the VRP software.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 94
<Huawei>

Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations
when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop
Auto-Config? [y/n]:

Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed, however after
rebooting this router, the notice disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose all that apply.)

A. This notice only appears during the very first device startup.
B. The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the notice to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration.
D. The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the configuration.

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 95
An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process.

Which IP address may be used by the client?

A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 96

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in order to
assign an IP address to the customer’s terminal device.

Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

A. dhcp select relay

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 97
A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP address
from the DHCP server, the user decided to modify the IP address manually.

In what way may this affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

A. The client may experience an IP address conflict.

B. The client may access the network normally.
C. The client’s interface connection will shutdown.
D. The client will associate with another DHCP server.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 98
A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator
discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s
address pool.

What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).

A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within
a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server.
B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
169.254.0.0 address range.
C. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
 127.254.0.0 address range.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 99

Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet
0/0/1 of the router. Which IP address will the client obtain?

A. An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

B. An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
C. The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
D. An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 100
The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which
message will the host first send to the DHCP server?

A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 101
A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).

A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 102
Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet are true?
(Choose three)

A. A Database Description packet contains all information about each LSA.

B. A Database Description packet contains only the header of an LSA.
C. The header of an LSA is the unique identifier of the LSA.
D. The header of an LSA is only a small portion of all the data of the LSA.

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 103
What is the default authentication mode for the default_admin domain?

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 104
How many domains can be configured on a Huawei router?

A. 30
B. 31
C. 32
D. 33

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 105
An authenticator router has been configured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following which a
user is created with the username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentication. Which domain does
this user belongs to?

A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 106
In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is used.

A. display mode serial 1/0/0

B. display controller
C. display interface serial 1/0/0
D. display current-config

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 107
How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?

A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 108
If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. LMI protocol
B. ARP protocol
C. RARP protocol
D. InARP protocol

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 109
Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay
addresses?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr map-info
C. display fr inarp-info
D. display interface brief

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 110
Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?

A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 111
Which of the following parameters must be specified when configuring static mapping for Frame Relay
network? (Choose two)

A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
C. Local network layer protocol address
D. Remote network layer protocol address

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 112
Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)

A. DLCI is locally significant

B. DLCI is allocated by DTE
C. The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
D. The same DLCI can be configured on different physical interfaces

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 113
Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface
encapsulated with Frame Relay?

A. fr inarp
B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 114
What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?

A. remote logical channel ID

B. local DLCI
C. remote interface ID
D. remote node ID

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 115
Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network address and
DLCI?

A. display fr interface

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
B. display fr
C. display fr map-info
D. display fr brief

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 116
Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose three)

A. Same DLCI number is configured on the same router

B. LMI type mismatch
C. Frame Relay encapsulation type mismatch
D. Incorrect configuration of the DLCI number

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 117
An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved?
(Choose three)

A. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP client.
B. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP server.
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 118
An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router
is out of date. The administrator needs to upgrade the VRP software.

Which of the following options regarding file transfer is false?

A. The AR2200 router can function as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
B. The AR2200 router can function as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
C. The AR2200 router can function as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
D. The AR2200 router can function as an FTP client to support the upgrade.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 119
FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system file on Huawei routers. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Choose three)

A. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Server
C. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Server

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 120
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router.

Which of the following describes the likely reason for this?

A. The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.

B. TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
C. UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
D. The username and password had been modified.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 121
FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image.

Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?

A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. letter mode

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 122

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem. The client
assumed that the problem was with the port configuration.

The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)

A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 123
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer encapsulation type
of a serial interface as HDLC?

A. encapsulation hdlc
B. link-protocol hdlc
C. hdlc enable
D. link-protocol ppp

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 124
If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security
Associations (SA) are required in total?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 125
Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both peering
devices?

A. Encapsulation mode
B. Transform mode

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. Proposal name
D. authentication algorithm

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 126
Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6 address
2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).

A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 127
Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be configured on a router’s interface? (Choose two).

A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 128
The IPv6 address architecture does not include which of the following address types?

A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 129
Which of the following descriptions regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)

A. IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

B. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
C. IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
D. IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 130
Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6 address
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to configure the interface IPv6
address?

A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 131
In a small network supporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng.

Which of the following commands should be used to enable this protocol?

A. [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
B. [RTA]ripng 1 enable
C. <RTA>ripng 1 enable
D. [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 132
In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. authentication
D. multicast updates

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 133
The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network.

Which of the following represent advantages of link aggregation? (Choose three)

A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth.
C. Enhanced reliability.
D. Improved security.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 134
In port aggregation, “multiple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregation group so that all the member
ports in the group share the outgoing/incoming load.

At which layer is port aggregation implemented?

A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 135
What benefits does port aggregation yield? (Choose three)

A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 136
What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?

A. 6
B. 8
C. 10
D. 12

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 137
The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames
based on which of the following parameters?

A. The same source or destination IP address.

B. The same source or destination MAC address.
C. The same protocol type.
D. The same source or destination port number.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 138
In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the following?
(Choose all that apply.)

A. Maximum number of Up member links

B. Minimum number of Up member links
C. Number of Up member interfaces
D. Number of interfaces.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 139
The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces
operate at different rates. In terms of the resulting behavior, which of the following is true?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. The two switches will not be able to communicate.
B. The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
C. The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
D. The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 140
The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command
fails.

Which of the following may cause this?

A. The interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

B. The interface has been shutdown.
C. The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
D. The interface is an access port.

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 141
A network requires a solution to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single public
address is available for use.

Which translation method can be used to support this requirement?

A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 142
NAPT allows for multiple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address.

How does NAT distinguish between the different private addresses when mapping to the same public address?

A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destination MAC address is used.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destination port number is used.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 143
A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA.

Which configuration should be used?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 144
The network administrator needs to configure static NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to communicate with
Host C.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which command is correct?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 145
[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the configuration output. What does the value “2000” refer to?

A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public
address pool.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 146
NAPT uses the same public address but different port numbers to translate private addresses.

Which statement regarding the port number is correct?

A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 147
A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be configured on the
enterprise network egress router in order to achieve this? (Choose all that apply.)

A. NAT Easy IP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 148
Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)

A. NAT is the abbreviation for "Network Address Translation".

B. NAT is used for translation between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an effective way to solve the problem of insufficient IP addresses.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 149
Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?

A. Static route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 150
Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

A. MAC address + port number

B. IP address + port number
C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 151
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose
three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 152
Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)

A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be different in different areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be configured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 153
Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.

B. If the priorities of two routers are different, the router with the lower priority will be elected as DR.
C. If the priorities of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be elected as DR.
D. DR and BDR must be adjacent.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: ACD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 154
On the VRP platform, which of the following commands is used to configure the Router ID of a router as
1.1.1.1?

A. <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
B. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
C. [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
D. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 155
Which of the following OSPF versions is specific to IPv6?

A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 156
The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no loopback
interface.

Which value will be used as the router ID?

A. The lowest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.

B. The highest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.
C. The IP address of the management interface.
D. The priority value of the router.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 157
An administrator of a company supporting a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the
network as opposed to RIP. Which of the following points should the administrator use to support his reasoning
for this change? (Choose three)

A. OSPF has no hop count limitation.

B. OSPF has a lower routing update overhead.
C. OSPF has a simpler configuration.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 158
Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before configuring an OSPF
area.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be configured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0.

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 159
10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0

Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose two)

A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been configured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the administrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 160
Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a “single” OSPF area are
correct? (Choose two)

A. The link-state databases that all routers build are identical.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
B. The link-state databases that all routers build are different.
C. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are different.
D. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are identical.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 161
Which of the following steps are necessary to configure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)

A. Configuration of a router ID
B. Enabling of an OSPF process
C. Specifying an OSPF area
D. Configuration of the network segments within each area

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 162
Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)

A. There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

B. A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotiations that are defined by OSPF protocol.
C. Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR.

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 163
Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)

A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
B. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 164
Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship establishment?

A. display ospf neighbor

B. display ospf brief
C. display ospf peer
D. display ospf interface

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 165
With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state information and route information?
(Choose two)

A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
D. All OSPF neighbors

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 166
An OSPF area is a collection of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defines that routers that have the
same ( ) belong to the same OSPF area.

A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 167
Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)

A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID.
B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID.
C. Two routers in different OSPF areas can have the same router ID.
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit dotted decimal format.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 168
OSPF allows for “multiple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).

A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 169
In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
D. multicast updates

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 170
Two routers are configured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router.

Which of the following is true in the event that the network administrator does not configure a Router-ID?

A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID.
B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID.
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID.
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 171

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the
destination host 9.1.4.5?

A. The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet because the preference of
OSPF is higher than the preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the cost of RIP
is lower than that of OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the outgoing
interface is an Ethernet interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than the
forwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the router will
match the most specific address.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 172
According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following represent the
correct sequence for direct route, static route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low
preference?

A. Direct, Static, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct, OSPF, Static, RIP
C. Direct, OSPF, RIP, Static
D. Direct, RIP, Static, OSPF

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 173
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route has been learned via
OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4.

Which route (s) will be found in the routing table?

A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routing table.

Correct Answer: C

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 174
Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destination by using RIP, OSPF and Static Route
respectively. By default, the Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.

A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Static route

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 175
After checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a
TWOWAY state with the peering router.

What can be understood from this information? (Choose two)

A. The routers are configured using the same process ID

B. The routers are configured using the same area ID
C. The routers are configured using wrong router ID
D. The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 176
What functions does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)

A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deletion of unreachable neighbors
C. Maintaining of neighbor relationships
D. Negotiation of parameters among adjacent ports

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 177

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation.

Which parameters must be negotiated to establish the PPP connection? (Choose three).

A. MRU
B. Authentication password
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 178
What are the three protocol components defined by PPP? (Choose three).

A. Data encapsulation.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 179
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network administrator
wishes to configure PPP authentication to improve security on this link.

Which PPP authentication method provides a more secure solution?

A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 180
If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the authenticator?

A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
C. Authenticate-Reject

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
D. Authenticate-Reply

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 181
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two serial
interfaces are different, in PPP LCP negotiated stage, what will happen?

A. LCP negotiation will fail

B. Negotiation will use the smaller value
C. Negotiation will use the larger value
D. Negotiation will use 1500

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 182
PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentication protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)

A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 183
When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is active, the link state will transit from dead
to establish.

Which of the following protocols is used to negotiate the link parameters during this phase?

A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 184
A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation protocol.

Which of the following commands is required to be configured at the serial interface view?

A. link-protocol ppp
B. encapsulation ppp
C. enable ppp
D. address ppp

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 185
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication method as
PAP?

A. ppp pap
B. ppp authentication-pap
C. ppp authentication-mode pap
D. ppp pap-authentication

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 186
When configuring the PPP authentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are necessary?
(Choose three)

A. Add the user name and password of the authenticated party to the local user list.
B. Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP.
D. On the authenticated party end, configure the user name and password that are sent to authenticator.

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 187
In the PPP protocol, which of the following encryption algorithms is used by CHAP?

A. DES
B. MD5

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. AES
D. None

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 188
What is the function of the “ip address ppp-negotiate” command?

A. Enables the function of requesting for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the function of accepting the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the function of statically allocating IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 189
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured the routers
to run OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what behavior will occur as a result of the
configuration?

A. The routers will build a neighbor relationship even though both routers are using the same router ID.
B. VRP will notify of a router ID conflict between the two routers.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router ID.
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same router ID.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 190
The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
C. PPPoE Session stage
D. PPP connecting stage.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 191
To establish multiple PPP point-to-point connections in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server establishes
connections with multiple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port.

How does PPPoE differentiate between each connection?

A. MAC address.
B. IP address and MAC address
C. MAC address and ppp-id
D. MAC address and session-id

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 192
When configuring a router as a PPPoE client, which configuration is not necessary?

A. Configuration of the dialer-rule

B. Configuration of the dialer interface
C. Configuration of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Configuration of a password on the dialer interface

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 193
In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?

A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 194
Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

A. display ip interface brief

B. display current-configuration

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. display pppoe-client session packet
D. display pppoe-client session summary

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 195
[Huawei]rip 1
[Huawei-rip-1]version 2

Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to configure RIP. Which other command needs to
configured for RIP routes to be advertised?

A. import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
C. network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
D. network 192.168.1.0

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 196
A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor.

Which of the following statements regarding routing update are correct? (Choose three)

A. The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop count value is less than
16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is the
router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is not the
router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
D. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is the
router's neighbor and the cost value has been changed.

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 197
Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and configuration of RIP?

A. display protocol rip

B. show rip
C. display rip

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
D. display this rip

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 198
A user can view the information for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age time” in the returned result of
the command mean?

A. The interval of updating an RIP packet

B. The aging time of an RIP route
C. The suppression time of an RIP route
D. The time spent on switching between RIP routes

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 199
After a command for displaying RIP route information is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on Serial1/0/0 is
displayed in the returned result.

What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?

A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 200

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as
expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

A. R2 has configured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

B. R2 has enabled split horizon.
C. R1 is using authentication, however R2 is not.
D. R2 is operating using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 201
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose
three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 202
When a network administrator configures STP in the network, BPDU begin to be sent by switch. Which of the
following statements regarding the BPDU frame are correct?

A. A BPDU uses the IEEE 802.3 standard frame type

B. A BPDU uses the Ethernet II standard frame type
C. The BPDU frame’s control field is 3
D. The destination MAC address field of a BPDU frame is a broadcast address

Correct Answer: A

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 203
In the case of Huawei router, the Tracert command uses UDP to encapsulate probe packets.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 204
The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0/25 is 192.168.1.128.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 205
A network administrator wishes to assign an IP address to a router interface G0/0/0. Which of the following IP
addresses can be assigned?

A. 192.168.10.112/30
B. 237.6.1.2/24
C. 145.4.2.55/26
D. 127.3.1.4/28

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 206
If a network’s address is 192.168.1.0, the broadcast address of the network is 192.168.1.255.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 207
In the VRP system, what are the functions of Ctrl+Z?

A. Return from the system view to the user view

B. Exit from the current view
C. Exit from the interface view
D. Exit from the console interface view
E. Return to the user view

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 208
In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC bits set
generated by the root switch?

A. Root port
B. Backup port
C. Designated port
D. Alternate port

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 209
Assuming all STP enabled switches have the same bridge priority. The MAC address of switch A is 00-e0-fc-
00-00-40, the MAC address of switch B is 00-e0-fc-00-00-10, the MAC address of switch C is 00-e0-fc-00-00-
20, and the MAC address of switch D is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80.
Which switch will be elected as the root switch?

A. Switch A
B. Switch B
C. Switch C
D. Switch D

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 210

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
As specified by the RSTP protocol, when a root port fails, which type of port will function as a new root port and
enters the forwarding state without any delay?

A. Forwarding Port
B. Alternate Port
C. Backup Port
D. Edge Port

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 211
In STP, the priority of the STP root switch ranges from 0 to 65536.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 212
Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE?
(Choose all that apply)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 213
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertised 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the
RIP network. Which routes will exist in the IP routing table of RTB? (Choose all that apply)

A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32
C. 10.1.12.1/32
D. 192.168.1.0/24

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 214
Which of the following configurations regarding static route are correct? (Choose all that apply)

A. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 serial 0

B. ip route-static 10.0.0.2 16 129.1.0.0
C. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 10.0.0.2
D. ip route-static 129.1.0.0.255.255.0.0 10.0.0.2

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 215
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured RIPv2 in the two routers. What will happen after
configuring the following commands: (Choose all that apply)

A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learned from the RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
D. RTB will have no neighbor relationship with RTA

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 216
Refer to the graphic. OSPF is used on four routers that are in the same area and on the same network
segment. In this scenario, OSPF selects one DR and multiple BDRs to ensure backup.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 217
On Huawei devices, you can use the undo summary command to prohibit automatic route summarization of
RIPv2.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 218
Which of the following configurations regarding default route configuration is correct?

A. [Quidway] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1

B. [Quidway] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 172.16.2.1
C. [Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1
D. [Quidway] ip route static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 219
Which of the following WLAN standards support operation in the 5GHz range? (Choose all that apply)

A. 802.11a
B. 802.11b
C. 802.11g
D. 802.11n

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 220
On Huawei switches, you can run the vlan batch command to create multiple VLANs in batches.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 221
According to the topology and configuration of interconnected interfaces of switches shown in the figure, the
data frame tagged with VLAN 10 can be forwarded correctly between the two switches.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 222
The network administrator creates VLAN 10 and assigns an IP address to VLANIF10. When using the
command “display ip interface brief”, the administrator finds that VLANIF10 is down. What should be done to
enable VLANIF10?

A. Use the command “undo shutdown” under the interface view for VLANIF10
B. Assign a physical interface that has either an active of inactive physical state to VLAN 10
C. Assign only a physical interface that has an active physical state to VLAN 10
D. Add an interface that has an active physical state and a trunk port associated with VLAN 10

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 223
A network administrator wishes to implement VLAN 10 to isolate certain users. It is common however for these
users to often change their physical location. Which of the following VLAN implementations should be used?

A. Port based VLAN assignment

B. Protocol based VLAN assignment
C. MAC based VLAN assignment
D. IP subnet based VLAN assignment

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 224
Refer to the graphic. GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are configured as hybrid interfaces. Which of the
following statements are true? (Choose all that apply)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. The administrative department and the finance department cannot communicate with each other because
the VLANs of the two departments are different.
B. The data frames sent by the administrative department carry tagged VLAN 20 on the switch.
C. On the switch, the data frames sent by the finance department carry tagged VLAN 20.
D. The switch can be a Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch because communications do not need to be transmitted
through a Layer 3 gateway.
E. If GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are changed to trunk ports, the administrative department and
finance department can communicate with each other.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 225
On the VRP, what is the function of the “interface vlanif <vlan-id>” command?

A. It is used to create a VLANIF interface

B. It is used to create a VLANIF interface and enter the VLANIF interface view

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. It is used to configure a VLAN for a VLANIF interface
D. There is no such command

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 226
InARP resolves the protocol address of the remote device on each virtual circuit, including IP addresses and
IPX addresses.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 227
On an FR network, the DLCI identifies a virtual circuit on an interface. The DLCI must be unique during
planning and deployment.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 228
If AAA authentication is used on Huawei devices and the remote server does not respond, the authentication
can be performed on network devices.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 229
An ACL does not filter traffic generated by the Huawei device towards other devices, but only filters forwarded
traffic, including traffic generated by other devices to access the Huawei device.

A. True

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 230
Which of the following statements are true about ACL deployment on Huawei devices? (Choose all that apply)

A. ACL can only be used in the outbound direction of an interface

B. The same ACL can be used on multiple interfaces
C. The ACL rules can only be configured in the following sequence: 10, 20, 30…
D. ACLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF does not use UDP to encapsulate packets
E. ACLs can be used to match with the TCP/UDP port IDs of packets and to designate the port ID range

Correct Answer: BE
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 231
SNMP packets are encapsulated in TCP packets.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 232
In OSPFv3, router IDs can be used automatically generated by the system.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 233
VLSM can expand any IP network segment, including Class D addresses.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 234
Refer to the graphic, 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address learned by a switch through ARP and the
host changes the IP address three times.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 235
There are two routers (RTA and RTB) between the source device and destination device. The Tracert
command is used to detect the path between the two devices. During detection of the first hop (RTA), the
source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to an interface with a large interface number on the
destination device. The TTL turns to 0 when the packet arrives at RTB, upon which RTA sends an ICMP
______ message to the source device.

A. Time Exceeded.
B. Echo Request.
C. Echo Reply.
D. Port Unreachable.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 236
Which of the following statements are true about ICMP messages? (Multiple Choice)

A. ICMP messages can record time, including the original time, packet receiving time, and packet sending
time.
B. ICMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets but not at the transport layer.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. ICMP messages include error messages, control messages, request/response messages, and update
messages.
D. ICMP does not support redirection.
E. ICMP messages cannot be used to detect a path’s MTU.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 237
If a network’s broadcast address is 172.16.1.255, which of the following addresses can be the network
address?

A. 172.16.2.0
B. 172.16.1.253
C. 172.16.1.128
D. 172.16.1.1

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 238
On the command line interface of Huawei AR routers, the role of the Save command is to Save the current
system time.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 239
Which of the following technologies is used to bind MAC addresses to interfaces on a switch?

A. SEP.
B. Port security.
C. ACL.
D. NAT.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 240
In RSTP, a backup port can replace a faulty root port.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 241
During STP calculation, the port cost is associated with port bandwidth. Which of the following statements
about the relation between port cost and port bandwidth is true?

A. Port cost decreases when port bandwidth increases.

B. Port cost increases when port bandwidth increases.
C. Port cost is consistent with port bandwidth.
D. Port cost varies randomly according to port bandwidth.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 242
Which of the following descriptions about STP are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)

A. A layer-2 switching network can have only one designated switch.

B. All the ports of the root switch are root ports.
C. All the ports of the root switch are designated ports.
D. The switch with the smallest priority value is elected as non-root switch.

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 243
Which of the following statements about static route preference on Huawei devices is false?

A. Static route preference ranges from 0 to 255.

B. Default static route preference is 60.
C. Static route preference is either internal or external. Administrators can modify external preferences.
D. If static route preference is 255, the route cannot be used.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 244
Refer to the graphic, which of the following statements is true about OSPF topology and configuration?

A. A stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.

B. After the default network type of the interface on R1 is restored to broadcast, a stable OSPF neighbor
relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.
C. After the default network type of the interface on R1 is restored to broadcast and the hello packet sending
interval is changed to 10s, a stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.
D. Compared with R1, R2 is more likely to become the DR because the DR priority of the interface on R2 is
lower than that of R1.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 245
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured OSPF on the two routers, following which he then
implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have on the network?
(Multiple Choice)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. The link information advertised by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.
B. The OSPF neighbor relationship will fail between two routers.
C. The configuration will not affect the OSPF neighbor relationship between the two routers.
D. The link information advertised by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 246
In an RIP process on a Huawei device, which of the following configurations are correct for advertising network
10.1.1.1/30? (Multiple Choice)

A. network 10.1.1.0
B. undo summary
network 10.1.1.0
C. version 2
undo summary
network 10.0.0.0
D. undo summary
network 10.1.0.0
E. network 10.0.0.0

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 247
The following configuration commands implement route backup on RTA for a route to the same destination
10.1.1.0.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 248
Refer to the command output. Which statement is true regarding this command?

A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168.1.1 network

B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network.
C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route will
always take precedence.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 249
Which of the following network types does OSPF support? (Multiple Choice)

A. Point-to-Point.
B. Broadcast.
C. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access.
D. Point-to-Multipoint.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 250
A DHCP Offer packet can carry only one DNS server address.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 251
Refer to the graphic. Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. What must be
configured on interface G0/0/1.1 of RTA to achieve this?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. dot1q termination vid 1.
B. dot1q termination vid 10.
C. dot1q termination vid 20.
D. dot1q termination vid 30.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 252
Refer to the configuration output. Which following statements are correct? (Multiple choice)

A. VLAN 1 cannot pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.

B. VLAN 1 can pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.
C. Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass vlan all” must be used
to renew the default configurations.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
D. Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4096” must be
used to renew the default configurations.

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 253
Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise network. Which of the following description is the
advantages of link aggregation? (Multiple Choice)

A. Improves link bandwidth.

B. Implements load sharing.
C. Improves network reliability.
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 254
On Huawei switches, VLAN 4095 cannot be created and VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 255
Refer to the graphic, after the ping 10.1.1.2 command is executed on R1, LSW1 receives a tagged data frame
from VLAN 10 on LSW2.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 256
Refer to the graphic, which of the following statements are true about VLAN configuration on Huawei switches?
(Multiple Choice)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. Client1 belongs to VLAN 10 and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the MAC address-based VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is
correct.
C. Client3 is in VLAN 30, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
E. Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is incorrect.

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 257
Which of the following statements is true about the PPP configuration and deployment?

A. PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.

B. PPP supports both CHAP and PAP authentication.
C. PPP cannot change the keepalive time.
D. PPP does not support bidirectional authentication.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 258

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
According to the following topology and configuration, R1 and R2 are connected through low-speed serial
cables and PPP is used to encapsulate data link layer packets. When the Holdtime values of R1 and R2 are
different, PPP negotiation and communication fail.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 259
Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which fields?

A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.

B. ESP, TCP and Data.
C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 260
The authentication, authorization and accounting schemes and HWTACACS or RADIUS server templates
created on AR routers take effect only after being applied to a domain.

A. TRUE
B. FALSE

Correct Answer: A

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 261
Which SNMP version focuses on two main aspects, namely security and administration. The security aspect is
addressed by offering both strong authentication and data encryption for privacy. The administration aspect is
focused on two parts, namely notification originators and proxy forwarders.

A. SNMPv1
B. SNMPv2
C. SNMPv2c
D. SNMPv3

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 262
Which of the following route entries can be aggregated into 10.0.0.24/29? (Choose all that apply.)

A. 10.0.0.25/30
B. 10.0.0.23/30
C. 10.0.0.26/30
D. 10.0.0.22/30

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 263
According to the configuration of single-armed routing in the following figure, the administrative department and
finance department can communicate with each other even the proxy ARP is disabled on the subinterface on
R1.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 264
Refer to the graphic.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts
without port translation. Host C wishes to access the public network while addresses are assigned to Host A
and Host B. What will occur as a result?

A. The first public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced offline.
B. The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced offline.
C. Host C will be unable to forward traffic over the public network.
D. All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 265
After the keepalive function is enabled for a GRE tunnel, the local end of the GRE tunnel sends a keepalive
packet to the remote end every 10s.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 266
Refer to the graphic.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Both switches are operating using STP. With exception to those shown, all other default parameters have been
maintained. Which port will be blocked?

A. Port G0/0/1 of switch A.

B. Port G0/0/2 of switch B.
C. Port G0/0/1 of switch B.
D. Port G0/0/2 of switch A.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 267
Layer 2 switches are data link layer devices that identify MAC addresses of Layer 2 data frames and forward
Layer 2 data frames based on MAC addresses. In addition, they record mappings between MAC addresses
and interfaces in the MAC address table.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 268
In RSTP mode, both alternate and backup ports cannot forward user traffic but can receive, process, and send
BPDU.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 269
Refer to the graphic.

The switch is operating using STP. All default parameters have been maintained. Which port will be assigned a
designated port role?

A. G0/0/1 of switch A.
B. G0/0/2 of switch A.
C. E0/0/1 of the hub.
D. E0/0/2 of the hub.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 270
How can the default route be generated? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Manually configured.
B. Automatically generated by the router.
C. Generated by dynamic routing protocols.
D. Generated by link layer protocols.

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 271
The following figure shows a routing table. When this router receives a packet with a destination IP address of
9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet based on the route 9.1.0.0/16 because the matched bit number in this
route is the largest.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 272
Refer to the graphic.

The routing table includes direct routes and static routes and the preference of the direct routes cannot be
changed.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 273
Refer to the graphic.

Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. When interface G0/0/1.2 of RTA receives a
frame from Host B, what will RTA do?

A. RTA will immediately forward the frame via interface G0/0/1.1.

B. RTA remove the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame.
C. RTA will remove the VLAN tag and add a new tag for VLAN10 before forwarding the frame.
D. RTA will discard the frame.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 274
Refer to the configuration output.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which of the following statements regarding the configuration output are correct? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 10.

B. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 1.
C. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 10.
D. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 1.

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 275
Refer to the graphic.

VLANs 10 and 20 have been created on both SWA and SWC. VLAN 10 has been manually created on SWB.
SWB has learned VLAN 20 from SWA via GVRP, allowing the hosts to belong to different VLANs as shown. If
port Interface G0/0/1 on SWB is changed to fixed mode, what will happen?

A. Host A will still be able to communicate with Host C.

B. Host B will still be able to communicate with Host D.
C. Hosts that belong to the same VLAN will still be able to communicate.
D. All hosts will be unable to communicate with any other host.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 276
On Sx7 series switches, which of the following VLANs can be removed by using command “undo”? (Choose all
that apply.)

A. vlan 1.
B. vlan 2.
C. vlan 1024.
D. vlan 4094.

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 277
Refer to the graphic.

A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA. Which configuration should be used?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www.inside 192.168.1.1 8080

B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www.inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www.inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www.inside 202.10.10.1 8080

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 278
On an FR network, when the fr inarp command is executed, the interface where static address mapping entries
have been configured sends an Inverse ARP Request packet to the remote device to replace the static
address mapping entries.

A. True

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 279
According to the configuration on R1 shown in the following figure, the two PCs can correctly access the ISP
network.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 280
Which of the following fields are contained in an ARP packet?

A. Source Hardware Address

B. Hardware Type
C. Source Protocol Address
D. Operation Code

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 281
Which of the following can be displayed on the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP) to indicate that GE port 2 on
subcard 0 in slot 3 of a router?

A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0

B. interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/2
C. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
D. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 282
You can run the “startup saved-configuration backup.cfg” command on the user interface of the Versatile
Routing Platform (VRP) to specify the “backup.cfg” file as the configuration file for next startup.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 283
When a network engineer enters a command, the following information is displayed:

Error: Unrecognized command found at '^' position. Which of the following statements is true about such
information?

A. The parameter type is incorrect.

B. The entered command is incomplete.
C. The entered parameter is not specified.
D. No keyword is found.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 284
In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC address
table based on received data frames.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 285
Which of the following statements is true about the MAC address table of a switch?

A. The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator.

B. The MAC address 5489-989d-1d30 is manually configured by the administrator.
C. The MAC address 5489-9885-18a8 is manually configured by the administrator.
D. After the switch restarts, all the MAC addresses need to be learned again.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 286
The MAC address table of a switch is as follows. If the switch receives a data frame whose destination MAC
address is 5489-9885-18a8 from Eth0/0/2, which of the following statements is true?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/2.
B. The data frame is flooded.
C. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/1.
D. The data frame is discarded.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 287
Which of the following descriptions about STP designated ports is correct?

A. Designated ports forward frames destined for the root switch.

B. Designated ports represent the path leading to the root switch.
C. Each bridge can have only one designated port.
D. Designated ports are responsible for sending BPDU to connected network segments.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 288
What is the total length of the port ID in STP?

A. 4 bits
B. 8 bits
C. 2 bits
D. 16 bits

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 289
Which of the following statements are true about STP BPDUs?

A. During initialization, each switch enabled with STP proactively sends configuration BPDUs.
B. BPDUs are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC address.
C. After STP is enabled on a port, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs through the designated port.
D. STP has two types of packets: configuration BPDU and TCN BPDU.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 290
ICMP packets do not contain port numbers. Therefore, NAPT cannot be used.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 291
Which of the following protocols can be used on a Layer 2 network with redundant links to prevent loops?

A. UDP
B. VRRP
C. STP
D. ARP

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 292
You can configure a static route on a broadcast interface by specifying the next-hop IP address or outbound
interface.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 293
What are the advantages of OSPF?

A. OSPF supports packet authentication.

B. OSPF can load balance traffic among equal-cost routes.
C. OSPF supports Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR).
D. OSPF supports area partition.

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 294
Which of the following statements are true about the default route?

A. In a routing table, the route to 0.0.0.0 (with the mask being 0.0.0.0) is the default route.
B. If the destination address of a packet does not match any entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded
through the default route.
C. The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
D. The routing table of any router must contain the default route.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 295
Which of the following OSPF packets can ensure LSA update reliability?

A. DD
B. LSR
C. LSU
D. LSACK

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 296
Which layer of the OSI reference model does a router work at?

A. Application layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 297
On the network shown in the figure, if all routers run OSPF, which router is elected as the BDR?

A. Router B
B. Router A
C. Router D
D. Router C

Correct Answer: B

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 298
The output of the following command on router R1 is as follows.

Which of the following statements are true?

A. The router discards the packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8.

B. The packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through Ethernet0/0/0 on the router.
C. The router forwards the packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8.
D. The packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through GigabitEthernet0/0/0 on the router.

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 299
Which of the following statements about the “ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20”
command is true?

A. The destination network address of the route is 10.0.12.2/32.

B. The mask length of the destination network address of the route is 32 bits.
C. The preference of the route is 100.
D. The route must exist in the routing table.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 300
Which of the following data packets are the OSPF protocol packets encapsulated into?

A. HTTP packet
B. TCP packet
C. IP packet
D. UDP packet

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 301
On the network shown in the figure, if all links are Ethernet links and all routers run OSPF, how many DRs will
be elected on the entire network?

A. 2
B. 4
C. 3
D. 1

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 302

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
As shown in the preceding VTY configuration, the user privilege level is set to 3.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 303
What is the main function of DHCP Discover packets?

A. The client sends DHCP Discover packets for requesting to confirm the configuration or renew the lease
time of the IP address.
B. The DHCP server sends DHCP Discover packets to respond DHCP Request packets.
C. The DHCP Discover packet carries various configuration information.
D. The client sends DHCP Discover packets to search for the DHCP server.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 304
As shown in the following figure, switch A and router A are connected through two links. The two links are
aggregated in manual load balancing mode. The aggregation port number is 1. The aggregated link needs to
carry VLAN tag 100. Switch A uses the trunk link.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Which of the following configurations need to be performed on switch A?

A.

B.

C.

D.

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 305
What is the total length of the VLAN frame defined by IEEE 802.1Q?

A. 4
B. 3
C. 2
D. 1

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 306
Which of the following is the feature of port-based VLAN assignment?

A. VLAN IDs are allocated based on the protocol type and encapsulation format of data frames.
B. The VLAN does not need to be configured again when hosts move.
C. The VLAN tag is added to data frames based on the IP address carried in the frames.
D. The VLAN needs to be configured again when hosts move.

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 307
If an Ethernet data frame carries Length/Type = 0x8100, which of the following cannot be the payload of the
data frame?

A. RSTP data frame

B. OSPF packet
C. ARP response packet
D. STP data frame

Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 308
Which of the following statements about a port on a switch is/are false?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. If the port receives data frames without VLAN tags, the switch needs to add VLAN tag 200.
B. If the VLAN tag carried in a data frame is 100, the switch removes the VLAN tag and sends the frame.
C. The link type of the port is trunk.
D. The port cannot send data frames carrying VLAN tag 200.

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 309
According to the following topology and configuration, R1 and R2 are connected through low-speed serial
cables and PPP is used to encapsulate data link layer packets. When the Holdtime values of R1 and R2 are
different, PPP negotiation and communication fail.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 310
Which of the following is/are not included in AAA?

A. Audit
B. Authentication
C. Authorization
D. Accounting

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 311
Which of the following encapsulation modes is/are supported by IPsec VPN?

A. Routing mode
B. Tunnel mode
C. Transport mode
D. Switching mode.

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 312
The IKE protocol is used to set up an SA for IPsec automatic negotiation. Identity authentication can be
performed when the IP address of the initiator changes dynamically.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 313
Which of the following SNMP packets is/are sent by the agent on the managed device to the NMS?

A. Get-Request
B. Response
C. Get-Next-Request
D. Set-Request

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 314
The RADIUS information of the router is configured as follows.

Which of the following statements is/are correct?

A. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1.

B. The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1.
C. The source IP address of the RADIUS packets sent by the router is 200.0.12.2.
D. The IP address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1.

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 315
Which of the following information must be configured for a DHCPv6 relay agent?

A. DHCPv6 address pool

B. DNS server address
C. IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 server
D. DHCPv6 DUID

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 316
Which of the following statements are true according to the following command output?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. The OSPFv3 area ID is 0.
B. The OSPFv3 process ID is 1.
C. The DR priority of the local router is 1.
D. The router ID of the neighbor is 10.0.1.1.

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 317
According to the following configuration of Router C, how many global unicast address prefixes are advertised
by Router C?

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
A. 1
B. 4
C. 2
D. 3

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 318
If the MAC address of an interface is 0EE0-FFFE-0FEC, the corresponding EUI-64 address is ( ).

A. 0CE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
B. 0EE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
C. 0EE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC
D. 0CE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 319
Which of the following address types are of IPv6 addresses?

A. Unicast address
B. Anycast address
C. Multicast address
D. Broadcast address

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 320
Segment routing-traffic engineering (SR-ТЕ) is a new ТЕ tunneling technology that uses SR as a control
protocol. All nodes of an SR-TE tunnel, including the ingress and transit nodes, must be aware of the tunnel
and complete label distribution and forwarding.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 321
In the MPLS domain, the full name of LER is label egress router.

A. True
B. False

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 322
Which area ID is used by OSPFv3 to identify the backbone area?

A. 0
B. 3
C. 2
D. 1

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
QUESTION 323
The output of the “display vlan” command on a switch is as follows.

Which of the following statements are true?

A. When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are untagged.
B. When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 10, the frames are untagged.
C. When GE0/0/2 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are tagged.
D. Four VLANs are manually created.

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 324
Which of the following authentication method is more secure for PPP?

A. CHAP.
B. MD5.

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
C. SSH.
D. PAP.

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation

Explanation/Reference:

H12-211
223B5EDCBE32B0495D3B4F4FD8FB434B
1 A network administrator has captured a data frame in the network with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-BI-C3. The correct statement about this MAC address s Q.
❑ A It is a unicast MAC address
❑ B. It is a broadcast MAC address
❑ C. It is a multicast MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. It is an illegal MAC address

2. Which of the following is not the working principle of CSMNCD?

❑ A. Listen While Talk
❑ B. RRetransmission after a fixed time delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Conflict suspension
❑ ITh Retransmission after random delay
❑ E. Listen Before Talk

Answer: B

3. The 1Py4 address of the host is 200_200_200_201/30_ Which host with the following IPv4 address and its communication do not need to be forwarded by the muter?
❑ A 200 200 200.1
❑ B. 200 200 200_202 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 200 200 200 200
❑ O. 200 200 200 203

Answer: B

4_ If the Ethernet data frame is Lengthaype=0x0806, which of the ft:Mowing statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. This data frame is an Ethernet H frame. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This data frame is an IEEE 802.3 frame
❑ C. The source MAC address of this data frame must not be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF (Right Answers)
❑ D The destination MAC address of this data frame must be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF.

Answer: AC

5. When a router enabled with Proxy ARP function receives an ARP request packet and finds that the requested IP addr not its own, what actions are performed? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A If there is a route to the destination address, send its own MAC address to the ARP requester (Right Answers )
❑ B. Discard the message
❑ C. Broadcast ARP request message
❑ D. Find if there is a route to the destination address or not (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

6. Which of the fallowing storage media are commonly used by Huawei routers? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. SDRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ C_ Flash (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Hard Disk
❑ E. SD Card (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCE

7 The Vag operating system commands are droded into four access nanMnro Innl. canaqurasan Wan and management level. Much level can run various busirress configurabon commands but cannot operate te file system ,
▪ Access level
D a. Mantonere level
coDevratian 'Teo might Answers)
❑ D. Management level

/NSW C
 8 On the VRP interface, you cannot use the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg zip to delete files. You must empty them in the recycle bin to delete files comretely.
OA. TRUE
OB FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

9 The switch MAC address table is existing as follows. which of the following statements is correct?
(fluawei>ictim mac-address
RAC address table of slot 0:
*AC Address VLAM/ PtVLAN CEVLAN Port Type (17R
VS1/SI
Ilk7.•1tn1-!
SON -0811 -0b49 I - Et h0/0/3 stati.
Total amtchias items on slot 0 displayed =
*AC address table of slot C:

*AC Akira: VLAN/ PEVLM Cf YLMI Port Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI RAC-Tunnel
5489-989d-ld30 Ith0/0/1 *amid 0/-
548.5-9895-18a6 I - Eth0/0/2 dynamic 0/-
c
-
total watching Item on slot 0 displayed 7'
E A The MAC address 5489-9885-1838 is manually configured by the administrator.
E 13_ The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator (Right Answers)
E C. The MAC address 5489-3891-1450 is manually configured by the administrator.
E D. After the switch is restarted, all MAC addresses need to be re-learned.

Answer: 13
10 As shown in the figure below, the switch starts the STP protocol. When the network is stable, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A SWB is the root bridge in this network

❑ B SWA is the root bridge in this network (Right Answers)
❑ C Both ports of SWB are in Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ D Both ports of SWC are in Forwarding state_

Answer: BC

11 The STP protocol is enabled on both switches shown in the figure below_ An engineer made the following conclusions on this network_ Do you think what is the correct conclusion? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A The GO/0/2 port of SWB is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ B The GO/N2 port of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ C Both pods of SWB are designated pods_
❑ D The GO/0/3 part of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ E Both pods of MA are designated pods (Right Answers)

Answer: ABDE
12. Compared to STP protocol, which kind of port role is added in RSTP protocol? (Multiple Choice)
El A. Alternate port (Right Answers)
I=1 B. Backup port (Right Answers)
I=1 C. Root port
❑ D. Designated port

Answer: AB

13 As shown in the figure, the two switches use the defaut parameters to run STP On Switch A the configuration command SIP root primary is used. On the switch B the configuration command SIP priority 0 is used. Which of the following
,
ports will be blocked

5WA HUB SWEI

E0
EO 0 3 GO 0 1

GO 0 1

MAC 00e0-ft00-0001 mac:wee-mama

❑ A GO/0/2 of switch A (Right Answers)
❑ B. GO/0/1 of switch B
❑ C GO/0/1 of switch A
❑ D E0/0/3 of HUB

Answer: A

14. Which of the following parameters does not the configuration BPDU packet of the STP protocol?
❑ A. Port ID
I=1 B. Bridge ID
❑ C. VLAN ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root ED

Answer: C

15. By default, how many seconds are the Forward Delay of STP protocol?
I=1 A. 20
I=1 B. 15 (Right Answers )
El C. 10
1=1 D. 5

Answer: B

16. Which of the following parameters are used in the switched network that runs the STP protocol when performing spanning tree calculations? (Multiple Choice)
7 A. Root path cost (Right Answers)
❑ B. Port ID (Right Answers)
O C. Bridge ED (Right Answers)
E D. Forward Delay

Answer: ABC

17. In the STP protocol, assume that at switches are configured with the same piton-Ey. The MAC address of switch 1 s 0.0-en-fc-0600-40, and the MAC address of switch 2 is 011.04,00-00-10, the MAC address of switch 3 e. 00-e0-fc-00-00-
20, and the MAC address of switch 4 is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80, then the root switch sheuM be ()
17 A. Switch 1
❑ 13_ Switch 2 (Right Answers)
El C. Switch
El a Switch 4

Answer: B
18, The network shown in the figure below, the MAC address of the switch has been marked Enter the command sip root secondary on the SW0 switch. Which of the following switches become the root bridge of this network,

SWA SWB
00-01-02-03-04-AA 00-01-02-03-04-BB

00-01 02 03 04-CC 00-01-02-03-04-OD

❑ A SWA
❑ 13 SWB
▪ SWC
❑ 0 SW0 (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

19. Both the two switches shown in the following figure have SIP enabled. Which port will eventually be in the Blocking state?

SWA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
G 0/0/3

G 0/0/2

❑ A. GO/0/2 port of SWA

❑ B. GO/0/3 port of SWA
❑ C. GO/0/2 port of SWB
❑ D. G0/0/3 port of SWB (Right Answers )

Answer: ❑

20 The network as shown in the following figure, after the OSPF protocol is stable, what is the neighbor status of Router A and Router B?

Router A Router B
Router ID 10.0.1,1 Router ID 10.0.2.2
Priority=255 Priority=0

Router C
Router ID 10.0.3.3
Priority=0
❑ A 2-way
❑ B. Down
❑ C FuiE (Right Answers )
❑ D. Attempt

Answer: C
21. In the network shown below, which of the following commands can be entered in the router to enable Host A to ping through Host B? (Multiple Choice)

GO/0/1
16.612.2/30

OST A Rou r A
Gl
11.0.12.1/30 immiumml
10.0i.1.1/30 0
W:10.0.12.2

1-Lavin°
G0/0/2
10.0 1

HOST B
the 10.0.12.5/

O A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2
O B. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2
I=1 C. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 (Right Answers )
O D. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

22. The network as shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.21.2 preference 70

GO/0/1
0.0.12.1/24 __10,012.2/24 I oopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
10.0,21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
G0/0/2 Router B
❑ A. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
O B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.21.2.
0 D. If the GO/0/2 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.12.2.

Answer. AB

23. Which of the following OSPF versions are suitable for IPv6?
El A. OSPFv2
1:1 B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
C] C. OSPFv4
D D. OSPFv1

Answer: B
 24 T he network as shown in the following figure, which of the following commands can enable RouterA to forward a packet with the destination IP address of 19 00 32 (Multiple Choice)

Loopback0 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24

GO/0/1 O
Router A Router B

O a
O
nr
3.3
/33

Router C
Loopback0 10_0.3.3/32
❑ A ip route-static 10.03.3 255 255 255 255 10 0.1 22 (Right Answers)
❑ B ip route-static 10 0.2.2 255 255255 255 100_12 2 ip route-static 10 03 3 255255.255 255 10 0 2 2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. ip route-static 0.0 0.0 0.0.0.0 10 0 122 (Right Answers )
❑ 0 ip route-static 10 0.33 255 255255255 1002 2

Answer: ABC

25. Which of the following about the statement of static routing are incorrect?
❑ A. Manual configuration by network administrator
❑ B. Inter-route information needs to be exchanged between routers (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can not automatically adapt to changes in network topology
❑ D. Low system performance requirements

Answer: B

26. Which of the following commands can be used to check whether OSPF has correctly established neighbor relationships?
❑ A. display ospf neighbor
❑ B. display ospf brief
❑ C. display ospf peer (Right Answers )
❑ D. display ospf interface

Answer: C

27 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Cost value_ If the value of the Cost is the same, then select according to the size of the Preference value.
❑ A. True
CO.False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
 28. As shown in the figure below ; Host A and Host B cannot communicate.

HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
MAC: MAC-A MAC:MAC-B
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

29 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Preference value_ If the Preference is the same, then select according to the size of the Cost value.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

30. The routing table consists of multiple elements. What is wrong with the following statement?

❑ k Proto shows to learn the routing protocol of this route

❑ B. NextHop shows the local interface address of this route (Right Answers)
❑ G. Pre shows the priority of this routing protocol
❑ D. Destination/Mask shows the address and mask length of the destination network/host

Answer: B

31 The correct description of the following is 0 (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant_ If there is an outgoing interface, the packet can be forwarded.
❑ B. Routes obtained through different routing protocols have different priorities (Right Answers)
❑ C. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are not comparable (Right Answers)
❑ D. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are comparable

Answer: BC
32. ip route-static 10_0.2.2 255255/55.25510.0.12.2 preference 20, about this command, which is the correct statement? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address 10.0.12.2.
❑ C. The priority of the route is 20 (Right Answers)
❑ D The NextHop of the route is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

33. The network as shown in the following figure, when the network administrator performs traffic planning, it is expected that the packets sent by Host A to Host B will be connected to G0/0/3 interface between the routers. The packets sent by
Host B to Host A go pass the G0/0/4 interface between routers Which of the following commands can implement this requirement, (Multiple Choice)

0.0.122/30

HOST A
11.0,2-1
19: 10.0.12.1/30 /
OW:10.0.112

IP: 10.0.12.5/30
10.0.126
❑ A_ Router A p route-static 10 0.12.5 255 255 255 252 11.0 12.2 Router B ip route-static 10.0.12 1 255255255252 11012 5 (Right Answers)
❑ B Router A p route-static 0 0 0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12 6 Router B ip route-static 0 00 0 0.0.0.0 11 0.12.1
❑ C. Router A p route-static 10.0.12 5 255255255252 11 0.12_6 Router B ip route-static 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 252 11 0 12.1
❑ D. Router A p route-static 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 11.0 12 2 Router B ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11_0.12.5 (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

34. If the IP address requested by the DHCP client is already occupied, which packet will the DHCP server use as the response?
❑ A. DHCP ACK
❑ B DHCP RELEASE
❑ G. DHCP NAK (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP DISCOVER

Answer: C

35. The DHCP REQUEST message must be sent in broadcast form.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

36. Which DHCP message does the DHCP client send when it wants to leave the network?
❑ A. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ B. DHCP RELEASE (Right Answers)
DHCP REQUEST
• DHCP ACK

Answer: B

37 Huawei devices can be managed using the Telnet protocol. Which of the following statements is correct about this management function?
❑ A The port number used by Telnet defaultly is 22, which cannot be modified
❑ B. Telnet must enable the VTY interface, and the maximum is 15 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Telnet does not support authentication based on username and password
❑ D. Telnet does not support deploying ACLs to increase security.

Answer: B
38 As shown, the topology and the configuration on the switch interconnect pod, you can determine that the data frame labeled as VLAN 10 can be forwarded normally between the two switches_

GEO 1 GE 1

LSW1 LSW2

[LSWIlinterface GigatitEthemet0/0/1
[LSW1-Gigabitatiemet0/0/1]Port link-type trunk
(LSW1-GigabitEttitunet0/0/11eort trunk pvid vlan 20
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/111kort trunk allow-pass Nan 10
I
ILSW2jinterface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
ILSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1Wort link-type trunk
f LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Nart trunk pvid vlan 10
(LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Port trunk allow -pass Wan 10

❑ A True
❑ B- False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

30 The output information of a port of the switch is as follows What is wrong with the following statement?

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 100
port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 200
❑ A. tithe data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 200, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the port receives a data frame without VLAN TAG, the switch needs to add VLAN TAG100.
❑ C The link type of the port is Hybrid type
E D. If the data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 100, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out.

Answer: A

40 Which information of the data frame is judged by the VLANIF interface to perform Layer 2 forwarding or Layer 3 forwarding?
❑ A. Destination MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B Source IP
❑ C. Destination pod
❑ D Source MAC

Answer: A

41 Packets forwarded between two routers must not carry VLAN TAG.
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers )

Answer: B

42. The Priority field in the VLAN tag identifies the priority of the data frame. What is the priority range?
❑ A. 0-15
❑ EL 0-63
❑ C. 0-7 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 0-3

Answer: C
43. What is the characteristic of port-based VLAN partition?
❑ A. Add a VLAN tag to the data frame based on the lP address carried in the packet.
❑ B. Assign the VLAN ID according to the protocol type and encapsulation format of the data frame.
❑ G. The host moving location no need to reconfigure the VLAN
❑ D. The host moving location needs to reconfigure VLAN (Right Answers)

Answer: D

44. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is OxC223, indicating that the protocol is:
❑ A. CHAP (Right Answers )
❑ B. PAP
❑ C. NCP
❑ D. LCP

Answer: A

45 The configuration information of a router is as follows. Which combination of wernarne and password used by the peer router can enable PPP channel associated to complete authentication?

mist Password cipher teat

test service -,YPC 151,4

El A. Username: (esti Password: (esti

❑ B Llwmame: test Password: test (Right Answers)
❑ C. Username: test2 Password: test
▪ Llsername: test2 Password: test2

Answer: B

46. Which method does the PPPoE client use to send PADI packets to the Server?
❑ A. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ B. Unicast
❑ C. Multicast
❑ D. Anycast

Answer: A

47 The network shown in the following figure requires the network where the host is located to access the Internet through Easy IP. Which of the following ACL5 should be used on the 00/0/3 interface of the muter?

❑ A. ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.13.1 0 0 0 0

❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.120 00 0255
❑ G ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100 12_1 00 00
❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100_13 0 0 0 0 255 (Right Answers)

Answer: 0
48 The configuration information of a router is as follows Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)

ISOM
authent i cal ien..schtme default.
authentication-scheme huawei
authentication-mode radius
authorization-scheme default
authorisation-scheme huawei
accounting-scheme•, defnult
domain default
domain default_admin
domain huawei
authentication-schema huawei
authorization-scheme huawei
local-user huawei password cipher 1.23956
local-user huaweitthuawei password cipher GS41321.
ke
❑ N The domain which domain name is huawei does not use the accounting scheme (Right Answers)
❑ B. if the username huawei is used for authentication, the password needs to be 654321.
❑ C. The authorization mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authorization. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The authentication mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authentication.

Answer: AC

49. The IKE protocol is used to establish an SA for IPsec auto-negotiation, which can support identity authentication when the address of the initiator of the negotiation changes dynamically
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

50. By default, in the SNMP protocol, which port number is used by the proxy process to send an alarm message to the NMS,
❑ A 163
❑ B. 161
❑ C 162 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 164

Answer: C

51. If the result of the packet matching ACL is "reject", the packet is finally discarded.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

52. In terms of security, [Psec tunnel mode is superior to [Psec transport mode.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
53. What is the status of the OSPFv3 adjacency relationship after it is established?
❑ A. Loading
O B. 2-way
O C. Full (Right Answers)
❑ D. Down

Answer: C

54. The network as shown in the following figure, when OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces, Router A and Rcuter B cannot establish adjacencies.

Fe80::fe03:e24f/64 Fe80::fe03:c3fb/64
-1
30011 2:1/64 300112;1/64 1

GO/0/1
Router B Router A
Router ID 10.0.2.2 Router ID 10.0.2.2
O A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False

Answer: A

55. Which of the following fields are fields that exist in both 1Pv6 and [PV4 headers? (Multiple Choice)
O A. Source Address (Right Answers)
El B. Version (Right Answers)
O C. Destination Address (Right Answers)
O D. Next Header

Answer: ABC

56. What is the destination address of the DHCPv6 request packet?

O A. FF01::1:2
LI B. FF02::1:2 (Right Answers)
111 C. FF02::1
O D. FF02::2

Answer: B

57. By defauFt, how many seconds is the period of OSPFv3 HELLO packet sending on the Ethernet link?
O A. 30
O B. 10 (Right Answers)
O C. 20
El D. 40

Answer: B
58. Which of the following fields does the MPLS header include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Label (Right Answers)
▪ EXP (Right Answers)
❑ TTL (Right Answers)
❑ Tas

Answer: ABC

59 SR (SegmentRouting) defines a destination address prefix/node and adjacency in the network as segments, and assigns SIDS (Segment 10s) to the segments. By performing an unordered list of Adjacency SIDS and Prefix/Node SIDS
(destination address prefixes/node segments), a forwarding path is obtained
❑ A True
❑ 11 False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

60 The ARP protocol can resolve the MAC address of the target device according to the destination IP address, thereby, to map the link layer address and the IP address
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

61 The Traced diagnostic tool records the 0 of each ICMP TTL timeout message so that the user can be provided with the IP address of the packet when it arrives at the destination_
❑ A Destination port
❑ B. Source port
❑ C Destination IP address
❑ D. Source 1F1 address (Right Answers)

Answer: D

€2. VLSM can expand any IP network segment ; including Class D addresses.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

63_ Which fields in the IPv4 header are related to sharding? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Fragment Offset (Right Answers)
▪ Flags (Right Answers)
❑ G. Tit
❑ IT identification (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

64. The pwd and dir commands in the VRP operating platform can view the file information in the current directory.
❑ A_ True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: 13
65. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)

<Huawei>display startup
MainBoard:
Startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc
Next startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc
Backup system software for next startup: null
Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.zip
Next startup saved-configuration file: flash:/backup.zip
Startup license file: null
Next startup license file: null
Startup patch package: Null
Next startup patch package: null
Startup voice-files: null
Next startup voice-files: null
O A. The currently used VRP version file is the same as the VRP file used for the next startup. (Right Answers)
O B. The currently used VRP version file is different from the VRP file used for the next startup.
O C. The currently used configuration file is different from the one used for the next startup. (Right Answers)
O D. The currently used configuration file is the same as the one used for the next startup.

Answer: AC

66. For a switch running STP, the port can be directly converted to the Disabled state in any state.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

67. Which of the following MAC addresses will not age? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Dynamic MAC address
❑ B. Black hole MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Static MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port MAC address

Answer: BC

68. By default, the bridge priority of a switch is 32768.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
69. Which port of the following switches is blocked as shown in the following figure?

SVVA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB

SWC
32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC
❑ A. GO/0/2 of SWC
❑ B. GO/0/1 of SWC (Right Answers)
❑ C GO/0/3 of SWB
❑ D. GO/0/3 of SWA

Answer: B

70. As shown in the following figure, all hosts can communicate normally. What is the correct relationship between the SWBMAC address and the port?

G 0/0/3 G 0/0/3

SA SB
G 0/0/
G /0/2 G 0/0/1

HOST A HOST B HOST C

IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24 IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-A MAC:MAC-B MAC:MAC-C
❑ A. MAC-A G0/0/3 MAC-B G0/0/3 MAC-C GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ C. MAC-A G0/0/2 MAC-B G0/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ D. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/1 MAC-C G0/0/3

Answer: A

71. A switch running STP protocol will send TCN BPDUs only when a port on the switch fails.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
 72. How many bits of the Port ED total length in the spanning tree protocol?
El A. 16 (Right Answers)
El B. 4
El C. 2
El ID 8

Answer: A

73. As shown in the figure, the correct description about this network topology is 0.

VA

HostA Host& Host C Host D

❑ A. There are 6 collision domains in this network.
111 B. There are 6 broadcast domains in this network.
❑ C. There are 12 collision domains in this network.
El D. There are 2 broadcast domains in this network. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

74. Which of the following statements about the Backup port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
O A. Backup port as a backup of the designated port, providing another backup path from the root bridge to the corresponding network segment (Right Answers)
0 B. Backup port not only forwards user traffic but also learns MAC address
C C. Backup port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
0 D. Backup port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port of the root port

Answer: A

75. A network consisting of switches does not have STP enabled. A Layer 2 loop must occur.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
76_ When a port running the standard STP protocol receives a suboptimal BPDU, it immediately sends its own configuration BPDU from this port_
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

77 As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF protocol_ The top of the link is the size of the Cost value_ What is the path of the RA to the network 10 0 0 NB'?

'
1°

10.0.0.0/8

Router Router D

Router C
❑ A. A-B-D
❑ B. PA can not reach 10.0.0.018
❑ C A-D
❑ D A-C-D (Right Answers)

Answer: D

TB Which of the following statements about OSPF neighbor status is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. In the Exchange state, the routers send each other a DO packet containing the summary of the link state information to describe the content of the local LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ B. The master-sinve relationship of OSPF is formed in the ExStarl state (Right Answers)
❑ C_ After the router LSDB is synchronized, it is converted to the Full state_ (Right Answers)
❑ D_ The serial number of the OD packet is determined in the Exchange state_

Answer: ABC

79. On the network shown in the following figure, the administrator wants Router A to use static mutes to send packets to Router B priority through GO/0/1 Which command can be used to meet this requirement'

GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12 2/24 Loopback 0
O 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
Router A GO/0/2 Router B
❑ A. ip mute-static 100 22 255.255.255.255 10 0.12 2 ip route-static 10.0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212 preference 40
❑ B. ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255 255 255 10.0.122 ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.212 preference 70 Might Answers)
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 100_12.2 ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212
▪ ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255 10 0.12 2 preference 70 ip route-static 10 0 2.2 255.255.255.255 10.021.2

Answer: B

80 ip route-static 10 0.12.0 255 255.255 0 192.168.1.1

The correct description about this command is 0.
❑ A. The priority of this route is 100
❑ B. This command configures a route to the 192.168.1.1 network_
❑ C This command configures a route to the 10_0 12 0 network. (Right Answers)
❑ D. if the router learns the route of the same destination network as this route through other protocols, the router wit prefer this route.

Answer: C
81 Network structure and OSPF partition as shown in the figure, except for R1, routers R2, R3 and R4 are ABR routers of OSPF.

Areal R4 Area2

❑ A True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

82[R1] ospf
[R1-ospf-I area I
[R1-ospf-1-area-00 0 1] netted< 10 0.12 0 0 0 0255
As shown in the configuration, the administrator has configured OSPF on R1, but R1 cannot learn the mutes of other routers. The possible reason is () (Multiple Choice)
❑ A This router is not configured with authentication, but the neighbor router is configured with authentication (Right Answers )
❑ B The OSPF process 10 is not configured when this router is configured_
❑ C The area ID configured by this router is different from the area ID of its neighbor router (Right Answers )
❑ B. This router does not announce the network connecting neighbors when configuring OSPF (Right Answers)

Answer: ACID

83. Which of the following data packets is the OSPF protocol encapsulated in?
❑ A. IP (Right Answers)
❑ B. liTTP
❑ C. UDP
❑ D. TGP

Answer: A

84 Whichi of the following about the default route is correct! (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
❑ B In the routing table the default route appears as a route to the network 0 0 0 0 (the mask is also 0 0 00) (Right Answers)
❑ C There must be a default route in the routing table of any router
❑ 0 If the destination address of the packet cannot match any destination address of the routing table, the packet will be forwarded by selecting the default route (Right Answers)

Answer: BO

85 When configuring a static mule on a broadcast interlace, you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or outbound interlace_
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
86. Which of the following attributes cannot be used as a parameter to measure Cost?
111 A. Delay
111 B. sysname (Right Answers)
El C. Hop count
❑ D. Bandwidth

Answer: B

87. As shown in the following figure. Router A and Router B establish an OSPF neighbor relationship. The OSPF process ID of Router A is 1 and the area ID is O. Which of the following methods can enable Router B to obtain the route of the
nehvork segment where Host A is located? (Multiple Choice)

10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24

GO/0/1
Rou er A Router B
is° E;
0

lj IP:192.168.1.1/24
GW:192.168.1.2
HOST A
0 A ospf t area 0.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.00.0.0.255 0 (Right Answers)
FA B ospf 1 import-route direct 0 (Right Answers)
P C. ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192168.0.00.0.255 255 (Right Answers)
❑ D ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1.2 0.0.0.0 0 (Right Answers )

Answer. ABCD

88. Which of the following fields does not contain in HELLO packets of OSPF protocol?
El A. Neighbor
11] B. sysname (Right Answers)
CI C. Hello Interval
CI D. Network Mask

Answer: B

89. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)
111 B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
C] C. Reduce the time it takes to establish adjacency
CI D. Reduce the number of exchanges of link state information (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

90. Which of the following are routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)

CI A. BGP (Right Answers)
El B. IPX
111 C. OSPF (Right Answers)
111 D. IP

Answer: AC
 91. A company network administrator wants to be able to remotely manage branch network devices. Which of the following protocols will be used?
❑ A. VLSM
❑ B. Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ C. RSTP
❑ D. CIDR

Answer: B

92. Which of the following message types does DHCP contain? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. DHCP ROLLOVER
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP OFFER (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

93. Telnet is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

95. What should do when the Access port sends a data frame?
❑ A. Replace VLAN TAG forwarding
❑ B. Stripping TAG forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Mark PVID forwarding
❑ D. Send a message with TAG

Answer: B
96. If the configuration information of a port on a switch is as follows, when this port sent the data frames of which VLAN, the VLAN TAG is stripped?

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid tagged vlan 2 to 3 100
port hybrid untagged vlan 4 6

❑ A. 4,5,6
❑ B. 4,6
❑ C. 1,4,6 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 1,4,5,6

Answer: C
 97. The configuration information of a port on the switch is as follows, when the port sends the data frame of which VLAN TAG is carried, the VLAN TAG is stripped?

*
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 10
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20 30 90

❑ A 10 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 40

Answer: A

98. When a port of the switch sends a data frame carrying the same VLAN TAG and PVID, it must strip the VLAN TAG forwarding.
❑ A. True
❑ B FaEse (Right Answers)

Answer: B

99 As shown in the following figure, Router A uses manual link aggregation and adds GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports to aggregation group 1 The incorret statement about the status of Router A aggregation port 1 is:

Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.1/24 Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.2/24

O C0/0/2 O
Router A Router B
❑ A_ Only shut down GO/0/2 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol up
❑ Tum off GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Tmnk 1 protocol up (Right Answers)
❑ a Only shut down GO/0/1 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1protocol up
❑ B. Turn off GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol down

Answer: B

1 00. In the network shown in the figure the correct description of the following is:

5 WA RTA SWB

HUB SWC
❑ A. The network between RTA and SWC is the same collision domain.
❑ B. The network between SWA and SWC is the same broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The network between SWA and SWC is the same collision domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The network between SWA and SWB is the same broadcast domain.

Answer: BC

1 09. When NAT uses a dynamic address pool, addresses in the address pool can be reused, that is, the same IP is mapped to multiple intranet (Ps at the same time
❑ A True
❑ 11 False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
102. Which of the following values is used in the LengthfType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating that the packet is in the PPPoE discovery phase?
❑ A. 0x0800
❑ B. 0x8863 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x8864
❑ D. 0x0806

Answer, B

103. Regarding PPP configuration and deployment ; which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. PPP does not support mutual authentication
❑ B. PPP cannot modify keepalive time
❑ C. PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.
❑ D. PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication modes. (Right Answers )

Answer: D

104. On the Huawei device, if AAA authentication is used for authorization, when the remote server does not respond, authorization can be performed from the network device side.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False

Answer: A

105. As shown in the network, the configuration information of Router A is as follows. Which of the following statement is wrong?
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.7
rule 10 permit source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.15

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
traffic-filter outbound acl 2000

Router A
❑ A. The host with the source FP address of 200.0.12.2 cannot access the Internet.
❑ B. The host with the source EP address of 200.0.12.6 cannot access the Internet.
❑ C. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.8 cannot access the Internet. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.4 cannot access the Internet.

Answer: C

106. Based on ACL rules, which of the following types can an ACL be classified into? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Layer 2 ACL (Right Answers)
❑ B. User ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ D. Basic ACL (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
107. The Management Information Base MIB is a virtual database that is stored on the NMS.
O A. True
O B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

108. As shown in the following figure, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec tunnel mode?

New IP Header IP Header ,AH Header TCP Header Data

1
2
3
4
O A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

109. The ACL on the AR G3 series router supports two matching sequences: configuration order and automatic sorting.
D A. True (Right Answers)
[11 B. False

Answer: A

110. The requested node multicast address consists of the prefix FF02::1:FF00:0/104 and the last 24 bits of the unicast address.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
O B. False

Answer: A

111. How many seconds is the period of the OSPFv3 HELLO packet on the P2P link by default?
O A. 10 (Right Answers)
El B. 20
O C. 30
El D. 40

Answer: A

112. The multicast address FF02::2 indicates all routers in the link-local range.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 113. The basic header length of an IPv6 message is a fixed value.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

114. IPv6 address 2001: ABEF 224E: FFE2: BCCO: CDOO: DDBE 8D58 cannot be abbreviated.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

115. The router Router D neighbor relationship is as follows Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)

(-Router D>displey osofv3 peer 10. 0, 3. 3 verbose

OSPFv3 Process (1)

Neighbor 10. 0, 3. 3 is 2-Way, interface address FE80; ;MO:FCFF :4ECS

In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GEC/0/0
DR Priority is 1 DR is 10.0.2.2 BDR is 10.0.1.1
Options is 01000013
Dead timer due in 00:00:35
Neighbour is up for 00:00:00
Database Suaueary Packets List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Neighbour Event: 2
Neighbour If Id :
❑ A. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1.
❑ C. This router is a DROther router (Right Answers)
❑ D. This router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot directly exchange link state information. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

116. SRGB (segment routing global block). A local label set reserved for the global segment. In MPLS and IP,(6, SRGB is a collection of local labels reserved for global labels.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers )

Answer: B

117_ One of the reasons for the emergence of SR (Segment Routing) is that there are some factors that restrict the devebpment of traditional LOP. What are the correct descriptions about LOP of the following? (MullipP Choice)
❑ A. LOP calculation depends on ICP When IGP and LOP are not synchronized, it will cause black holes and affect the service (Right Answers)
❑ B LOP itself has 11 kinds of protocol packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and device CPU utilization. (Right Answers)
❑ C. LOP only supports IGP shortest path (minimum overhead) for path calculation, and does not support traffic engineering. (Right Answers)
▪ LOP cannot implement automatic label allocation

Answer: ABC

118_ The network administrator wants to be able to effectively use the IP address of the 192 168 176_0/25 network segment_ Now the company's marketing department has 20 mainframes, it is best to assign which of the following address
segment to the marketing depadment?
❑ A. 192_168_176_160/27
❑ B. 192.168.17696/27 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 192 168 176 0/25
❑ B. 192 168 176 4W29

Answer: B

119 When using gm ping command on the VRP platform, d you need to specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request message, which of the loemung parameters shouts be used/When using the sing command on Ihe VRP
platform, if you need lo specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request message, which of the following parameters should he used?
ID A. -s
❑ Ei -a (Right Answers)
❑ C4
❑ o_ -n

Answer. El
 120. Which of the following types of addresses cannot be used as the IPv4 address of host?
❑ A. Class A address
❑ B. Class B address
❑ C. Class C address
❑ D. Class D address (Right Answers)

Answer: D

121. A company applies for a Class C IP address segment, but it is assigned to 6 subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary has 26 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. So the network subnet mask of the largest
subsidiary should be, set to 0.
C A 255 255.255.224 (Right Answers)
17 B. 255.255.255.128
C C. 255.255.255.0
E 0. 255.255.255.192

Answer, A

122. Which of the following statement about the transport layer protocol is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. UDP uses the SYN and ACK flags to request to establish a connection and confirm the connection.
❑ B. Well-known port number range is 0-1023 (Right Answers )
❑ C. UDP is suitable for transmitting delay-sensitive traffic and can be reorganized according to the sequence number field in the message header.
❑ D. The establishment of a TCP connection is a three-way handshake process, and the termination of a TCP connection is subject to a four-way handshake. (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

123. Which of the following commands can modify the device name to huawei?
❑ A. rename huawei
❑ B. sysname huawei (Right Answers)
❑ C. do name huawei
❑ D. hostname huawei

Answer: B

124. The administrator wants to update the VRP of the AR2200 router. The correct method is (). (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP server to transmit VRP software through TFTP.
❑ B. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP client to transmit VRP software through TFTP. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP server to transfer VRP software through FTP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP client to transfer VRP software through FTP. (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

125. What are the command line views exsiting on the VRP operating platform?
❑ A. Interface view (Right Answers)
❑ B. User view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Protocol view (Right Answers)
❑ D. System view (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD
 126. Which bridge ID is not possible in the configuration BPDU sent by the switch?
❑ A. 4096 01-01-02-03-04-05 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 0 10-01-02-03-04-05
❑ C. 32768 06 01 02 03 04 05
❑ D. 0 00-01-02-03-04-05

Answer: A

127. In a switch networking, if a loop occurs, it may cause a broadcast storm.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

128. The loop protection function provided by the RSTP protocol can take effect only on the specified port.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

129. In the RSTP protocol, the edge port loses the edge port attribute when it receives the configuration BPDU message.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

130. When STP is running on Huawei Sx7 series switches ; the priority of the switch is 0 by default.
❑ A. 8192
❑ B. 32768 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 16384
❑ D. 4096

Answer: B

131. Which of the following statement about the role of the STP protocol Forward Delay is correct?
❑ A. Reduce the time interval for BPDU transmission
❑ B. Delay in the transition of Blocking state and Disabled state
❑ C. Improve the convergence speed of STP
❑ D. Improve the BPDU lifetime and ensure that the configuration BPDU can be forwarded to more switches.
❑ E. Preventing temporary loops (Right Answers)

Answer: E

132. What is the correct statement about the static MAC address table?
❑ A. The user is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged. (Right Answers)
❑ B. By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two connected devices.
❑ C. Static MAC address entries are lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset.
❑ D. You can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of static MAC address entries.

Answer: A
 133. Which parameter is used in the spanning tree protocol to erect the root bridge?
❑ A. Port ID
❑ B. The system name of the switch
❑ C. Root path cost
❑ D. Bridge ID (Right Answers)

Answer: D

134 The administrator finds that the two routers stay in the TWO-WAY state when establishing an OSPF neighbor, the correct description of the following is ()
❑ A. The router is configured with the same zone ID
❑ B. These two routers are DR Other routers in the broadcast network. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The router is configured with the wrong router ID
❑ D The router is configured with the same process ID

Answer: B

135 An AR2200 router barns the route entries to the same network through OSPF and RIPv2 The cost of the route learned through OSPF is 4882 The number of hops learned through 51552 is 4 The routing table of the router will have ()
❑ A OSPF and RIPv2 routing
❑ 8 OSPF routing (Right Answers)
❑ C Both do not exist
❑ D RIPv2 routing

Answer: B

136. When the router forwards the datagram ; the data link layer needs to be re-encapsulated every time a data link layer passed.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

137. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ B. Point to point (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-point type (Right Answers)
❑ D. NBMA (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

138. Which of the following are the stable states of OSPF neighbor relationships? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Down (Right Answers)
❑ B. Full (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ D. Attempt

Answer: ABC

139. Which of the following routing protocols are dynamic routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ B. BGP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Direct
❑ D. Static

Answer: AB
140 As shown in the figure, all routers run OSPF protocol, and the OSPF process number i5 1 and the area number is 0 Which of the following commands can implement this requirement on Router A? (Multiple Choice)

10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
O GO/0/1 O
Router A Router B
❑ A # ospf 1 area 00 0 0 network 10 0.12.1 0 0 00 # (Right Answers)
❑ B # ospf 1 area 0000 network 100.1200003#
❑ C. # ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 0 12 0 00 0 255 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 ip address 10 0 121 255 255 255 0 ospf enable 1 area 0 0 0 0 # (Right Answers)

Answer: AGO

141. In the OSPF protocol, which of the following description of the DR is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The adjacency relationship must also be established between the DR and the BDR. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the priority values of the two routers are equal. select the router with the large router ID as the DR (Right Answers)
❑ C if the priority values of the two routers are different, select the router with the smaller priority value as the DR_
❑ D By default, all routers in this broadcast network will participate in DR elections (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

142 As shown in the figure, after the Um routers are configured with OSPF, the administrator configures the <mlenhinterfaces0f0/1> command on the RTA. The correct description is O (Multiple Choice)

RTA RTB

SO/0/1 60/0/1
❑ A The RTA wit continue to receive and analyze the OSPF packets sent by the RTB.
❑ B_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers will be down_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ RTA wit not send OSPF packets anymore_ (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers wit not be affected

Answer: BC

143. A DHCP OFFER packet can wry a DNS address, but can only carry one DNS address..
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

144 As hown in the following figure, host A logs in to Router A through Telnet, and then obtains the configuration file of Router B through FM on the remote interface_ How many TCP connections exist on Router A?

HOST A
IP :192.168.1.2/2
GW:192.168.1.1
❑ A.1
❑ B2
❑ C 3 (Right Answers)
❑ 0.4

Answer: C

145 At present, the company has a network administrator. The AR2200 in the company network can be for remote management after directly enter the password through Telnet.
The company has two new network administrators, and wants to assign all administrators their respective usernames and passwords, as well as different permission levels. So what should doe (Multiple Choice)
❑ A When configuring each administrator's account, you need to configure different permission levels_ (Right Answers)
▪ R User authentication mode configured by Telnet must select AAA mode (Right Answers)
❑ C Configure three user names and their corresponding passwords in the AAA New. (Right Answers)
❑ CI Each administrator uses different public IP addresses of the device when running the Telnet command_

Answer: ABC
 146. What is the role of the port trunk allow-pass vtan all command?
❑ A. The connected peer device can dynamically determine which VLAN IDs can pass.
❑ B. If the port default vian3 command is configured for the connected remote device, VLAN 3 between the two devices cannot communicate.
❑ C The peer port connected to the port must be configured with port trunk permit vlan all
❑ D. Allow all data frames of the VLAN to pass through the port. (Right Answers )

Answer: D

14T_ The Hybrid port can connect to both the user host and other switches_
I=1 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

148. The IP addresses of the VLANIF interfaces on the same switch cannot be the same.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A
149. As shown in the following figure, the router uses the sub-interface as the gateway of the host. The P address of the gateway is 10 0.12 2 Which of the following commands can fu II this requirement? (Multiple Choice)

10.0.12.2/24
SWA
G 0/0/2 O
Access elan 20 Router A
ct
0
O

HOST A
11,1 10.0.12.1/24
MAC:MAC-A
❑ A interface GigabitEthemet0/0/43 10 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 100_122 255255 255 0 arp broadcast enable #
❑ B. interface Gi gabitEthernot0/0/0 20 dotlq termination old 20 ip address 100_12 2 255255255 0 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ G. interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.10 dotlq termination vid 20 ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ a interface GigabitEthernet0/0/020 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 10 0 12 2 255255 255 0 arp broadcast enable M

Answer: BC

150 The network administrator creates VLAN 10 on the Layer 3 switch and configures an IP address on the virtual interface of the VLAN_ When you use the command "<I>display ip interface brief</l,to check the status of the interface and
find that the VLANIF 10 interface is down, what operations should be taken to restore the VLANIF 10 interface?
❑ A Use the command "undo shutdown" on the VLANIF 10 interface.
❑ B. Incorporate a physical interface whose state must be Up into VLAN 10 (Right Answers)
❑ C Incorporate any physical interface into VLAN 10
❑ 0_ Incorporate an interface whose state must be Up and must be of the Trurk type into VLAN 10

Answer: B

151 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the ports connected to the host on the two switches as access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure GO/0/1 of the SA and
GO/0/2 of the SWB as trunk ports to allow all VLANs to pass. To achieve normal communication between the two hosts, he also needs 0

Hos, Host 13
VI Na VW

❑ A_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC.

❑ B. Configure GO/0/1 on the SWC as the trunk port and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ G Configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 on the SWC as trunk ports and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ 0_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 as trunk ports and alum VLAN 2 to pass (Right Answers )

Answer:
152 As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows_ According to the network and configuration, which of the following statements are correct,(Multiple Choice)
Router B
interface Senal1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10 021 1 255.255 255 0

ospf 1 router-id 10021.1

area 0000
network 10 0 21_1 0_0_0_0

Router A
interface Senal1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10 012.1 255 255 255 0

ospf 1 router-id 100.121

area 0000
network 10 0_121 0 0 0_0

S 1/0/0 S 1/0/0
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.21.1/24
O
Router A Router B
❑ A_ Router A and Router B cannot team the MAC address of the other interface. (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Router A and Router B have ARP tables_
❑ C Two routers can establish OSPF adjacency (Right Answers)
❑ El There is no OR and BOR in the network (Right Answers)

Answer: AGO

153 The data link layer uses PPP encapsulation, and the iP addresses at both ends of the hnk may not he in the same network segment
❑ A True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A

154. The command to enable CHAP authentication in PPP is: ppp chap authentication.
❑ A. True
❑ False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

155. Apply the following ACL in SNMP: which of the following is wrong?
act number 2000
rule 5 permit source 192.168.1.2 0
rule 10 permit source 192.168 1_3 0
rule 15 permit source 192.168.1.4 0

❑ A. The device with IP address 192_168_1.5 can use SNMP service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 192.168.1.3 can use SNMP service.
❑ C. The device with the [P address of 192.168.1.4 can use SUMP service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 192.168.1.2 can use SNMP service.

Answer: A

156. In the packet encapsulation format shown in the figure, which of the following fields will be encrypted by the ESP protocol of IPsec VPN?

❑ A_ ESP Header, TCP Header, Data

❑ B. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer
❑ C. ESP Header, Tam Header, Data, ESP Trailer, ESP Auth
❑ D. TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer (Right Answers )

Answer: D
 157 As shown in the figure below, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec transmission mode?

IP Header AH Header CP Header Data

1
2
3
4 .
1=1 A. 1
ID B. 2
CI C. 3
❑ D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

158. When the data encapsulation mode of I Psec is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is hidden, which can protect the security of the entire original data packet.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

159. Which of the following commands configures the authentication mode to be HWTACACS authentication?
❑ A. authorization-mode hwtacacs
❑ B. authentication-mode local
❑ C. authentication-mode none
❑ D. authentication-mode hwtacacs (Right Answers )

Answer: D

160. During the establishment of the adjacency relationship, what is the role of DD packets in OSPFv3?
❑ A. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑ B. Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ C. To describe its own LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ D. Request missing LSA

Answer: C

161. ff the MAC address of an interface is OEEO-FFFE-OFEC, what is its corresponding EU1-64 address?
❑ A. 02E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. OOEO-FCEF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ C. OOEO-FCFF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ D. 00E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC

Answer: A
 162. Which field of the IPv6 header can be used for Q0S?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Payload Length
❑ C. Traffic Class (Right Answers)
❑ D. Version

Answer: C

163. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001:0DB8:0000:0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 is?

❑ A. 3001:0D138::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001:DB8::346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3001:DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:81358
❑ D. 3001:0DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

Answer: B

164. The same interface of the router cannot be used as both a DHCPv6 server and a DHCPv6
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

165. Which packet is sent by the DI ICPv6 client, requesting the DI ICPv6 server to assign an IPv6 address and network configuration parameters to it?
❑ A. Solicit (Right Answers)
❑ B. Advertise
❑ C. Discover
❑ D. Request

Answer: A

166. Segment routing (SR) is a protocol based on what idea to design for forwarding packets on the network?
❑ A. Routing strategy
❑ B. Destination routing
❑ C. Policy routing
❑ D. Source routing (Right Answers)

Answer: D

167. How many bytes are the packets using the MPLS label double-layer nesting technology more than the original IP packets?
❑ A. 4
❑ B. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 16
❑ D. 32

Answer; B
168. Which of the following subnet routes can aggregate fron the route entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 10.0.0.24130 (Right Answers )
❑ B. 10.0.0.26130
❑ C. 10.0.0.28/30 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 10.0.0.23/30

Answer: AC
 164. An IPv4 packet header length field is 20B. and the Iota[ length field is 1500B then what is the packet payload?
❑ A. 20B
❑ B_ 1520B
❑ C. 1480B (Right Answers )
❑ D. 95000

Answer: C

170. Which of the following is unlikely to be the 1l3v4 packet header length?
❑ A. 208
❑ 8. 64B (Right Answers)
❑ C. 608
❑ ❑. 328

Answer: B

171. The Ethernet optical interface can only work in the 0 mode.
❑ A. Full duplex (Right Answers)
❑ B. Half duplex
❑ C. Simplex
❑ D. Soft-negotiation

Answer: A
172 <Huawei>
Warning- Auto-Gonfig is working. Before configunng the device, stop Auto-Gonfigif you perform configurations when Auto-Gonfig is running, the DHCP routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost.
Do you want to stop Auto-config, [YIN]:
The administrator found that the above message popped up on the demo_ The correct statement about this information is (),
❑ A. If you need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to choose
❑ B. If you do not need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to select N
❑ G When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is enabled (Right Answers)
❑ D When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is disabled.

Answer: C

173. Which of the following commands can be used to query the configuration information of the OSPF protocol? (Mutliple Choice)
❑ A. dis ip routing-table
❑ B. display current-configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. display ospf peer
❑ D. In OSPF protocol view display this (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
174. The output information of a certain device is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)

<Huawei>display interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

ailiegitEthemet0/0/0 current state : DP
Line protocol current slate 7 LIFE
Route Port, The !axiom Transmit Unit is 1000
Internet Address is 10. 0.12. 2/29
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFIT_ETHNI_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc224fff
Port lode: FORCE COPPER
Speed : 100, Loosback: NOW
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: DISABLE
Ech : AUTO
Last 300 seconds input rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Lest 300 seconds output rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
❑ A. The MAC address of the interface is 00e0-fe22-4fff (Right Answers)
❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10 0 122/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C The working speed of this interface is 1Gbps_
❑ D. The MTh value of this interface is 1000. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

175 What is the correct statement about the black hole MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset (Right Answers)
❑ B. It is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged (Right Answers)
❑ C. After the blackhole MAC address is configured, the packet which source MAC address or the destination MAC address is the MAC address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
❑ 0 You can filler out illegal users by configuring blackhole MAC address entries. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABC0

176. Which is the correct statement about the static MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the interface is stabcaily bound to the MAC address, the other interface receives the packet whose source MAC address is the MAG address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
DB_ By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two connected devices.
❑ C. A static MAC address entry can be bound to only one outbound interface_ (Right Answers)
❑ B. The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset. (Right Answers)

Answer: AC0

177. In the RSTP protocol, when the root port fails, 0 will he quickly converted to the new root port and immediately enter the forwarding state.
❑ A. Backup port
❑ B. Edge port
❑ C. Forwarding port
❑ D. Alternate port (Right Answers)

Answer: D

1 78. Both the Alternate port and the Backup port in RSTP cannot forward user traffic in RSTP, but can receive, process, and send BPDUs.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 179. Al[ switches in the following figure have STP protocol enabled, if the path cost of all ports is 200_
What is the path cost value included in the configuration BPDU received by the GO/0/4 port of SWD?

SWA SWB
32768 00-01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-13E1

SWD
32168 00-01-02.03-04-CC 32768 00-01 -02-03-04- DI)

D A. 0
❑ B. 200 (Right Answers )
❑ G. 400
❑ D. €00

Answer: B

180 As shown in the figure, at four switches run SIP, and various parameters use default values. When a port on the root switch sends a lam and fails to send configuration BPOUs through the port, how bng before the bbcked port in the
network enters the forwarding state,

floor

hC

❑ A About 30 seconds
❑ B About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ G About 15 seconds
❑ 0. About 3 seconds

Answer: B

1 81. By default, it takes at least 30 seconds for the port status in SW to be changed from ❑isabled to forwarding.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

182. There are multiple NextHops in the routing table that reach the same destination network. These routes are called?
❑ A. Equivalent routing (Right Answers)
❑ B. ❑efault route
❑ C. Multipath routing
❑ ❑ - Suboptimal routing

Answer: A
183. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol need to elect DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Point-to-point type
❑ B. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ C. NBMA (Right Answers)
❑ D. Point to point

Answer: BC

184. The Router ID of the OSPF process takes effect immediately after being modified.
❑ A. True
O B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

185. When configuring OSPF on a router, you must manually configure 0. (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Enable OSPF process (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create an OSPF area (Right Answers)
❑ C. Configure the router ID
❑ D. Specify the network included in each zone (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

186. The priority of the static routing protocol cannot be specified manually.
O A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

187. Which of the following statements about direct route is correct?

❑ A. Direct route priority is lower than dynamic route
❑ B. Direct route requires the administrator to manually configure the destination network and next hop address.
❑ C. Direct route has the highest priority (Right Answers)
O D. Direct route priority is lower than static route

Answer: C

188. The router in the backbone area has all the LSDBs in all its areas.
O A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
189. Which of the following parameters does the OSPF protocol use for the master-slave relationship election?
O A. Process number of OSPF protocol
O B. Router ID (Right Answers)
O C. Sequence of startup protocols
❑ D. Interface IP address

Answer: B

190.According to the following DHCP flowchart, which statements are true? (Multiple Choice)

Client 08CP Server

DHG. oistaver
Slept

MCP Offer
Strp2

CHCP Request
Srep3

DliCP ACK
sup&

El A. In step 1, multicast packets are sent.

111 B. In step 2 ; unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
111 C. In step 3; broadcast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
El D. In step 4, unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
El E. In step 4, broadcast packets are sent.

Answer: BCD

191. The DHCP protocol interface address pool has a higher priority than the global address pool.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

192. As shown in the following figure, all links are Ethernet links, and all routers run OSPF. How many DR are elected in the entire network?

Router
0..

0 A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D
 193. How many member ports can be added to an Eth-Trunk interface on ARG3 series router and X7 series switch?
D A. 6
❑ B. 8 (Right Answers)
D C. 10
CI D. 12

Answer; B

194. A trunk port can send both tagged data frames and unlabeled data frames.
GA. TRUE (Right Answers)
Cl B. FALSE

Answer: T

195. As shown in the figure, if host A has host B ARP cache, host A can ping through host B.

Access vian Xo
SWA
G 0/0/2
Access vtan 20 SERVER B
tp 14;0 I/
ipodu 14.41A4

HOST A
IP 10.0.12.1.124
MAC:MAC

0 A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
196. Which of the following statements about one-arm routing is correct? (Multiple choice)
0 A. One physical connection per VLAN
O B. On the switch, configure the port connected to the router as a trunk port and allow the frames of the relevant VLAN to pass. (Right Answers)
O C. Need to create a sub-interface on the router (Right Answers)
O D. Only one physical link is used between the switch and the router. (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

197. Which of the following statements about link aggregation is correct? (Muitiple choice)
0 A. Eth-Truk interfaces cannot be nested (Right Answers )
O B. Ensure that the modes of link aggregation on the two devices are the same when the two devices are connected to each other_ (Right Answers)
O C. The GE interface and the FE interface cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right Answers)
O D. GE electrical interfaces and GE optical interfaces cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right Answers)

Answer; ABCD

198. NAPT uses the same public IP address but different port numbers to translate private IP addresses. Which statement regarding the port number is correct?
El A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.
El B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
El C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
0 D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers. (Right Answers)

Answer: D
 199. Refer to the graphic.

RTA RTB
NDLC
Loopback 0 S1/0/1 S1/0/1
10.1.1.1132 I
10.1.1.2/24

On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command "ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0" has been configured.
Which following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
O A. The IP address of RTA interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24.
O B. The IP address of RTA interface serial 11011 is 10.1.1.1/32. (Right Answers )
Ei C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA's routing-table.
O D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA's routing-table. (Right Answers)

Answer; BD

200. The data link layer is encapsulated in PPP. The IP addresses at both ends of the link cannot be in the same network segment.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
O B. FALSE

Answer: T

201. Which of the following parameters are identified by the SA (Security Association)? (Multiple choice)
O A. Source IP address
O B. Security Parameter Index (SPI) (Right Answers)
O C. Destination IP address (Right Answers)
O D. Security Protocol (AH or ESP) (Right Answers)

Answer; BCD

202. As shown in the following figure, IPSec uses tunnel mode. What is the scope of ESP encryption?

New IP AH ESP IP TCP Data ESP ESP Auth

Header Header Header Header Header Tail Data

0 A. 1 (Right Answers)
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4

Answer, A

203. The Router-ID of OSPFv3 can be automatically generated by the system.

OA. TRUE
0 B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
204. The following about IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6, which is correct? (Multiple choice)
O A. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration uses RA and RS messages (Right Answers)
El B. DHCPv6 is more manageable than stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O C. DHCPv6 can be divided into DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. (Right Answers)
O D. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 can allocate related configuration information such as DNS address to the host.

Answer; ABC

205. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast address is a temporary multicast address?
O A. 0
0 B. 1 (Right Answers)
O C. 2
0 D. 3

Answer. B

206. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast address is permanent multicast address?
O A. 0 (Right Answers)
O B. 1
O C. 2
O D. 3

Answer. A

207. Based on tv1PLS labels, you can mark up to how many types of data streams with different service fevers?
❑ A. 2
❑ B. 4
El C. 8 (Right Answers)
El D. 16

Answer: C

208. Segment Routing encodes the segment sequence representing the forwarding path in the packet header_ As the packet is transmitted, the receiver parses the segment sequence after receiving the packet. If the top segment identifier of the
segment sequence is the local node, the identifier is displayed, and then the next step is processed. It it is not the local node, the packet is forwarded to the next node by using the ECMP (Equal Cost Muftiple Path) mode.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers )
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

209. The router interface output information is as follows ; which is correct? (Multiple choice)

(1-Turragei>dispIay ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 curront state : UP
11)v6 protocol current state : UP
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is Irn0::210:FCFF:FF6F:41r36
Global unicast address (es) :
2001: :12:1, subnet is 2001: : /64
Joined group address( es)
'1702: :1 :EF12:1
FF02::2
FF02::1
FF02::1:FF6F:41,36
1111 is 1500 byt ,ts
---------------
O A. The global unicast address of this interface is 2001::12:1 (Right Answers)
O B. The MTU of this interface is 1500_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The link-local address of this interface is FE80: 2E0:FCFF FE6F:4F36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IPv6 protocol status of this interface is UP. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD
210. The output information of a router is as follows. What is the tunneling protocol used by this interface?

tar Altilsplay interface-Tunnel 0/0/0

anns10/0/0 current state : UP
Lime protocol current state : Up
Last line protocol up time : 2019-03-06 11:03:15 11TC 0;::00
Descriptian:HUAWEI, AR Series, Tunne10/0/0 Interface
Mutes Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered. using address of Loopllack0(lu.o.1.1432)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL. ioopbnck not ■et
Tunnel source 10.0.12.1 OGisabitEthernet0/45/0. destination 10. O. 12. 2
Tunnel protacolltransport GRE/IP. key disabled
❑ A. MPLS
❑ B . I Psec
❑ C. LDP
❑ D. GRE (Right Answers)

Answer: D

211. What of the following statements is correct regarding Access Control List types and ranges?
❑ A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999.
❑ B. An advanced ACL value range from 3000-4000.
❑ C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999. (Right Answers)
❑ D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000.

Answer: C

212. The configuration information of router DHCP address pool is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

ip pool test
network 192. 168. 1. 0 mask 255. 255. 255. 0
excluded-ip-address 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.254
lease day 0 hour 12 minute 0

❑ A. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The lease of the IP address is 12h. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The address pool has 55 available IP addresses.
❑ D. The IP address that the DHCP client may obtain is 192.168.1.2. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
 213. The output information of router routing table is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitip[e choice)

cle10.41mp1 1p rondo.
Route Flaws: I - rr1 Yr. 11 - download to fn.
-------- ---
Maui Inc 1...O.1 c
Dime ince Iceno In Paw. tvp = $ 0

boas i nationfildeok Pro eel Ire

' Coal I ntl- Ne.sit. r irnr, r>r

ice. o- o.ors rn n I
: 1 /4 / I
,
10.6. 2_ /i2 51411.. In it r

D A. The NextHop of this router reaching 90.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2_

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this muter reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2 (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

214 The following figure shows a routing table. When this router meows a packet with a destination IP address of 9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet based on the route 9 1_0 0/16 because the matched bit number in this route is the
largest

<Fluawei>display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, 0 - downloadto fib

Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 2 Routes:2

Destination/Mask Preto Pre Cost Flags NextFlop Interface
0.0.0.0/0 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
8.0.0.0/13 RIP 100 3 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
9.0.0.0/g OSPF 10 50 0 20.0.0.2 Fthernet2/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 4 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
11.0.0.0/8 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria12/0/0
20.0.0.0/g Direct 0 0 0 20.0.0.1 Fthernet2/0/0
20.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 0 127.0.0.1 loopback0
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
0 B FALSE

Answer: T

215. Router 1 routing table output information is as follows : which is correct? (Multiple choice)

.0111 -r4t.pl elf 1. p puttees-4.pm..

—
Route flat*: R - rya toy. D - download to fib

Sna Te.ble. PeAdite

: 13 Kr_mat rim . 1:1

P owe Pas e Poo toe or rasa

Prong Prc
, 10. IA, 14.4 et elearrpetteille
R 0
0.0.0.0/0 Slott , Fj•
ThermetO/o/
M. Firwrnall0/0rA
O. 0.0. IVO RIP 11., r.. T. 4
10. 0.2- 0/24 gel r..11 ▪ 1 ......0.10/1
R6
10.0.2. 2132 *Mr to 1, n. I '. 1 F. I twrrw T QInfo
1,
10.0.12-0/24 IA rle,t r. Ii.rITI.10/ 1.0
/Cc 9.12.1/92 Direc e

❑ A. There are two dynamic routing protocols in the routing table. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The mask length of the IP address of the Ethernet0/0 interface on the router is 24 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The IP address of the Etherneto/0/0 interface on the router is 10.0.12.1. (Right Answers)
El D. There is a dynamic routing protocol in the routing table.

Answer: ABC
 216. Refer to the dispisy information.

CtLedwepchipley mac-address

MAC Address VIANNSI teamed-Frans Type

5439-38ec-1518 If- GE0/13(13 dynamic

Total terns displayed -1

A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 54S9-98eo-1011

What operation will occur on the switch?
❑ A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
❑ B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
❑ C. The switch wit flood the frame via ail ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The switch wit drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

Answer: C
217 The current switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?

.1,4411-1D
10C-Twarl

❑ A. When the switch is resteded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/2 does not need to be re-learned.
❑ B. When the switch is restaded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/3 needs to be re-learned
❑ C The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1430 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/2_
❑ 0_ The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-98885-18a8 and the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/1 (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

218. If the transport layer protocol is UDR the network layer Protocol field takes a value of 6_
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F

219. Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. A system can determine whether conflicting EP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet. (Right Answers)
❑ B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address
❑ D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Answer: AB

220. Which of the following flow control methods can be used in the transport layer of the OSI reference model? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A Source suppression message (Right Answers)
❑ B. Window mechanism (Right Answers)
❑ C. Confirmation technology
❑ D Cache technology (Right Answers )

Answer: ABD

221. The application data must carry the MAC address after being processed by the data link layer.
OA TRUE (Right Answers )
OB. FALSE

Answer: T
222. A network engineer prompts the following message when entering the command line: Error: Unrecognized command found atw'position.
Which is correct about this prompt message?
D A. The input command is incomplete
D B. No keywords found (Right Answers)
D C. Input command is not clear
LI D. Parameter type error

Answer: B

223. By default, the root path cost of the root bridge in the STP protocol must be 0.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
0 B. FALSE

Answer: T
224. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which is correct?
-
0141Owei)display mac-address
MAC address table of slot 0:

MAC Address VLAN/ PEVLAN CRVLAN Port Type LSP/LSN-ID

VSI/SI MAC-Tunnel
5489-9885-18e8 blackhole -
5489-9811-0b45 1 Eth0/0/3 static -
Total matching items on slot 0 displayed - 2

O A. MAC 5489-9885-18a8 does not have corresponding port information, the switch appears BUG
0 B. All entries in the MAC address table are dynamically learned by the switch.
0 C. After the switch is restarted, MA C5489-9811-0b49 needs to be re-learned.
0 D. If the switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address or a destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8, the switch will discard the frame. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

225. Refer to the graphic.

SWA

Edge Port

GO/0/1 / GO/0/2 \ GO/0/3

C21!
14
' 4i>1

Host A Host S Host C

An administrator has configured the port interface G0/0/3 of Switch A as an edge port.
The user wishes to connect multiple devices to the network and connects his own managed switch to the network.
What effect will this have on the network?
111 A. Port interface GO/0/3 of switch A will shut down, as a BPDU has been received by the edge port.
❑ B. Port interface G0/0/3 of switch A will forward the data normally and drop the BPDU sent by the host to the switch.
CI C. Switch A will receive the BPDU and recaculate the port state of GO/0/3. (Right Answers)
0 D. Only Host A can send data out as before, the other devices linked cannot.

Answer: C

226. Which of the following protocols can be used to avoid loops in a redundant Layer 2 network?
El A. ARP
El B. STP (Right Answers)
CI C. UDP
CI D. VRRP

Answer: B
227 The static MAC address table is reset in the system, after the interface board is hot swapped or the interface board is reset, saved entries are not IosL
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
O B.FALSE

Answer: T
228 As shown in the following figure, assuming that the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows, now Host A sends a data frame whose destination AC address is MAG-11 Which is correct,

MAC
MAC-B 0.0/0/2

S A
G 0/0/ G I /0/2 G 0/0/3

[ZE
HOST A HOST B HOST C
IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24
MAC:MAC A IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-13 MAC:MAC-C
❑ A SWA discards data frames
❑ B Forward this data frame only from the GO/0/2 pod (Right Answers)
❑ G Forward this data frame only from the GO./0/3 pod
❑ a Generalize this data frame

Answer: B

229. As shown in the figure ; STP is disabled on both switches, and Host A sends an ARP Request. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

SWA

❑ A These two switches can achieve load balancing

O B. The CPU usage of these two switches wit be very high. (Right Answers )
O C. Repeated frames will appear in this network (Right Answers )
E D. The MAC address table of these two switches will frequently jitter (Right Answers )

Answer: BCD

230. What are the three ways for a router to establish a routing table? (Muitiple choice)
E A. Dynamic routing (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Static routing (Right Answers)
E C. Direct routing (Right Answers )
E D. Aggregate routing

Answer: ABC
231. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is wrong? (Muitiple choice)

<R1>dIsplay current-configuration configuration nspf

ospf 1 router-id 10.0.1.1

area 0.0.0.0
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
N
return
<R1>display ospf peer

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.12.1

Neighbors

Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.1(GigabitEthernet0/0/0)'s neighbors

Router ID: 10.0.2.2 Address: 10.0.12.2
State: Full Mode:Nbr is Slave Priority: 1
DR: 10.0.12.2 BOR: 10.0.12.1 NTU: 0
Dead timer due in 30 sec
Retrans timer interval: S
Neighbor is up for 00:01:48
Authentication Sequence: [ 0 1
❑ A. This router has enabled regional authentication. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device is faulty. The configured Router Id is inconsistent with the actual Router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.12.1.
❑ D. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

232. As shown in the figure below, which is correct?

Elm
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
MAC: MAC-A MAC:MAC-B
❑ A. Host A and host B have different IP address masks, so host A and host B cannot communicate.
❑ B. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address
❑ C. Host A and Host B can communicate only if the masks of Host A and Host B are set to be consistent.
❑ D. Host A can ping host B (Right Answers)

Answer: D

233. In which state does OSPF determine the master-slave relationship of DD packets?
❑ A. 2-way
❑ B. Exchange
❑ C. ExStart (Right Answers)
❑ D. Full

Answer: C
234. Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
▪ [Huawei-ospf-l]area 0 (Right Answers)
❑ C. [Huawei-ospf-t]area 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers )
❑ D. [Huawei-ospf-I]area 0 enable

Answer: BC
235. As shown in the figure below, which is correct?

HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
MAC: MAC-A MAC:MAC-B
❑ A. Host A and Host B cannot obtain the MAC address each other. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Host A ARP cache exists 10.0.12.5 MAC-B
❑ C. Host A can ping host B
❑ D. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address

Answer: A

236. All interfaces of the router running OSPF must belong to the same area.
OA. TRUE
B FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
237. On Huawei devices, which of the following methods can be used in OSPF router ID selection? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. If a loopback interface is configured, the largest IP address of the loopback interface is selected as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If loopback interfaces are not configured, the largest IP address of an interface is selected as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A Huawei switch may use the largest IP address of VLANIF interfaces as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The default ID 127.0.0.1 is selected as the router ID.
❑ E. A valid router ID can be configured manually. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCE

238. Which of the following are the basic elements of configuring a static route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Destination network segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC address of the outgoing interface
❑ C. lP address of the next hop (Right Answers )
❑ D. Outlet (Right Answers )

Answer: ACD
239. VRP operating platform, which of the following command can view the routing table?
❑ A. display ip routing-table (Right Answers)
❑ B. display current-configuration
❑ C. display ip interface brief
❑ D. display ip forwarding-table

Answer: A
240. The following two configuration commands can implement the router RTA to the primary and backup backups of the same destination 10.1.1.0:
[PTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1.1 permanent
[RTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
OA. TRUE
O B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

241. What is the default server port number used by the Telnet protocol?
1:1 A. 21
❑ B. 24
❑ C. 22
❑ D. 23 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

242. The maximum number of UTY user interfaces determines how many users can log in to the device through Telnet or STelnet.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
0 B. FALSE

Answer: T

243. Which of the following network parameters can the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP assign? (Muitiple choice)
O A. Operating system
O B. DNS address (Right Answers)
O C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Gateway address (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

244. According to the topology and configuration shown in the figure, an Eth-Trunk link can be set up between the two switches on which LSW2 is the Actor.

LSW1 LSW2

GEO/0/2 GEO/0/2
31„te. -VA
Vev GEO/0/1 GEO/0/1
S

[LSW131acp priority 100 [LSW2]lacp priority 200

[LSW1Jinterface Eth-Trunk1 [LSW2]interface Eth-Trunk1

[LSW1-Eth-Trunkllmode lacp-static [LSW2- Eth-Trunkl]mode lacp-static
[LSW1-Eth-Trunklimax active-linknumber 2 [LSW2- Eth-Trunk1]max active-linknumber 2
a
[LSW11interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 [LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/11eth-trunk 1 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/1]eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]1acp priority 100 a
[LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW1linterface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/2]eth-trunk 1
ILSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/21eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2]1acp priority 100
OA. TRUE
O B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
245 Referring to the configuration of the one-arm route in the following figure, it can be judged that even if the ARP proxy is not enabled on the sub-interface of RI, the administrative department and the finance department can exchange visits.

LSW
'
, ,
00 HautrIce ..eno/o/o.0a.no vod
ate0111G1,0,,000/0/0.1,1pacuiresa 192.168.100056 255051.255.0
,7
i
t =
05.41 51011100001
5 :
0
70'073
7 7:01::000 ration 00110
/0/0.411.1,05 192.160200.250 255.255.215.0
OA TRUE
GB FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

246. In the MAC address table of SWA and SWO, Ore MAC address, VLAN and port correspondence correct,

own
G 010/3

H051 B

❑ A SWA_ MAC Address VLAN Pon MAC-A 10 GE0/006. MA -B

20 GEO/013 MAC-C 100 GEOASIO
❑ B SWI3. MAC Address VLAN 10 GE0/02 MACLB 20
GE010/3 MAC-C 030 GENION plight Ammar.)
D C SWA: MAC Address VLAN Port MAC-A 10 GE011111 MAC-13 20
GEO/012 MAC-C 100 GE000I) Right Ansmer0
0 0. SW13: MAC Address \ CAN BOA MAC-A 10 000/0/3 MAC-B 20
GE0/043 MAC-C 11111 GE0/051

247. What is the value of the Flag field in the PPP frame format?
O A. OxFF
O B. Ox7E (Right Answers )
E C. OxEF
❑ 11. Ox8E

Answer: B

248. ICMP packets do not contain a port number . so NAPT cannot be used.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F
249. If the network shown in the following figure requires the host A to access the Internet through Easy IP, which of the following ACL should be used on the G0/0/3 interface of Router A2

10.0.12.2/24
Router A
1
0.0.42/24 HOST R
19; 10.0.12 1/ 24

1=
.
j1
HOST A
0
IP; 1 .0.13.1/24
❑ A eel number 2000 rule 5 permit source 1111112_1 000
❑ B. acE number 2000 rule 5 pernit source 10.0.13.0 0.0 0.255# (Right Answers)
❑ G. act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 19 0_15_1 0 0_0_0
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 10 0 12 0 0 90 255#

Answer: B

250 As shown in the figure, the two private network hosts want to communicate with each other through the GRE tunnel. After the GRE tunnel is established, the network administrator needs to configure a static route on the RTA to import the
traffic from host A to host B The static routing channel can meet which of the following demand,

❑ A ip route-static 10 1.2 0 24 tunnel 0/0/1 (Right Answers)

❑ B ip route-static 10.1 2 0 24 200 1 1 1
❑ C ip route-static 10.1 2024 GmabitEthernet0/0/1
❑ D route-static 10.1 2.0 24 200 2 2.1

Answer: A

251 As shown in the figure below , which of the fol[owing locations should the AH header be inserted in the [Psec transport mode?

1 IP Header TCP Header 13 1 Dat

❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 3
❑ ❑ . 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑

252. Which of the following remote login methods is the safest?

❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. Stelnet v100
❑ C. Stelnet v2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. Steinet vl

Answer: C

253. Which of the following default action business module ACL is permit?
❑ A. HTTP
❑ B. SNMP
❑ C. Telnet
❑ D. Flow strategy (Right Answers)

Answer: D
 254. What is the Solicited-node multicast address corresponding to the IPv6 address 2019..8.AB?
El A. FF02::1:FF08:AB (Right Answers)
❑ B_ FF02::FF08:AB
E C. FF02 1 tE08.AB
❑ D_ FF 02:1:FF20: 19

Answer: A

255. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 request packet sent by the DHCPve chant?
D A. 546
E B. 548
E C. 547 (Right Answers)
D D 549

Answer: C

256. The OSPFv3 adjacency cannot be established. Which of the following reasons might be caused? (Multiple choice)
E A. Router-ID conflict (Right Answers)
E B. HELLO packet sending period is inconsistent (Right Answers)
E C. Inconsistent area numbers (Right Answers)
E D. Interface IPv6 address prefix is inconsistent

Answer: ABC

257_ Which field is added to the SNMP packet header than the IPv4 packet header?
El A. Version
El B. Flow Label (Right Answers)
El C Destination Address
LI D. Source Address

Answer: B
258 LOP penultimate hop pop-up mechanism (PHP), which allows the label to be ejected on the penultimate hop LS11 Thiscan
This reduce the packet processing complexity of which options,
0 A Last hop and penultimate hop device
0 B Penultimate hop device
0 C All MPLS network equipment
0 0 Last hop device (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

259. Which of the following MAC addresses cannot be used as the MAC address of the host NIG? (Multiple choice)
D A. 00-02-03-04-05-06
❑ E 02-03-04-05-06-07
D C. 01 02 03 04 05 06 (Right Answers)
D D. 03-04-05-06-07-08 (Right Answers )

Answer: CD
260_ Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectmly are false? (Multiple Choice)
111 A The ping 12700_1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the host's Ethernet port (Right Anowers
0B ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCPAP protocol suite is functioning correctly_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
111 D The command "ipconfig /release" can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and the local gateway (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
261. Now there are four network segments 10.24_0_0/24, 10.24.1_0/24, 10.24.2.0/24, 1024.3.0/24_ Which of the following network segments can be summarized? (Muitiple choice)
A. 10.24.0.0/23
B. 10.24.1.0/23
0 C. 10.24.0.0/22 (Right Answers)
0 D. 1 0.24,00/21 (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

262. The administrator wants to upgrade the configuration file for the AR2200 through the USB cable. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
E A. The AR2200 does not support the use of USB to update configuration files.
E B. Connect the USB interface of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable.
El C. After connecting the cable; the administrator needs to install the driver for the mini USB. (Right Answers)
E D. Connect the mini USB cable of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable. (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

263. The switch receives a micas' data frame. If the destination MAC address of the data frame can be found in the MAC local table, the data frame must be forwarded from the MAC corresponding port.
GA TRUE
rJ B FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer, F

264. The output information of switch SW port is as follows: Which is wrong with the following statement?

Diumeildisplay stp interface Ethernet 0/0/1

ECIST Global Info] iiodc SIN ----
CIST Bridge : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618
Config Times : Hello 4s NaxAge 20s FwDly 15s JUL:Hop 20
Active Times :Hello 2s IlaxAge 20s FwDly 15s XaxHop 20
CIST Root/ERPC :0 . 4c1f -cci7-3214 / 200000
CIST RegRoot /WPC : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618 / 0
❑ A. The switch is not a root bridge
❑ B. Forward-delay is 20s (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure the MaxAge of the BPDU to be 20s.
❑ D. The period for sending BPDU on this port is 2s.

Answer: B
265 The network shown in the figure below, all switches open STP. Disable the sending function of the BPDU on the G0/0/2 port of the SWA. The GO/0/1 of the SWC re-converges to become the root port. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

SWA SWB
4096 00 01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-813

HOST A
10: 10 11/24
MACNIAC, SWC H
32768 00 01 02 03 04 CC

❑ A SWB sends TCN BPDUs to SWA (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWC sends TCN BPDUs to SWB (Right Answers)
❑ C. SWB sends configuration BPDU with TCA set to SWC (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA sends TC set configuration BPDU (Right Answers)

Answer. ABCD

266. An existing switch directly connects to a designated port of peer device through a poet, but the port does not forward any message, but can receive the BPDU to monitor the network change. The role of the port should be?
CI A. Root port
O B. Designated port
0 C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
O D. Disable Pod

Answer. C
267. The switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?

Dittasteildis aac-address
MAC address table of slot 0:

'AC Address WAN/ PEVLAN MILAN Port Type L.SP/LSR -ID

VSI/SI NAC-Tunnel
5404-088S-18a8 1 b/aekbole -
5484-9811-0b49 1 Etb0/0/3
- static -
Total matching items on slat 0 displayed = 2

MAC address table of slat 0:

MAC Address IriAli/ PEVLAN CEVLMI Part Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI *AC-Tunnel
5489 -18%d -2d30 - Eth0/0/1 styrtaaric 0/ -
Te401. amain, it...s on slot 0 displayed
O A. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 will be discarded.
O B. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8 will be discarded. (Right Answers)
O C. The switch receives the data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and will be discarded.
❑ D. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 will be discarded.

Answer: B

268. The device running STP will discard when it receives the configuration BPDU of RSTP.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

269. STP When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse than itself, it immediately sends its own BPDU downstream.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

270. What message is sent when the SW downstream device notifies the upstream device of topology change?
O A. TCA message
O B. TC message
O C. Configure BPDUs
O D. TGN BPDU (Right Answers)

Answer: D

271. Which flag bits of the STP protocol are not used by the Flag field in the RSTP configuration BPDU? (Muitiple choice)
O A. Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCA
❑ C. TC
O D. Proposal (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

272. The backup port in RSTP can replace the failed root port.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
273. As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. The following statements which are correct? (Muitiple choice)
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.21.2 preference 40

GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24 Loopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
O
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/24
Router A G0/0/2 Router B
0 A. If the G0/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/1. (Right Answers)
D B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to G0/0/2.
0 C. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1.
0 D. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/2. (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

274. VRP supports OSPF multi-process. If no process number is specified when OSPF is enabled, the default process number is?
El A. 0
El B. 10
El C. 1 (Right Answers )
P D. 100

Answer; C

275. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

1 >display ospf interface verbose

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.1.1

Interfaces

week: 0. 0. 0. 0 IRKS TE not enabled)

Interface: 10. 0.12, 1. (GisabilEthernet0/0/0)

=oat: 1 State: 5DR Type: Breadcast IITU: 1500
?riority: 1
Designated Router: 10.0.1.2. 2
Nackuv Designated Router: 10.0.12.1
Timers: Hello 10 Dead 40 . Poll 1.20 . Retransmit 5 , Transmit Delay 1
10 Statistics
Type Input Output
Hello 66 65
DB Description 2 3
Link-State Rto 0 1
-State Update '3 2
Link-State Mk 2 ."
MI GROUP
R GROUP
aqueId: 0 PrevState: Waiting
time cost: 1, enabled by OSP!, Protocol

1:1 A. The routing interface DR priority is 10.

ID B. Router ED is 10.0.1.1 (Right Answers)
El C. The value of this interface Cost is "I (Right Answers)
El D. This router is a BDR (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD
216. ip route-static 10.0.12.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1 1
Which statement is true regarding this command?
❑ A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168 1.1 network.
❑ B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network (Right Answers)
❑ C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
❑ D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route will always take precedence.

Answer: B

277. Which state does OSPF use to indicate that a neighbor relationship has been established?
❑ A. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ B. Down
❑ C. Attempt
❑ D. Full

Answer: A

278. By default, the period far sending OSPF HELLO packets on the broadcast network is?
❑ A_ lOs (Right Answers)
❑ B. 40s
❑ C. 30s
❑ 13. 20s

Answer: A

279. Which of the following problems may emerge when a loop exists on a router? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. tntinite packet forwarding.
❑ B. Increased CPU usage. (Right Answers)
❑ C. increased memory usage. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Continuous change of destination LP addresses of packets.
❑ E. Increased packet size.

Answer: BC

280. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Muitipie choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of exchanges of fink state information (Right Answers)
❑ B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
❑ C. Reduce the time it takes far the adjacency to establish
❑ a Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

281 The Iwo routers are interconnected through the PPP lint The administrator configures OSPF on the Iwo routers and runs in the same area. If their router lOs are the same, which is correct?
❑ A. Two routers will establish a normal full neighbor relationship
❑ B. Two routers will not send helb information to each other
❑ C. Two routers will establish a normal full adjacency
▪ VRP will prompt the router ID conflicts of the Iwo routers. (Right Answers )

Answer: 0
282. Which of the following OSPF versions suit for IPv6?
❑ A. OSPFv1
❑ B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers )
❑ C. OSPFv4
❑ D. OSPFv2

Answer: B

283. The router R1 routing table output information is as follows, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
<RI>display ip routing—table
Route Flags; R — seleY, D — download to fib

Routing Tables: Public-

Destinations : 13 Routes 13

nest into ion/Insk Prot o Pre Cost Flags Nestlioo Interface

0. 0. 0.0/0 Static 60 0 RD 10. 0.14. 4 Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0

10. 0. 0. 0/8 Stati c 60 0 RD 10.0.12.2 It kerne t 0/0/0
10. 0. 2. 0/24 Stat ic 00 0 RD 10. 0.13. 3 Et hernet0/0/2
10. 0. 2.. 2/32 OSPF 10 00 RD 10.0. 21. 2 Et berm t0/0/1

❑ A. The router forwards the packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the Ethernet0/0/0 interface of the router.
0 C. The packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router will drop the packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8.

Answer: AC

284. The following election statement about DR and BDR, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. If an interface has a priority of 0, the interface will not participate in the election of DR or BDR. (Right Answers)
❑ B. DR must exist in the broadcast network (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the priorities are the same, the router ID is compared. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as the DR. (Right Answers )
❑ D. BDR must exist in the broadcast network

Answer: ABC

285. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the address cannot be obtained from the DHCP server, which of the following IP addresses may the host use?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
0 B. 169.254.2.33 (Right Answers)
0 C. 255.255.255.255
❑ D. 0.0.0.0

Answer: B

286. What is the main role of the DHCP DISCOVER message?

❑ A. The client is used to find the DHCP server. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DHCP server responds to the DFHCP DISCOVER packet, which carries various configuration information.
❑ C. The server responds to the confirmation of the REQUEST message.
❑ D. The client requests configuration or renews the lease term.

Answer: A
287 As shown in the figure, the two hosts implement inter-machine communication through a single-route. When the available GO/0/1 2 sub-interface receives the data frame sent by Host B to Host A, which of the following operations does the
RTA perform?

RIA

vlasda via.°
Gateway: 10.0_1254 Gateway. 10.0.2.254
❑ A RTA will discard the data frame
❑ fr RTA forwards the data frame directly through the GO/0/1.1 subinterface.
❑ C. After the RTA deletes the VLAN tag 20, it is sent out by the GO/0/1.1 interface_
❑ a The RTA first deletes the VLAN tag 20, then adds the VLAN tag 10, and then sends it out through the GO/0/1.1 interface (Right Answers)

Answer: D

288. What is the role of link aggregation? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Implement load sharing (Right Answers)
❑ B. Facilitate analysis of data
❑ C. Increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ D. Improve network reliability (Right Answers )

Answer: ACD

289. Which of the following is correct about link aggregation for LACP mode?
❑ A. The number of active ports cannot be set in LAGP mode.
❑ B. All active interfaces in LACP mode participate in data forwarding and share load traffic.
❑ G. There are only up to 4 active ports in LACP mode.
❑ D. In LACP mode, devices at both ends of the [ink send LACP packets to each other. (Right Answers )

Answer: D

290. The following statement about the Hybrid port, which is correct?
❑ A. Hybrid port does not require PVID
❑ B. Hybrid port only receives data frames with VLAN TAG
❑ C. Hybrid port must carry VLAN TAG when sending data frames.
❑ D. The Hybrid port can strip the TAG of certain VLAN frames in the outbound direction. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

291_ In the process of establishing PPP link, which phase can be directly converted into by the Dead phase?
❑ A. Authenticate
❑ B. Terminate
❑ C. Establish (Right Answers )
❑ D. Network

Answer: C

Which of the following values is used in the LengthlType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating that the packet carrying the PPPoE session phase is carried?
292_
▪ 0x8863
❑ B Ox8864 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x0800
❑ D. Ox0806

Answer: B
293. On theVRP platform, which command can set the encapsulation type of the data link layer of the Serial interface to HDLC?
0 A. link-protocol hdlc (Right Answers)
O B. hdlc enable
O C. encapsulation hdlc
O D. link-protocol ppp

Answer: A

294. SNMPvl defines five protocol operations.

GA. TRUE (Right Answers)
0 B. FALSE

Answer: T

295. How many domains can be configured when configuring AM authentication on Huawei ARG3 series routers?
❑ A. 33
O B. 31
❑ C. 32
❑ D. 30 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

296. After the GRE keepalive function is enabled, the local end of the GRE tunnel periodically sends a keepalive packet to the peer every 10s.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

297.A The AAA protocol is the RADIUS protocol.

3 A. TRUE
0 B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

298. The router Radius information is configured as follows: Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The [13 address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1
❑ C. The source IP address of the router sending Radius packets is 200.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
 299. Which of the following SNMP protocols supports encryption?
❑ A. SNMPv2c
❑ fr SNMPv3 (Right Answers)
❑ G_ SNMPv2
❑ D_ SNMPv1

Answer: B

3011 Which packets are used by the DHC1W6 client and the DHCR6 server to determine whether the client uses DFICPv6 stolenl autoconfigurabon or DHCRe stateless autoconfiguration7 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DA (Right Answers )
❑ 13 NA
❑ C. NS
❑ D. RS (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

301. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 ADVERTISE packet sent by the DHGR/6 server?
❑ A. 548
❑ B. 547
❑ C. 549
❑ D. 546 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

302. When the DHCPv6 client receives the value of the 0 flag and the 0 flag in the RA message sent by the DHCP,e6 server, the DHCPN6 client uses the DHCP),6 stateful auto configuration to obtain the IPM address and other configuration
information
10
O B 11 (Right Answers)
El C. 1
O B.0

Answer: B

303_ 1/128 is the 1Pv6 Eoopbeck address.

CA. TRUE (Right Answers)
▪ Ili_ FALSE

Answer: T

304. On the network shown in the following figure, if the static route is configured on the RouterB, the NextHop corresponding to 2001::1/128 is in the routing table of RouterB.
ipv6 route•-static 2001::1 128 3001:12:1

❑ A. 3001::12:2
❑ B, Te80:1903:c3fb
❑ C. 3002::12:1
❑ D. 30011:12:1 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

305. SR (Segment Routing) is attracting more and more attention as a new anemative MPLS tunneling technology_ Many users hope to introduce SR technology to simplify network deployment and management and reduce CAPEX (Capital
Expenditure). As the current mainstream tunneling technology, SR is widely used in bearer networks.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer. F
306. The broadcast address is a special address in the network address where the host bits are all set to 1. It can also be used as a host address.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F

307. As shown in the figure, if the administrator wants to improve the performance of this network, which of the following is the most appropriate?

❑ A. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
❑ C. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex.
❑ D. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.

Answer: A

308. If the command is executed on the router: user-interface maximum-vty 0, the following statement which is correct?
❑ A. Support up to 4 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ B. Support up to 15 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ C. No user can log in to the router through Telnet or SSH. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support up to 5 users to access through VTY at the same time

Answer: C

309. On the VRP operating platform, what is the command to display the current interface configuration in the interface view?
❑ A. display users
❑ B. display this (Right Answers)
❑ C. display ip interface brief
❑ D. display version

Answer: B

310. Regarding the conflict domain and the broadcast domain, the description which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device connected to a switch belongs to a conflict domain.
❑ C. The device connected to a switch belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The device connected to a router belongs to a broadcast domain.
❑ E. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a conflict domain. (Right Answers )

Answer: ACE
311. What is the priority of the bridge priority in the IEEE 802.1D standard?
❑ A. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 4
O C. 16
❑ D. 2

Answer: A

312. In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC address table based on received data frames.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

313. As shown in the figure below, which port of the following switch will become the designated port?

❑ A. SWC G01012
❑ B. SWB GO/0/3
❑ C. SWC GO/0/1
❑ D. SVVA GO/013 (Right Answers)

Answer: D
314. The device port running STP is in the Forwarding state. Which is correct?
❑ A. The port only receives and processes BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
O B. The port forwards both user traffic and BPDU. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The port does not process BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
❑ D. The port will build a MAC address table based on the received user traffic but will not forward user traffic.

Answer: B
315 As shown in the network below, the host has an ARP cache which is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ k The router needs to be configured with static routes, otherwise Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions.
❑ B. Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache. 1110.12.2 MAC-C (Right Answers)
❑ C Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache_ 11_0_12 1 MAC-8
❑ D. Host A and Host B can communicate in both directions (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
316 In the network shown in the following figure, all routers run the OSPF protocol, and the top of the link is the value of the Cost value_ What is the Cost value of the RA) routing table that reaches the network 100m 0/87

❑ A 70
❑ B 20
❑ C.60 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 100

Answer: C

317. As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured. Host B has a gateway ARP cache. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. When the ARP proxy is enabled on G0/0/1 of the router, host A can communicate with host B.
❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions (Right Answers)
❑ G Host B sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10 0 12 1 to he forwarded to host A (Right Answers)
❑ D Host A sends a packet with the destination IP address of 11_0 12 1 to be forwarded to host B

Answer: BC

318. In Huawei AR routers, by default, the value of the RIP priority is?
❑ A. 60
n B. 120
❑ C. 100 (Right Answers)
O D. 0

Answer: C
319. When OSPF establishes adjacency, which of the following must be consistent? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Router Priority
❑ B. Router ID
❑ C. Router Dead Interval (Right Answers)
❑ D. Area ID (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

320. What are the advantages of the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPF supports load balancing for equal-cost routes. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports untyped inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ D. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)

Answer; ABCD

321. What is the destination IP address of the DI-ICP DISCOVER packet?

❑ A. 224.0.0.2
❑ B. 127.0.0.1
❑ C. 224.0.0.1
❑ D. 255.255.255.255 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

322. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, then the payload of this data frame cannot be? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. ARP response packet
❑ B. OSPF packet
❑ C. RSTP data frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. STP data frame (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

323. The configuration information of an interface of a router is as follows. Which port can receive the data packets of this VLAN?

❑ A. 100 (Right Answers)

❑ B. 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 1

Answer: A
324. What should I do when the trunk port sends a data frame?
❑ A. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, the data frame is discarded.
❑ B. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, replace it with PVID forwarding.
❑ C. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, strip the TAG forwarding
❑ D. When the VLAN ID is the same as the PVID of the port and the VLAN ID is allowed to pass through the port, the tag is removed and the packet is sent. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

325. Which of the following features does HDLC have? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. HDLC protocol supports point-to-point links (Right Answers)
❑ B. HDLC protocol does not support FP address negotiation. (Right Answers)
❑ C. HDLC protocol supports point-to-multipoint links
❑ D. HDLC protocol does not support authentication (Right Answers )

Answer: ABD

326. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitiple choice)

❑ A. This interface is a synchronous interface (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10.0.12.1124_ (Right Answers)
❑ C. The protocol used by the data link layer is PPP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. When the packet forwarded by this interface exceeds 1400 Byte, the packet needs to be fragmented.

Answer: ABC

327. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is 0xCO23, indicating that the protocol is?
❑ A. PAP (Right Answers)
O B. LCP
❑ C. CHAP
❑ D. NCP

Answer: A
 328. What is the default ACL step size on the G3 series routers?
0 A. 15
❑ B_ 10 (Right Answers)
❑ G. 10
❑ D. 20

Answer: 8

329. What is the range of advanced ACL?

❑ A. 6000-6031
❑ B. 4000-4999
❑ C. 3000-3999 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2000-2999

Answer: C

330. Which of the following protocols is the IPsec VPN architecture?

❑ A. GRE
❑ B. ESP (Right Answers)
❑ C. IKE (Right Answers)
❑ ❑. AH (Right Answers)

Answer: BGD

331. About the matching mechanism of ACL, which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. If the ACL does not exist the result of returning the ACL is: no match (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the last rule is found and the packet still does not match, the ACL matching resuli is mismatch (Right Answers)
❑ C. Regardless of whether the result of the packet matching ACL is 'mismatch', "allow° or "roper, the packet is finally allowed to pass or refuse to pass, which is actually determined by each service module applying the ACL (Right
Answers)
❑ B. By default, the rule with the lowest number in the ACL stags searching. Once the rule is matched, the subsequent rule is stopped. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

332. The network management workstation manages the network device through the SNMP protocol. When the managed device has an abnormality, what kind of SNMP packet will the network management workstation receive?
❑ A. get-response message
❑ B trap message (Right Answers )
❑ C. set-request message
❑ D. get-request message

Answer. B

333_ The router does not need to re-encapsulate the data link layer when forwarding [RE packets.
0A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

334 There are 4 routers in a broadcast network, and all 4 routers run OSPFv3 protocol If all router DR priorities are not 0, how many adjacencies are there in the network?
❑ A. 6
❑ B.4
❑ C. 5 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 3

Answer: C
335. Which of the following statements about the Prefix Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Prefix Segment can be automatically assigned by IGP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Prefix Segment is spread to other network element through the IGP protocol. It is globally visible and globally valid.
❑ C. Prefix Segment requires manual configuration
❑ D. Prefix Segment is used to identify a destination address prefix in the network.

Answer: A

336. About the TTL field in the IPv4 header, which is correct?
❑ A. When a route has a loop, the TTL value can be used to prevent the packet from being forwarded indefinitely. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The TTL value is reduced by 1 for each Layer 3 device. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The TTL value is 8 bits long. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The range of TTL values is 0-255 (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCD

337. What is the value range of the DSCP field in the IPv4 header?
El A. 0-15
❑ B. 0-63 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 0-31
❑ D. 0-7

Answer: B

338. UDP is connectionless and must use which to provide the reliability of the transmission?
❑ A. Network layer protocol
❑ B. Application layer protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Transmission Control Protocol
❑ D. Internet Protocol

Answer: B

339. Because the TCP protocol uses three-way handshake mechanism when establishing and closing connections, TCP supports reliable transmission.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

340. Which method VRP does not support to configure the router?
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet
❑ B. Configure the router through the mini USB port
❑ C. Configure the router through the console port.
❑ D. Configure the router through FTP (Right Answers)

Answer: D
341. In which view can the administrator modify the device name for the router?
❑ A. Protocol-view
❑ B. System-view (Right Answers)
❑ C. User-view
❑ D. Interface-view

Answer: B

342. Which of the following states does the STP protocol elect to perform port roles?
❑ A. Blocking
❑ B. Disabled
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Listening (Right Answers)

Answer; D

343. What is the total length of the Rag field in the RSTP BPDU message?
❑ A. 6
❑ B. 4
❑ C. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2

Answer: C

344. Which of the following is not the reason that RSTP can improve the convergence speed?
❑ A. Introduction of edge ports
❑ B. Canceled Forward Delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Fast switching of the root port
❑ D. PIA mechanism

Answer: B

345. Which of the following statements about the edge port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The edge port can be directly transferred from the Disable state to the Forwarding state. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The ports interconnected between the switches need to be set as edge ports.
❑ C. The edge pert discards the received configuration BPDU packet.
❑ D. Edge port participates in RSTP operation

Answer: A
 346. A switch running STP can be converted to the Forwarding state after waiting for the forwarding delay in the Learning state.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers )
B FALSE

Answer: T

347. In Huawei AR routers, what is the priority of the static routing protocol by default?
❑ A. 60 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 100
❑ C. 120
❑ D0

Answer: A

348. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device ABR?

❑ A. Router D
❑ 11 Router C
❑ C. Router A (Right Answers )
❑ D. Router B (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

349 As shown in the following figure, if the host has an ARP cache and host A sends a packet to host B, what is the destination MAC address and destination P address of the packet?

❑ A MAC-C 10 0 12 2
❑ B. MAC-A 11 0.12 1
❑ C MAC-C 11 0 12 1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-B 11 0.12.1

Answer: C
350. What types of networks are supported by the OSPF protocol? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. Point-to-Multipoint (Right Answers)
0 B. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-Point (Right Answers)
❑ D. Broadcast (Right Answers)

Answer: ABM

351. How many types of OSPF packets are there?

O A. 3
❑ B. 4
❑ C. 5 (Right Answers)
O D. 2

Answer: C

352. When upgrading the router software using the FTP protocol, which transfer mode should be selected?
❑ A. Text mode
❑ B. Byte mode
❑ G. Streaming byte mode
❑ D. Binary mode (Right Answers)

Answer: D

353. Which message does the DHCP server use to confirm that the host can use the IP address?
❑ A. DHCP ACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST
❑ D. DHCP OFFER

Answer: A

354. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the IP address is obtained by DHCP, what is the source IP address of the first packet sent by this host?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
❑ B. 255.255.255.255
❑ C. 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 169.254.2.33

Answer: C
 355. What is the range of VLAN [Ds that users can use?
❑ A. 0-4096
❑ B. 1-4096
❑ C. 1-4094 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 0-4095

Answer: C

356 if a port has the following configuration information, which port does the VLAN TAG carry when transmitting data frames of the VLAN7

❑ A. 1,2,3,100
❑ B. 2,3,4,6,100
❑ C 2,3,100 (Right Answers)
❑ D 1,2,3,4,6,100

Answer: C

357. The load balancing modes of the two ends of the Eth-Trunk can be inconsistent.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

358. For the network shown in the fotowing figure, the switch uses the sub-interface pair of the machine interface and the router. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?

❑ A. interface 10 ip address 10 0.12.1 255255255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B. interface Mandl 0 ip address 10 0.12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers )
❑ C. interface Menai() ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type access port default Nan 10 #
❑ 0. interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk paid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #

Answer: B

359. In the following options, which is the necessary technology to enable a host with an IP address of 10 0 0 1 to access the Internet?
❑ A. Dynamic routing
❑ B. NAT (Right Answers)
❑ C. Route introduction
❑ D Static routing

Answer: B
360 As shown in the following figure, from the perspective of the security corner, Router A refuses to receive OSPF packets, GRE packets and IGMP packets received from GO/0/1 Which of the following commands can fulfill this requirement?
(Multiple choice)

❑ A act number 3000 rule 5 deny ere rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthemet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B act number 3000 rule 5 deny gre rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthernelf1/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ a eel number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ 13_ acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabrtEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound ad 3000 # (Right Answers)

Answer: ABO

361_ As shown Ingle following figure, which of the folbwing configurations can be used Io preyentfiles1 A from accessing Host B HTTP service. Host B can not access which service of Host A HP? (Multiple choice)

❑ A acl number 3000 ride 5 deny top source 100.0.12 CI 0 GO 255 s.rec-port act woe destination 1030_1311 0 0.0 255# acInonter 3001 rule 5 deny top source 100.01300/0255 source-parrot( fto dean.. 100 0 12 0 0.00.255#
aderface GgabilEthemetll0/1 traffic-51er outbound act 30004 interface GgabitEtherrieffir002 trafrinffitar outbound ark 31031 a
▪ 10 eat number 2000 rule S deny tap source 180.0.13.0 0 0 0.255 desk rmtmn 160 O.12 0 0 0.6.255 deslinatontporl. votwe a ad number 31101 rule 5 deny tcp source 1130.0 12 6 (1,0..0 255 clesfinalion 100.0.13 0 0 0.0.255 dEshrehon-port eq
Ira M traerface GigabilEtheineignOM traPfic-filler inbound 1113000# interface GigabilEtheme100.2 tarts-film inbound eel 3001 # (Right Answers)
❑ G_ act number 3000 rule 5 deny.? rescue 100 0.13 000.055 doshnohon 103.0120 0 00 255 destioabon-pad. www # acl number 3001 rule 5 deny lop source 100 0 )2,0 000.255 d.briatorr 100.0 13 00 0.255 255 d.bnalon-porl aq
ftp if interface GigularlEthame10/0,1 beffic-Stier oulbconcl 101 3000 0 inlerface GigubitElharne100/2 traffic-filler outbound acl 3001 to
❑ D. scl number 3000 rule 5 deny leo source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 source-poll op wino destination 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255# ecl number 3001 nile 5 deny Hp source 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255 source-port ei ftp destination 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.2550
Interface OlgerbilEthernet0/0,1 traffic-filter intbound 5013000#Interface GfigabilEthemat0,02 traffic-filter inbound eel 30015 (Right Artawars)

Answer, HD

362. 0 packets are carried over TCP.

()A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

363. The multicast address FF02:.1 represents all nodes in the link-focal range.
OA TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

365. In the estabFishment of adjacency relationship : what is the role of OD packets in OSPFv37
❑ A. Request missing LSA
❑ B. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑a Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ ❑. To describe your own LSDB (Right Answers)

Answer: D
366. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001: ODB8: 0000: 0000: 0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8D58 is?
❑ A. 3001:0DB8::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001: DB8::0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8058
❑ C_ 3001: D68::346: ABCD: 4260: 8058 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 3001:0DB8::0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

Answer: C

367. When the host adopts DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration, which DHCPv6 message is sent by the host to request configuration information?
❑ A. Information-Request (Right Answers)
❑ B. CONFIRM
❑ C. SOLICIT
❑ D. REBIND

Answer: A

368. What is the length of the IPv6 multicast address flag field?
❑ A. 3
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 4 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 5

Answer: C

36g. Which of the following statements about the Node Segment is wrong?
❑ A. The Node SID cannot be the same as the node Prefix SID. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Node Segment is used to identify a specific node
❑ C. Configure the IP address as the prefix on the loopback interface of the node. The Prefix SID of this node is actually the Node SID.
❑ D. Node Segment is a special Prefix Segment

Answer: A

370. Which of the following are the actions of the MPLS (Multiple choice)
❑ A. pop (Right Answers)
❑ B. switch
❑ C. swap (Right Answers)
❑ D. puch (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

371. If two Huawei S5710 switches are interconnected using a 10 Gigabit optical module, the working mode of the interconnect port defaults to full duplex.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T
372. On the Huawei ARG3 router, the -i parameter of the Ping command in the VRP is used to set ?
❑ A. Interface for sending Echo Request packets (Right Answers )
❑ B. Source IP address for sending Echo Request packets
❑ C. Interface for receiving Echo Reply packets
❑ D. Destination IP address of receiving Echo Reply packets

Answer: A

373. The following statement about the TTL field in the IP packet header, which is correct?
❑ A. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
❑ B. Whenever a packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers )
❑ C. TTL defines the time interval at which the source host can send packets.
❑ D. Whenever a packet passes through a router ; its TTL value will be increased by 1.

Answer: B

374. Which of the following statements about ICMP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The length of the Type field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The length of the Checksum field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits.
❑ C. The value of the ICMP packet in the first protocol type field of IPv4 is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The length of the Code field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

375. How does the VRP platform represent the third slot of the router, the sub-card No. 0 and the GE port No. 2.
❑ A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0
❑ B. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
❑ C. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2
❑ D. interface GigabitEthernet 3/012 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

376. Which of the following statements about the Spanning Tree Protocol Root Bridge election is correct?
❑ A. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with the large MAC address becomes the root bridge.
❑ B. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with a large number of ports becomes the root bridge.
❑ C. The device with a smaller bridge priority value becomes the root bridge. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The bridge with a higher priority value becomes the root bridge.

Answer: C
377. In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC bits set generated by the root switch?
❑ A. Root port.
❑ B. Backup port.
❑ C. Provisioning port
❑ D. Designated port (Right Answers)

Answer: D

378. The Message Age in the configuration BPDU sent by the root bridge in the STP protocol is 0.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

37g. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Duplex mode of the port
❑ B. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ C. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)
❑ D. MAC address of the port
❑ E. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1 (Right Answers)

Answer; BCE

380. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which kind of router is BDR in this network?

O A. Router A (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router B
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router D

Answer: A
381. The routing table shown below, which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The NextHop of the destination network 10.0.3.3/32 is not directly connected, so the router will not forward the packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.0.3.
❑ B. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2 from Ethernet0/010. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.12.1 from Ethernet0/0/0.
❑ D. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.0.3 from Ethernet0/0/0. (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

382.As shown in the figure below, which network device can Host A and Host B use to communicate?

❑ A. Router (Right Answers)

❑ B. Hub
❑ C. HUB
❑ II Layer 2 switch

Answer: A
383. The router output information is as follows, which of the following statement is wrong?

❑ A. The MTU value of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 1480. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The physical link of Ethernet0/0/0 is normal.
❑ C. The broadcast address corresponding to the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.255.
❑ D. The IP address of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.1/24.

Answer: A

384. Which of the following is not included in the routing table?

❑ A. Next hop
O B. Routing cost
❑ C. Source address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Target network

Answer: C

385. Which of the following statement about the OSPF backbone area is correct?
❑ A. Area 0 is the backbone area. (Right Answers)
O B. All areas can be backbone areas
❑ C. The backbone area must be deployed when the number of routers running OSPF exceeds two.
❑ D. All routers in the backbone area are ABR

Answer: A

386. What are the advantages of the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPF supports load balancing for equal-cost routes. (Right Answers)
❑ B. OSPF supports Classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Supporting the division of areas (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD
387 A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP servers address pool. What are
the possible reasons for this? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Alf addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned. (Right Answers)
0 B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 169.254.0.0 address range. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is aliocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server (Right Answers )
o D. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 127.254.0.0 address range.

Answer: ABC

388.[Huawei]user-interface vty 0 14
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] acl 2000 inbound
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] user privilege level 3
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] authentication-mode password
Please configure the login password (maximum length 16): Huawei
The configuration of vty is as shown above, and the user privilege level is set to level 3.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

389. The aggregation port of the router can be configured with a routing subinterface.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

390. Which VLAN partitioning method is most appropriate when the host frequently moves the location?
❑ A. Based on IP subnetting
❑ B. Based on NIAC address division (Right Answers)
❑ C. Basic strategy division
❑ D. Port-based partitioning

Answer: B

391. On the VRP platform, the role of the command "interface vlan <vlan-id>" is 0.
❑ A. Create or enter the VLAN virtual interface view. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create a VLAN
❑ C. No such command
❑ D. Configure a VLAN for a port

Answer: A
 392_ NAPT distinguishes the [P addresses of different users by protocol numbers in TCP or UDP or IP packets.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

393. Which message need to send when needing to terminate a PPPoE session?
❑ A. PADR
❑ B. PADT (Right Answers )
❑ G. PADO
❑ D. PADI

Answer: B

394. Which of the following are the advantages of the PPP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. PPP protocol supports negotiation of link layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP protocol supports negotiation of network layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP protocol supports both synchronous transmission and asynchronous transmission. (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPP protocol supports authentication (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

395 The network shown below. Which of the following configurations enables all hosts to communicate with Host C, but Host A and Host B cannot communicate?

❑ A. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination mac 5439-93ea-4010 source•-mac 5489-9843-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound acl 4000 #
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98e8-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000 #
❑ C. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5439-98ca-4c7c source-mac 5489-9300-550e # interface GigabitEtherne10/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 4000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-983a-400 source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigahltEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound acl 4000#

Answer: C

396. As hown in the figure: IPsec VPN is used to transfer data between two hosts. In order to hide the real IP address and ensure the security of data as high as possible, which mode and protocol of IPsec VPN is better, (Multiple choice)

❑ A. All
❑ B Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
❑ a Transmission mode
❑ B. ESP (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
397. Apply the following ACL in Telnet: which of the following statement is correct'?
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 172.16.105.30
rule 10 deny source 172.16.105.40
rule 15 deny source 172.16.105.50
rule 20 permit

❑ A. The device with IP address 172.16.105.6 can use the Telnet service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 172.16.105.3 can use the Telnet service.
❑ C. The device with IP address 172.16.105.5 can use the Telnet service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 172.16.105.4 can use the Telnet service.

Answer: A

398. Which of the following lPv6 addresses is a link-local address?

❑ A. FC00::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2000::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC

Answer: B

399. Which field in the Fv6 header acts like the TTL field in the IPv4 header?
❑ A. Version
❑ B. Traffic Class
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Next Header

Answer: C

400. What are the three main roles in the DHCPv6 basic protocol architecture? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DHCPv6 switch
❑ B. DHCPv6 relay (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 client (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCPv6 server (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

401. The value of the MO flag in the RA message sent by the DHCPv6 service is 01. Which of the following methods does the host use to automatically configure the address?
❑ A. Value does not make any sense
❑ B. DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration
❑ D. Stateless autoconfiguration

Answer: B
402. Which of the following statements about the S field in the MPLS packet header is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Is there any other label after marking this label, 1 means yes, 0 means no
❑ B. The S bit exists in each MPLS packet header. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Is there any other label after marking this label, 0 means yes. 1 means no (Right Answers)
❑ D. S bit has only 1 bit in frame mode and 2 bits in cell mode.

Answer: BC

403.<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
Warning: The action will delete the saved configuration in the device.
The configuration, will be erased to reconfi gure. Continue? [YIN]:
The administrator configured the above on the AR2200, and which of the following description about the configuration information is correct?
❑ A. The saved configuration file will be replaced by the running configuration file.
❑ B. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "Y" (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "N"
❑ D. The configuration file will be retained when the device starts up.

Answer: B

404. On the VRP interface, use the command startup saved-configuration backup.ofg to configure the backup.cfg file for the next startup.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

405. Which of the following states is the STP port converted between exist Forward Delay? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Forwarding-Disabled
❑ B. Blocking-Listening
❑ C. Disabled-Blocking
❑ D. Listening-Learning (Right Answers)
❑ E. Learning-Forwarding (Right Answers)

Answer: DE

406. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Duplex mode of the port
❑ B. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1
❑ C. Port MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ E. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)

Answer: CDE

407. Which of the following port states does not the RSTP protocol include?
❑ A. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ B. Forwarding
❑ C. Discarding
❑ D. Learning

Answer: A
 408. Which router is the BDR in this network, as shown in the figure below?

❑ A. Router B
❑ B. Router A
❑ C. no BDR (Right Answers)
❑ D. Router C

Answer: C

409. It is known that the routing table of a router has the following two entries:

If the router wants to forward a message with a destination address of 9.1.4.5, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Select the second item as the best match because Ethernet is faster than Serialo
❑ B. Select the first item as the best match because the OSPF protocol has a higher priority value.
❑ G. Select the second item as the best match because the RIP protocol has a lower generation value.
❑ D. Select the second term as the best match because the route is a mare accurate match than the destination address of 9.1.4.5 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

410. The following is the routing table of router R1. If R1 sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2, which interface does it need to send from?

❑ A. Ethernet0/0/2
❑ B. Ethernet0/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ethernet0/0/0
❑ D. GigabitEthernet0/0/0

Answer: B
411. When routers are running in the same OSPF area, which of the following description of their LSDB and routing table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The link state database obtained by each router is different.
❑ B. The routing table cf each router is different. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The link state database obtained by all routers is the same (Right Answers)
❑ D. The routing tables obtained by all routers are the same.

Answer: BC

412. Which of the following elements are included in the routing table? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Destination/Mask (Right Answers)
❑ D. Cost (Right Answers)
❑ E. NextHop (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCDE

413. The output information of a router routing table is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2.

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2.

Answer; BC

414. By default, how long is the lease time of the lP address assigned by the DHCP server?
O A. 1 h
❑ B. 24h (Right Answers)
❑ C. 12h
O D. 18h

Answer: B

415. Which of the following applications is based on the TCP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. FTP (Right Answers)
❑ B. HTTP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ping
❑ D. TFTP

Answer: AB
416 The DHCP server function is enabled on an interface of the router. Which of the following [P addresses may the DHCP client obtain?
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
ip address 11 0 1 1 255 255.255.0
dhcp select interface
dhcp server excluded-ip-address 11 0 1 2 11 0 1.127

❑ A 11 0 1 1
❑ B. 11.0.1.100
❑ C 11.0.1 254 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 11.0.1.255

Answer: C

417. ❑n the switch. which VLANs can be deleted by using the undo command? (MuttiNe choice)
❑ A. v[an 4094 (Right Answers)
❑ B. vian 1
❑ C. vlan 2 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ elan 1024 (Right Answers)

Answer: AGD

418 In the network shown in the following figure, the output information of switch A is as follows_ In the current MAC address table of itch A, which interlace dues the C address of host B correspond to'

❑ A GigabitEthernet0/0/2
❑ B. Eth-Trunk I (Right Answers)
❑ C GigabitEthemet0/0/1
❑ B. GigabitEthemet0/0/3

Answer: B
419. As shown in the following figure, the router configuration information is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct?
Router A interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.100
dotlq termination vid 200
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
arp broadcast enable

Router B
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.200
dotlq termination vid 200
ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0
arp broadcast enable

❑ A. 10.0.12.1 can ping 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The sub-interface of Router A cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router B.
❑ C. The sub-interface of Router B cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router A.
❑ D. Router A and Router B cannot communicate because the sub-interface numbers of Router A and Router B are inconsistent.

Answer: A

420. Which of the following parameters does the LCP negotiation use to detect link loops and other anomalies?
❑ A. CHAP
❑ B. MRU
El C. PAP
❑ D. Magic word (Right Answers)

Answer; D

421. Static NAT can only implement one-to-one mapping between private addresses and public addresses.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A

422. Which of the following does AAA not include?

❑ A. Accounting
❑ B. Authorization
❑ C. Audit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Authentication

Answer: C
 423. Which authorization modes does W support on Huawei ARG3 series routers? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. HWTACACS authorization (Right Answers )
❑ B. Nat authorized (Right Answers )
❑ C. Authorization after successful RADIUS authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Local authorization (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCD

424. Which of the following about the function of the AH protocol in IPsec VPN is wrong?
❑ A. Support data integrity check
❑ B. Support anti-message playback
❑ C. Support packet encryption (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support data source verification

Answer: C

425 As hown in the following figure, the router functions as the DHCPy6 relay agent and Router B functions as the DHCPy6 server. Which of the following parameters must be configured on Router B? (Multiple choice)

❑ A Enable RA on port GO/0/1 of Router B

❑ B IPv6 address of the DHCPW relay
❑ C DHCR/6 DUD (Right Answers)
❑ D DHCPy6 address pool (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

426. How many times is the total length of an IPv6 address the length of an IPv4 address?
❑ A. 4 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 5
LI D. 2

Answer: A

427. Which of the following extended headers are supported by IPv6 packets? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. VLAN extension header
❑ B. hop-by-hop option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ C. Destination option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ D. Slice extension header (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD
 428. Which packet does the DHCPv6 server use to reply to Solicit packets?
❑ A. Request
❑ B. Advertise (Right Answers)
❑ C. Offer
❑ D. Reply

Answer: B

429. The MPLS architecture consists of a Control Plane and a Forwarding Plane. The forwarding plane mainly performs label switching and packet forwarding.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

430. What is the length of the Ethernet_ll frame that contains the Ethernet header?
❑ A. 64-15188 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 60-1560B
❑ C. 64-1500B
❑ D. 46-1500B

Answer: A

431. The Tracert diagnostic tool in Huawei routers uses UDP to encapsulate trace data.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

432. The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0125 is 192.168.1.128.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

433. Which memory saved configuration is used to select VRP version file when the device starts up?
❑ A. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. SD Card
❑ C. Flash
❑ D. USB

Answer: A
434. Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a router through the Console port?
❑ A.9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control.
❑ B.19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control.
❑ C.4800bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control.
❑ D.9600bps ; 8 data bits, 1 stop bits ; no parity check ; and no flow control. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

435. Which layer of the OSI reference model does the switch work on?
❑ A. Network layer
❑ B. Transport layer
❑ C. Data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Physical layer

Answer: C

436. Which of the following statements about the Alternate port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The Alternate port serves as a backup for the specified port and provides another backup path from the root bridge to the corresponding network segment.
❑ B. Alternate port forwards user traffic and learns MAC address
❑ C. Alternate port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
❑ D. Alternate port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port of the root port (Right Answers )

Answer: D

437. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol not include?
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Forwarding

Answer: B

438. In the RSTP standard, in order to improve the convergence speed, the port directly connected to the terminal by the switch can be defined as 0.
❑ A. Fast port
O B. Root port
O C. Edge port (Right Answers )
O D. Backup port

Answer: C

439. VRP operating platform, which of the following commands can only view static routes?
❑ A. display ip routing-table verbose
❑ B. display ip routing-table statistics
❑ C. display ip routing-table protocol static (Right Answers)
❑ D. display ip routing-table

Answer: C
 440. Which layer of the OSE reference model does the router work on?
❑ A. Data link layer
❑ B. Network layer (Right Answers)
❑ C. Application layer
❑ D. Transport layer

Answer: B

441. Which of the following description of static and dynamic routing is wrong?
❑ A. Dynamic routing protocols take up more system resources than static routes
❑ B. Static routing is simple to configure and easy to manage when applied in an enterprise.
❑ C. After a link fails, static routes can automatically complete network convergence. (Right Answers )
❑ D. After administrators deploy dynamic routing protocols in the enterprise network, post-maintenance and expansion can be more convenient.

Answer; C

442. Which of the following features does the OSPF protocol have?
❑ A. Easy to generate routing loops
❑ B. Calculate the shortest path in hops
❑ C_ Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ D. Poor scalability

Answer: C

443. A router runs OSPF and does not specify a router ID. The P address of all interfaces is as follows. What is the router ID of the router OSPF protocol?

❑ A. 10.0.12.1
❑ B. 10.0.1.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 10.0.21.1
❑ D. 10.0.1.1

Answer: B

444. What port number is used by the FTP protocol to control plane?
❑ A. 22
❑ B. 21 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 24
❑ D. 23

Answer: B
445_ An administrator cannot log in to the AR22013 router through Te!net However, other administrators can log in normally_ Which of the following are possible causes') (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The admin user account has been deleted (Right Answers )
❑ B. The admin user account has been disabled (Right Answers)
❑ C The privilege level of the admin user account has been modified to 0
❑ 0 The Telnet service of the AR2200 router has been disabled.

Answer: AB

446 The Eth-Truk port in manual link aggregation mode, whose transmission rate is related to 0 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Bandwidth of member ports (Right Answers )
❑ B. Is the member port on the public or private network?
❑ C. is the IP address configured on the member port?
▪ Number of member ports (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

447. As shown in the followteg tigers the ports connected to De host of Switch A and Switch B belong to 10 end VLAN IC respectively. late port Ape of the switch Is Trunk and the PV1D is to and OIL Which on ale tolowing statements are
-
00013C ,
(Mubpla cuotuei

❑ A Host A and host B boke lodifrononl VANS ate cannot ping each cater
❑ e Hoc A and Host B can pas (Right Answers)
❑ c Host AS ARP ragtag Gavot ha -forwarded to host B
D. The switch does nce carry as VLMI TAG when forwerding tea frames sent by the host Wight Answer.)

Answo BD

448 The authentication scheme, authorization scheme, accounting scheme, HWTACAGS, or RADIUS server template created on the AR router can take effect only after it is applied in the domain.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

449. The router can assign a specified INC address to the host through a stateless address autoconfiguration scheme.
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

450_ Which multicast address is used in OSPFv3 to represent all routers?

❑ A. FF02: 6
❑ B. FF02:.8
❑ C. FF02:5 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02:1

Answer: C
 451_ The OSPFv3 adjacency can be established only after the IP& address prefixes of the two ends are the same.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

452. Which of the following IPv6 addresses has a Solicited-node mutticast address of FF02::1 :FF12:12
❑ A. 2020::1200:1
❑ 2019::12:1 (Right Answers )
❑ 201g:112:1000
❑ a 2020:112ABI1

Answer: B

453. Which of the following statements about the Adjacency Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Adjacency Segment is used to identify a certain adjacency of a node in the network_
❑ B. Adjacency Segment is identified by Adjacency Segment ID (STD)
❑ G. Adjacency Sesnent spreads to other network elements through the IGP protocol, which is globally visible and valid locally.
❑ D. Adjacency Segment must be manually configured (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑

454. What levels are not included in the TCPIIPv4 model? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Session layer (Right Answers )
❑ B. Presentation layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Network layer
❑ D. Transport layer
❑ E. Application layer

Answer: AB

455. In the OSI reference model, which of the following has the ability to perform end-to-end error detection and flow control?
❑ A. Physical layer
❑ B. Data link layer
❑ G. Network layer
❑ ID_ Transport layer (Right Answers )

Answer: ❑

456 As shown in the figure, after the network administrator completes the Telnet configuration on the router, it is found that the host cannot establish a connection with the router through Telnet. Which of the following options can help solve this
problem? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Check if the switch has a default gateway address configured_

❑ B Use Ping to check the IP connectivity between the host and the router GO/0/0 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Check if the Telnet configuration on the router is correct (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ Check if the host's ARP cache table overflows

Answer: BC
457. After receiving the BREW set by the TC, the switch running the RSTP protocol clears the MAC address learned by all ports.
❑ A. True
O B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

458. In the RSTP protocol, when the topology is stable, which port roles are in the Discarding state? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Backup part (Right Answers)
❑ B. Designated part
❑ C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root port

Answer: AC

459. Which of the following statement about STP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. During the initialization process ; each switch that enables STP protocol actively sends configuration BPDUs. (Right Answers)
❑ B. When the port is enabled with STP, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs from the specified port.
❑ C. The BPDU packet is encapsulated in an Ethernet data frame, and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC address. (Right Answers)
❑ D. There are two types of packets in the STP protocol, configure BPDUs and TCN BPDUs. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

460. What is the value of the Type field in the RSTP configuration BPDUs?
❑ A. Ox01
❑ B. 0x03
❑ C. Ox00
❑ D. 0x02 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

461. Which of the following cases will the switch running RSTP generate a configuration BPDU with TO set?
❑ A. A non-edge port migrates to the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ B. Backup port down
❑ C. Edge port migrates to Forwarding state
❑ D. Edge port migrates to Discarding state

Answer: A

462. Which of the following routing protocols can generate a default route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. Static (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
 463. The router running OSPF first reaches the FULL state, and then performs LSDB synchronization.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

464. As the network shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. The top of the link is the value of the Cost. What is the path of the RA to the network 10.0.0.8/8?

0 A. 70
0 B. 100
0 C. 60 (Right Answers)
0 D. 20

Answer: C

465. Which packet does OSPF use to acknowledge received LSU packets?
❑ A. LSACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
El C. LSR
❑ D. LSU

Answer: A

466 if the Proto of a routing information in the routing table is OSPF, the priority of this route must be 10.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

467. On the serial interface ; you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or outbound interface.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
468 If the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to make the 1opbacko communication between Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the folbwing command need to enter on Router A?

❑ A p route-static 100 2 2 32 GigabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ 13_ ip route-static 100 2 2 255255 255255 100 12 1
❑ a ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12 2 (Right Answers)
ip route-static 100220 GigebitEthemet 0/0/0

Answer: C

469. TFTP is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

470. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The user manually created 4 VLANs. (Right Answers)

❑ B. When the GE0/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 10, it does not carry the VLAN TAG_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. When the GEO/0/2 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it carries the VLAN TAG.
❑ D. When the GEO/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it does not carry the VLAN TAG.

Answer: AB

471. A trunk part and a Hybrid port are handled in the same way when receiving data frames.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 472. Which of the following PPPoE messages are sent non-unicast?
❑ A. PADS
❑ B. PADI (Right Answers)
❑ C. PADO
❑ ❑. PADR

Answer: B

473. Which of the following fields does the HDLC frame consist of? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Control field (C) (Right Answers)
❑ B. Frame Check Sequence Field (FCS) (Right Answers)
❑ C. Address field (A) (Right Answers)
❑ ❑ _ Flag field (F) (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

474_ The following figure shows the encapsulation formal of the data packet n IPsec VPN_ Which formal is the type of data packet used toencapsulate in IPsec V1417

❑ A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers )

❑ B. Universal mode
❑ C. Transmission mode
❑ ID_ This encapsulation is error

Answer: A

475. Which of the following SNMP messages is sent to the NMS by the agent on the managed device?
❑ A. Gel-Next-Request
❑ B Get-Request
❑ C. Set-Request
❑ ❑. Response (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑

476 The AOL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the forwarded traffic is fiItered The forwarded traffic ncludes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

477. What is the number range of the Layer 2 ACL?

❑ A. 4000-4999 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 6000-6031
❑ C. 2000-2999
❑ ❑. 3000-3999

Answer: A
 478. Which of the following statement about ilpv6 address configuration is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. IPv6 addresses can only be manually configured.
❑ D. IPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

479. The OSPFv3 protocol itself does not provide authentication.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

480. The Flow Label Field, Source Address Field, and Destination Address field in IPv6 together specify a forwarding path in the network for a particular data stream.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
D B. False

Answer: A

481. Which of the following IPv6 addresses is a multicast address?

❑ A. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ C. 2000::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FC00.:2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC

Answer: A

482. Which technology does the shared medium network use for data forwarding?
❑ A. CDMAtCD (Right Answers)
❑ B. CSMAIAC
❑ C. TDMA/CD
❑ D. CSMA1CD

Answer: A

483. Which of the following IPv4 addresses is a Class A address?

❑ A. 100.1.1.1
❑ B. 172.16.1.1
❑ C. 121.1.1.1 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 192.168.1.1

Answer: C
 484. How many ways does VRP support to configure router? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ B. Configure the router through FTP
❑ C. Configure the router through the mini USB port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Configure the router through the console port. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

485.

The above is the display startup information of the AR2200 router. For this information, which of the following statements is wrong?
❑ A. The running configuration file is not saved
❑ B. The system file used for starting the device is ar22204200r003c0Ospc200.cc
❑ C. The system file of the next startup of the device can be modified by using the command "startup system software <atartup-software-name>".
❑ D. The system file cannot be modified when the device starts next time. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

486. In the VRP system, which of the following functions does the Ctrl +Z combination key have? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Exit the console interface view.
❑ B. Return to the user view from the system view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Exit interface view
❑ D. Return to the user view from arty view (Right Answers)
❑ E. Exit the current view

Answer: BD

487. Which of the following description of the Forwarding state in the spanning tree protocol is wrong?
❑ A. port in Forwarding state can send BPDUs.
❑ B port in Forwarding state does not learn the source MAC address of the packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. port in Forwarding state can forward data packets
❑ D. port in Forwarding state can receive BPDUs.

Answer: B

488. The bridge ID of the STP protocol in the switching network is as follows. Which of the following bridge ID owned by switch will become the root bridge?
❑ A. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-AA
❑ B. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
❑ C. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC
❑ D. 4096 00-01-02-03-04-DD (Right Answers)

Answer: D
489. The RSTP protocol uses the PIA mechanism to speed up the speed at which the upstream port goes to the Forwarding state, but the loop is not available, what is the reason?
❑ A. Introduced edge ports
❑ B. Shortened the time of Forward Delay
❑ C. Ensure that loops do not occur by blocking its own non-root ports (Right Answers)
❑ D. Speed up the port role election

Answer: C

490. Which of the following statement about the dynamic MAC address table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The interface learns by using the source MAC address in the packet. The entry can be aged. (Right Answers)
CI B. Dynamic entries are lost after system reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset
❑ C. can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of dynamic MAC address entries. (Right Answers)
O D. The saved entries are not lost after the system reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset. (Right Answers)

Answer, ACD

491. Which of the following protocols is dynamic IGP routing protocol?

❑ A. Static
❑ B. BGP
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. Direct

Answer: C

492. The router needs to modify the destination IP address in the data packet when forwarding the data packet.
❑ A. True
El B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

493. route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20, which of the following statement about this command is correct?
❑ A. The route must appear in the routing table.
❑ B. The destination network of the route is 10.0.12.2/32
❑ C. The priority of this route is 100.
❑ ID. The mask length of the route destination network is 32 bits. (Right Answers)

Answer:

494. Which of the following statement about the OSPF protocol DR is correct?
❑ A. DR must be the highest priority device in the network
❑ B. DR election is preemptive
❑ C. Router ID. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as DR.
❑ D. An interface priority is 0, and then the interface cannot be a DR (Right Answers )

Answer: D
 495_ Which of the following statement about the priority of static routes in Huawei devices is incorrect?
❑ A. The default value of static route priority is 60.
❑ B. The priority value of the static route is 255, indicating that the route is unavailable.
❑ G. The static route priority value ranges from 0 to 255. (Right Answers)
❑ 0. The priority of static routes is divided into internal priority and external priority. Administrators can modify external priority

Answer: C

496_ The router starts the FTP service_ The username and password are both huawei, and the root directory of the FTP is set to flash,/dhcp/. Which of the following commands must be configured? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. local-user huawei password cipher huawei (Right Answers)
❑ B. lip sewer enable (Right Answers)
❑ G. local-user huawei service-type lip (Right Answers)
❑ B_ focal-user huawei flp-directory flash:/dhcp/ (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCD

497 The priority of the LAGP protocol is as shown in the figure. Switch A and Switch B adopt link aggregation in LAGP mode, and all interfaces loin the link aggregation group. The maximum number of active ports is set to 3. Which port of
switch A is not the active port?

❑ A. G0/0/2
❑ 11 GO/0/3 (Right Answers)
❑ a GO/0/0
❑ D. GO/0/1

Answer: B

498. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. This data frame must carry VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ B. The TCP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ C. The UDP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ ❑. The IP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.

Answer: A

49.9. Which of the fat/owing description about the trunk port and the Access port is correct?
❑ A. The Trunk port can only send tagged frames.
❑ B. The Trunk port can only send untagged frames.
❑ C- The Access port can only send tagged frames.
❑ ❑ - The Access part can only send untagged frames. (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑

500 As shown In the following figure, Switch A and Router Aare connected through two Inks_ The two links ere in the manual ead balancing made The a/minimal-ion pert number is I, and the data is forwarded through the aggregation {ink which
needs to carry VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Mottfpla choice)

100$
❑ A interlace Elh-Tuenskl port tune, pert trunk Wow-pass vlan interface GigabilEllownatCgatt athttrunk 1 g interlace Gigab0Elharnet0.0/2 athdrunk 1 a
❑ B. interlace Eth-Trunkl undo ponswitch # interface Elh-Trunki.100 dolgiemitnation red 100 to address 10.0.12.2255.255.255 0 arp broadcast enable -et (Right An...re 7
El C. inlerfeee Eds.Trunkl mode lamp-sleet port tinkeype trued( port think eked pass vtan 1004 tri.rface GtgabdEthanialtlf0f1 att,lrunk 1 u interface GgebilEthernetc/0,2 ath.lrunk I a
Et G. interface 0mabilEtheroato221 ant-trunk t 0 Interlace GigabrtElhernet0312 elh-trunk I tl (Right Answers)

Answer. BB
 501_ Which of the following functions are supported by the LCP protocol in the PPP protocol? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. Negotiate the maximum receiving unit MRU (Right Answers )
❑ B. Negotiate the authentication protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Negotiate the network layer address
❑ D. Detect link loops (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

502 A company has 50 private IP addresses. The administrator uses NAT technology to connect the company network to the public network_ However, the company has only one public network address_ Which of the following NAT conversion
methods meets the requirements,
❑ A easy-ip (Right Answers)
❑ NAPT
❑ G Dynamic conversion
❑ a Static conversion)

Answer: A

503 As shown in the figure, there is a Web server in the private network that needs to provide HTTP services to public network users. Therefore, the network administrator needs to configure NAT on the gateway muter RTA to implement the
requirements. Which of the following configuration can meet the requirements,

❑ A [RTA-Serm11/0/1Inat server protocol top gbbal 202 10.101 wnw inside 192.168.1.1 8080 (Right Answers)
❑ [RTA-Senal1/0/1]na1 server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 20210_101 8080
❑ G [RTA-Gmabitetherne10/0/1]nat server protocol top global 20210.101 WNW inside 192_168 1_1 8080
❑ El_ [RTA-Gmabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol top global 192168_11 anew inside 20210101 8080

Answer: A

504 When deploying an ACL on a Huawei device, which of the following description is correct? (Whale choice)
❑ k When AGLs define rules, they can only be advanced in the order of 10, 20, and 30
❑ B. The same ACL can be calked under mufti& interfaces (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can only be applied to the outbound direction when the ACL is called an the interface.
❑ D. AGLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF traffic is not encapsulated using UDP protocol.
❑ E. The AGL can match the TGP/UDP port number of the packet, and can specify the range of the port number. (Right Answers)

Answer: BE

505. Which of the following message types does RADIUS use t❑ indicate authentication rejection?
❑ A. Access-Reject (Right Answers)
❑ B. Access-Request
❑ G. Access-Challenge
❑ D. Access-Accept

Answer: A

506. Which authentication modes does AAA support on Huawei AR G3 series routers? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. 802.1x
❑ B. None (Right Answers)
❑ C. HWTACACS (Right Answers )
❑ D. Local (Right Answers )

Answer: BCD

507 if the maximum number in Ihe ACL rule is 12, by default, when the user configures a new rule without specifying a number, what is the number assigned In the new rule by the system?
❑ A 14
❑ B. 16
❑ C. 15 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 13

Answer: C
508. If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESP to ensure secure communication, how many SAs (Security Associations) do the two peers need to build?
❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
0 C. 3
❑ D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

509. DHCPve belongs to a stateful address autoconfiguration protocol.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
O B. False

Answer: A

510. The DHCPv6 server includes the management address configuration flag (M) in the RA message. If the value is 1, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Indicates that the client enables DHCPv6 stateful address configuration. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Indicates that the client needs to obtain other network configuration parameters through stateless DHCPv6.
❑ C. Indicates that the client enables IPv6 stateless address automatic allocation scheme
❑ D. Indicates that the client needs to cbtain other network configuration parameters through stateful DHCPv6.

Answer: A

511. In the OSI reference model, which of the following has the ability to perform end-to-end error detection and flow control?
❑ A. Transport layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. Network layer
❑ C. Data link layer
O D. Physical layer

Answer: A

512. After application data is processed through the data link layer, what does it call?
❑ A. Segment
❑ B. PDU
❑ C. Frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. Packet

Answer: C

513.<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei] user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] history-command max-size 20
Regarding the above configuration, which of the following statement is correct?
O A. history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the size of the history command cache to 20 (Right Answers)
❑ B. The default size of the history command cache is 5
❑ C. The default size of the history command cache is 5 bytes.
❑ D. After the above configuration is completed, the history command cache can save 20 bytes of commands.

Answer: A
514. What is the destination MAC address of the BPDU in the STP protocol?
❑ A. 01-80-C2-04-05-06
❑ B. FF -FF
- - - FF
- - - -FF
- - -FF
- - - FF
❑ C. 00-80-C2-00-00-00
❑ D. 01 -80
- - -C2
- - - 00
- - - -00
- - 00 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

515. As shown in the figure, if the switch runs STP with default parameters, which of the following ports will be elected as the designated port?

El

O A. GO/0/1 port of Switch A (Right Answers)

❑ B. G0/0/2 port of switch A
❑ C. HUB's E0/0/2 port
❑ D. HUB's E0/0/1 port

Answer: A

516. The router has the longest matching principle when looking up the routing table. Which of the following parameter is the length?
❑ A. The size of the NextHoplP address
❑ B. Priority of the routing protocol
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. The length of the mask (Right Answers)

Answer: D

517. Which packet does OSPF use to describe its own LSDB?
❑ A. LSR
❑ B. HELLO
❑ C. DD (Right Answers)
❑ D. LSU

Answer: C

518. HhaweiGigabitEthernet0/011 ] port link-type access

[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port default vlan 10
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/012] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
According to the command shown above, which of the following descriptions is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The PVID of GigabitEthernet010/2 port is 10
❑ C. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 1.
❑ D. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 10. (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
519 As shown in the foleiving gap-AM. Nye switches are connected through four links COPPER refers mine efectneall interfacs, and FISH refers m the optical interlace. Which oil the foilanng Iva interfaces can implement link aggregation,

1
Lff A 0010 3 and FEC/I0I3
El 0 001013 and 00/13/2
❑ C 001012 end FE0/0/3
n 0. 0010:2 and 001011 (Right gnawers)

Answer. Li

520 if a rmsanys network administrator wants to divide users who frequently change office locations and °flan access different nahvorks from tie conch to be cotporata nalwisair to MANIC, which of the following methods should Ice used to
diridaVLAkts?
'LI A drvide MAN based on protocol
:11 d. dads ?DUI based on MAC address (Right Answers)
D C divide VLAN based on Port
71 0 diode WAN based an grlanals

Answer= ft

521. Which two stages can the PPPoE session establishment process be divided into? (Multiple choice)
O A. PPP connecting stage
❑ B. Discovery stage (Right Answers)
O C. PPPoE Session stage (Right Answers)
O D. DHCP stage

Answer: BC

522 IOTA] aaa

IRTA-aaal domain Huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme alt
]RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme au2
The network administrator performs the above configuration on the Huawei router RTA. If a user needs to be authenticated in the authentication domain "Huawei", which of the following description is correct?
CI A will use "authentication-scheme all" authentication, if "aul" is deleted, "au2" authentication will be used
❑ B will use "authentication-scheme au2" authentication, if "au2" is deleted, "aul" authentication will be used
❑ C Will use the "authentication-scheme 002" authentication (Right Answers )
CI B. Will use the "authentication-scheme out" authentication

Answer: C

523. Huawei ARG3 series routers enable all versions of SNMP (SNMPvl, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3) by default.
O A. True (Right Answers)
El B. False

Answer: A

524. Which of the following encapsulation modes does lPsec VPN support? (Multiple choice)
O A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
O B. Exchange mode
O C. Transmission mode (Right Answers)
O D. Routing mode

Answer: AC

525 Two authentication domains "Area I" and "Area 2" are configured on a router Mel serves as the authentication server. FM:tit.er arrgentrealm wrIf the correct usemamelivatwer" and passauml "heir Wrieh authunlicalon Wraith wig the
0...signed to?
D A. Authentication domain 'Areal"
▪ 0 Aurvenhcalion domain 'Area?"
❑ C Authenticalsn domain 1default_admin domain"
❑ 0 Authentication Minim "defaull domain" (Right Answers)

Maw, 0
526. If the EUI-64 address 78BC-FEFF-FFFE-EFAB is calculated based on the MAC address, what should its corresponding MAC address be?
❑ A. 7ABC-FEFE-EFAB (Right Answers)
❑ B. 78BC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ C. 7ABC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ D. 78BC-FEFE-EFAB

Answer: A

527. The DHCPv6 client must obtain both IPv6 addresses and another configuration information from the DHCPv6 server.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

528. When the network device sends the IPv6 packet, the packet length is compared with the NTU value. If the value is greater than the MTU value, the packet is directly discarded.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

529. The output information of the router interface is as follows. Which mufticast address data can the interface receive? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. FF02::2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. FF02::1: FF12:1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. FF02::1: FF6FAF36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02::1 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

530. Which of the following statement about the IPv6 anycast address is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The packet whose destination address is anycast address will be sent to the network interface in the meaning of the route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Implement load sharing of services (Right Answers)
❑ C. Provide redundancy for services (Right Answers)
❑ D. Anycast address and unicast address use the same address space (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

531. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header and the network layer header of the message.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A
532. When using the Traced program to test the path through which the target node passes, the default TTL value for Traceroute is measured 0 times.
❑ A.3 (Right Answers)
❑ fr 8
❑ fr 6
❑ D.4

Answer: A

533. Which of the following description of the role of the free ARP message is wrong?
❑ A Used to advertise the active/standby switchover in the VRRP backup group.
❑ B Used to advertise a new current AC address_ The sender replaces the NIC and the AC address changes. In order to notify all hosts before the AP entry ages, the sender can send a free ARP_
❑ G Used to check duplicate IP addresses. Nommlly, no ARP response will be received. If received, it indicates that there is an address in the network that is duplicated with its own IP address.
❑ 0 Free ARP packets are used to keep active with the gateway device when the host is idle. (Right Answers )

Answer: 0

534. Which of the following statement about the ARP message is wrong?
❑ A. The ARP reply message is sent by the unicast party.
❑ B. Any network device needs to obtain the data link layer identifier by sending ARP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. ARP request message is sent by broadcast
❑ ID ARP packets cannot traverse the router and cannot be forwarded to other broadcast domains.

Answer: B

535. Using the command mkdir test in the VRP operating platform, the system will create a folder named test.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

536 When the switch receives a unicast data frame, it will look up the destination MAC address in the MAC table. Which of the following statement is wrong?

❑ A. If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address table is not the one that enters the switch, the switch performs the forwarding operation
❑ B If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address table is the port that the frame enters the switch, the switch performs the discard operation
❑ C. If the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the flooding operation_
❑ D. tf the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the discard operation. (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

537. The default route can be derived from (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A Manua[ configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. Dynamic routing protccof generation (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router itself has
❑ a Link layer protocol generation

Answer: AB
538. Which of the following packets belong to the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. LSU (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
❑ C. LSR (Right Answers)
❑ D. HELLO (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

539. On the broadcast network, both the DR and the BDR use the mutticast address 224.0.0.6 to receive the link status update packet.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False

Answer: A

540. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device is ABR? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Router B (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router D
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router A (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
541. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following interfaces can forward data frames with a VLAN ID of 40 and does not carry labels when forwarding?

❑ A. GEO/0/4
❑ B. GEO/0/2
❑ C. GEO/0/3
❑ D. GEO/0/5 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

542. As shown in the figure, which of the following configuration of the VLAN on the Huawei switch is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Clientl belongs to VLAN 10, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the command for dividing VLAN based on MAC address on the switch is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Client3 belongs to VLAN 30, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ E. Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is incorrect. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABE

543. In the link aggregation technology, which parameters can the Eth-Trunk use to implement load balancing? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Same source IP address or destination IP address (Right Answers)
❑ B. Same source port number or destination port number
❑ C. Same source MAC address or destination MAC address (Right Answers )
❑ D. The same protocol type

Answer: AC
 544. The Truk port can allow multiple VLANs to pass, including VLAN4096.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

545 As shown in the figure, the administrator wants all hosts to access the Tnternet from 8.00 to 17- 00 every day. In the interface configuration of GO/0/l, h h AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound?

❑ A time-range am9topm5 08 - 00 to 11:00 working-day # acl number 2003 rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5
❑ B time-range am91opm5 08:00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2002 rule 5 permit time-range an-e1opm5 #
❑ C. lime-range amgtopm5 08_00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2001 rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5 # (Right Answers )
❑ D. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17-00 off-day # acl number 2004 rule 5 permit time-range am91opm5

Answer: C

546. The router output information is as follows. What is the IPv6 address obtained by this interface?

❑ A. 3000::3000/64
❑ B. 3000::1/64
❑ C_ 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ 2000::1/64

Answer: C

54T Which of the following features is no longer supported by ❑SPFv3 on an EPv6 network?
❑ A. Router-1D
❑ B. Multi-regional division
❑ C_ Authentication function (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Send protocol packets in mutticast mode

Answer: C
 548. Which packet is sent by the DHCF've client in response to the Advertise packet sent by the DHCPv€ sewer?
❑ A. Offer
❑ B. Request (Right Answers)
❑ G. Reply
❑ D Advertise

Answer: B

549 The configuration information of a routers [MGM address pool is as folbws if the host adopts [MGM doleful autoconfiguration, which IPM addresses can the host obtain? (Multiple choice)

dhcps6 pod test

address prefix 3000:164
excluded-address 3000:1
dns-server 2000:1
dns-domain-name huawei dns-domain-name huawercom

❑ A 30002/64 (Right Answers)

❑ 13- 30900/64
❑ C 3000.3000/64 (Right Answers)
❑ 0 2000- 1/64

Answer: AC

550 Segment Routing (SR) is a protocol for extending the existing IGla protocol, based on the MPLS protocol, using source routing technology to forward data packets on the network_
❑ A_ True (Right Answers)
▪ False

Answer: A

551 if the routers Ethernet interface needs to forward a 1600B packet, which of the fallowing statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A The value of the Flags field of the first packet is 1 (Right Answers )
❑ B The first message contains the payload 14808 (Right Answers )
❑ G The slice offset field value of the second fragmented packet is 1480 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The value of the Flags field of the second packet is a

Answer: ABC

552. There is a TTL field in the header of the 1P packet. Which of the following statement about this field is correct?
❑ A. This field is used to indicate the priority of the packet.
❑ B. The length of this field is 7 digits.
❑ C. This field is used for packet anti-ring. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This field is used for packet fragmentation.

Answer: C

553. After the network administrator uses the TracedRoute function on the router device, what is the value of the Protocol field of the IPv4 header in the data packet sent by the router?
❑ A6
❑ B.1 (Right Answers)
❑ C.17
▪ 2

Answer:
554 As shown in the following figure, host C is ony required to communicate with one of host A or host B_ Then, which Gourmand can be configured to implement the requirement under the G0/013 port of SWB?

❑ A mtu 2000
❑ B port link-type trunk
❑ C speed 100
▪ mac-limit maximum 1 (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

555_ As shown in the following figure, the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows. The h can never learn the MAC address of the HOST A Which of the following reasons not possible,

❑ A HOST A did not send any data frames

❑ B The GO/0/1 port of the switch is set to ACCESS mode (Right Answers )
❑ C_ The MAC address learning function is disabled on GO/0/1 of the switch.
❑ 0. Turn off the MAC address learning function of the LAN to which HOST A belongs.

Answer. B

556 The network administrator finds that a port on the switch has learned the MAC address, but cannot forward the data frame. Which of the following working states is the port in?
❑ A Disabled
❑ B Blocking
❑ C Listening
❑ D Learning (Right Answers)

Answer,

557_ As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured_ Host B has a gateway ARP cache. In host A, the command ping 110 12_1 is used. Which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-B.
❑ B The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-A.
0 C_ The destination IP address of the packet sent by host A is 11 0.12.1.
❑ 0_ No packets will be sent from host A (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

558. In Huawei AR routers, what is the default OSPF priority value?

❑ A. 20
❑ B. 10 (Right Answers )
❑ a 30
❑ ❑_ 0

Answer: B
559. When configuring a static route on a broadcast interface, you must specify the next hop address.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

560. In the OSPF broadcast network, which routers do the DR other routers exchange link state information with? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DR (Right Answers)
❑ B. BDR (Right Answers)
❑ C. All OSPF neighbors
❑ D. DR Other

Answer, AB

561. What is the value of the direct routing protocol priority?

❑ A. 0 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 30
❑ C. 10
❑ D. 20

Answer: A

562. The configuration information of the GO/0/1 port of the switch is as follows. Which VLAN data frame does the switch forward not carry the VLAN TAG?

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 10
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20 30 40

❑ A. 10 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 30
0 C. 40
❑ D. 20

Answer: A

563. Referring to the following topology and configuration. routers Ri and R2 are connected through a Serial low-speed cable, and the data link layer encapsulation uses PPP. When the Holdtimes of Ri and R2 are inconsistent, PPP negotiation
fails and communication cannot be performed.

C A True
C B False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
564. PPP is more secure and reliable than HDLC because PPP supports (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A. SSH B. PAP C. MD5 D. CHAP

Answer: BD

565. The configuration information of GO/0/1 interface of Router A is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
acl number 3000
rule 5 deny 17
rule 10 deny 89
rule 15 deny 6

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
traffic-filter inbound acl 3000

❑ A. This interface does not forward ICMP packets.

❑ B. This interface does not forward received SNMP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This interface does not forward received FTP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This interface can establish OSPF neighbor relationships with other routers.

Answer: BC

566. Layer 2 ACL can match source MAC, destination MAC, source IP ; and destination IP, etc. information.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

567. What is the value of the protocol type field in the FP packet, indicating that the protocol is GRE?
❑ A. 47 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 48
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 1

Answer: A

568. OSPFv2 supports lPv6 by adding new types of LSAs.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
569. Which of the following parts does the global unicast address consist of? (Multiple Choice)
El A. Protocol ID
❑ B. Interface ID (Right Answers)
❑ C. Subnet ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global Routing Prefix (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

570. The output information of Router C is as follows. How many global unicast address prefixes does Router C advertise?

❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 3 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 4

Answer: C

571. What are the values of the currently used IPv6 multicast address flag field (Flag)? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 0 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 3

Answer: AB

572. Which of the following statements about the TTL field in the IP packet header is correct?
❑ A. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value will be increased by 1.
❑ C. TTL defines the time interval at which the source host can send packets.
❑ D. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.

Answer: A
 573. Which of the following is not included in the VRP system login method?
❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. SSH
❑ C_ Netstream (Right Answers)
❑ D. Web

Answer: C

574. Which of the following information is used to prompt by the VRP operating platform for incomplete input commands?
❑ A. Error: Wrong parameter found at w position
❑ B. Error: Incomplete command found at wposition (Right Answers)
❑ G_ Error. Too many parameters found at w position
❑ D. Error Ambiguous command found at "'position

Answer: B

575. Which of the following descriptions about the specified port of the spanning tree is correct?
❑ A. The part en the root switch must not be the designated port.
❑ B. The designated port can forward configuration BPDUs to the network segment connected to it. (Right Answers)
❑ G. Each switch has only one designated purl
❑ D. Specify the porno forward configuration BPDUs from this switch to the root switch.

Answer: B

576 Which of the following statements about the handling of RSTP configuration BPDU are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the topology is stable, the non-root bodge device sends configuration BPDUs at the interval specified by the Hello timer, regardless of whether the configuration BPDUs are received from the root bodge_ (Right Answers)
❑ B After the topology is stable, the non-root bridge demo sends the configuration BPDU after receiving the configuration BPDU sent by the upstream device.
❑ C The root port must wait for the BPDU Max Age timeout to re-top the topology calculation.
❑ 0 When a port receives a sub-optimal RST BPDU from the upstream designated bridge, the port immediately responds to its stored RST BPDU, (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

577. Which of the following statements are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. By default, the order of route priorities is that direct routes are higher than OSPF.
❑ B. In VRP, the greater the priority value of the routing protocol, the higher the priority of the route_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. The priority of each static route can be different
❑ D. If the cost of the route is larger, the higher the priority of the route. (Right Answers )

Answer: BD

578 Which of the following descriptions are incorrect about the OSPF Router ID? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The prerequisite for the normal operation of OSPF protocol is that the router has a router ID_
❑ B. The router ID must be the LP address of an interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router ID must be specified by manual configuration. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router Ins must be the same in the same area. The router Ins in different areas can be different. (Right Answers )

Answer: BCD

579 When a router forwards a packet, if it does not match the corresponding detail route and there is no default route, the router will discard the packet directly.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
580 After the administrator successfully logs in to the router through Telnet, it is found that the IP address of the interface can not be configured on the muter. So what is the possible reason?
❑ A SNMP parameter configuration error
❑ B The Telnet terminal software used by the administrator prohibits the corresponding operation.
❑ C The Telnet user level is incorrectly configured (Right Answers)
❑ 0 The authentication mode of the Telnet user is incorrectly configured.

Answer: C

581 In the network shown in the following figure, the switch uses the VLANIF interface to connect to the sub-interface of the muter. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?

111

❑ A interface Mandl° ip address 100 12 1 255255 255 0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B interface Vbnif10 ip address 100.121 255 255 255.0 # interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2 pod link-type access pod default Nan 10 #
❑ C interface Vlanifl D ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255.255.0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 interface Vbnif10 ip address 10 a12:1 255 255 2550 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk pvid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #

Answer: C

582. If an Ethernet data frame Lengthrrype=0)(8100, which of the following ports might this data frame be sent from? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch Hybrid type port (Right Answers)
❑ B. Switch Access type port
❑ C. Serial interface of the router
❑ D. Switch Trunk type port (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

583 As shown in the figure, the two ports of switch GE0/0/1 and GEO/0/2 perform different Hybrid configurations. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The data frame sent by the finance department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrative department and the finance department cannot visit each other because the VLANs belonging to the two depadments are different.
❑ C. If both ports GEO/0/1 and GEO/0/2 of the switch are modified to be trunk pods, the two departments can communicate normally.
❑ 0 The data frame sent by the administrative department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20
❑ E The switch here can be a Layer 2 switch or a Layer 3 switch because communication does not need to go through a Layer 3 gateway (Right Answers)

Answer: AE

584 In the LPP negotiation phase of lhe PPP protocol, if the parameters sent by the other party are completely accepted, which of the following packet will be sent?
❑ Configure-Reject
❑ B. Configure-Ark (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure-Request
❑ Configure-Nak

Answer: B
 585 As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)

▪ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0 12_0 0 0 0255 # interface GmabitEthernet0.10/3 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ B_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.120 0.0 0255 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound net 2000 # (Right Answers )
❑ C_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 0.0.0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.120 0.0.0_255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 traffic-liter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers)

Answer: BB

586. The output information of Router C is as follows: what is the source IPv6 address of Router C sending OSPFv3 LSU packets?

111

❑ A. 2603:1/64
❑ B. FE80::2E0:FGFEFE48:4EC8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2005: 1/64
❑ 0. 2009-1/64

Answer: B

587. Which of the following message types is used for the RA message that is used for IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration?
❑ A. IGIv1Pv6
❑ El I Clv1Pv5 (Right Answers)
❑ C. UPv5
❑ D. TCPv6

Answer: B

588 The FEC (Forwarding Equivalence Class) is a set of data streams with certain commonalities; the FEC can be divided according to the add but cannot be divided according to the service type, CloS, etc.
❑ A True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
589 Which statement is correct about the function of the network layer in the 081 reference model?
111 A. The closest layer to the user in the OSI reference model, providing network services for applications
❑ B Transmit bitstreams between devices, specifying levels, speed, and cable pins
O C. Provide connection-oriented or non-connection-oriented data transfer and error detection before retransmission
0 a Provide a logical address for the router to determine the path (Right Answers)
❑ E. Combine the bits into bytes, combine the bytes into frames, use the link layer address (the Ethernet uses the MAC address) to access the medium, and perform error detection.

Answer: D

590 UDP does not guarantee the reliability of data transmission_ It does not provide functions such as packet sorting and flow control. It is suitable for traffic with low transmission reliability requirements but high transmission speed and delay.
El A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

591. If the application layer protocol is Millet ; what is the value of the Protocol field in the IPA header?
❑ A. 17
❑ B. 67
E C. 53
❑ D. 6 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

592. The MAC address table of the existing switch is as follows. The switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and a destination MAC address of 5489-989d-I d30. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Multiple Choice)

111

0 A. If this data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch will discard this data frame (Right Answers)
0 B If the data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch forwards the data frame from the Eth0/0/3 port.
0 C If the data frame is meowed from Eth0/0/1, the switch floods the data frame.
❑ D If the data frame is received from the Eth0/0/3 pod, the switch forwards the data frame from the Eth0/01 port (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

593. SWA and SWB run the RSTP protocol. Which of the fo[lowing statements are correct? (Muth* Choice)

❑ A. The G01013 port of SWA is the designated port. (Right Answers )

❑ B. The GO/0/3 port of SWB is the alternate port. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The G0/0/3 port of SWB is the Backup part.
❑ D. The G01012 part of SWA is the designated part. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
594. On the VRP platform, what is the order of the default protocol priorities of direct route, static route, RIP, and OSPF from high to low?
❑ A. Direct route, OSPF, static route, RIP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct route, OSPF, RIP, static route
❑ C. Direct route, RIP, static route, OSPF
❑ D. Direct route, static route, RIP, OSPF

Answer: A

595. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which router is the DR in this network?

❑ A. Router A
❑ B. Router B (Right Answers )
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router ID

Answer: B

596. The OSPF router ID must be the same as the IP address of an interface on the router.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

597. What are the functions of OSPF hello packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Publish parameter information such as Router ED and Router Priority. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Synchronous router LSDB
❑ C. Neighbor discovery (Right Answers)
❑ D. Maintaining neighbor relationships (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
 598. By default, what is the OSPF protocol Deadtime on the broadcast network?
❑ A. 20s
❑ B. 40s (Right Answers)
❑ C. lOs
❑ D. 30s

Answer: B

599. When two OSPF routers form a TWO-WAY neighbor relationship, the LSDB has completed synchronization, but the SPF algorithm has not been run.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

600. Which of the following protocol does not belong to the File Transfer protocol?
❑ A. TFTP
❑ B. HTTP (Right Answers)
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. SFTP

Answer: B

601. Which of the following is correct about the VLANIF interface?

❑ A. The VLANIF interface does not need to learn the MAC address.
❑ B. Different VLANIF interfaces can use the same IP address.
❑ C. The VLANIF interface does not have a MAC address.
❑ D. The VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 interface. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

602. The rule for creating a VLAN on a Huawei switch is that VLAN4095 cannot be created and VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
603. As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 20
port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20

interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20

❑ A. Host A and Host B can ping each other. (Right Answers)

❑ B. Data frames on both links do not contain VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host B cannot ping
❑ D. The PVID of the port GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 is 20 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

604. Which of the following protocol does the PPP protocol consist of? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Certification Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. NCP (Right Answers)
❑ C. LCP (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPPOE

Answer: ABC

605. Which of the following value is used in the Protocol field in the PPP frame to indicate that the core is an IP packet?
❑ A. 0x8821
❑ B. 0x0021 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ox8021
❑ D. 0x8863

Answer: B
606 As shown in the following figure, ail the hosts can communicate with host C through which of the following configuration?
But host A and host B cannot communicate.

❑ A_ acl number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 4000
❑ B. eel number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-93ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound eel 4000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ C act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound eel 4000
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000

Answer: B

607. As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A_ act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000_12 0 00 0 255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound ad 2000 It
❑ B lad number 2000 rub 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 00 0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 4
❑ C. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.12 0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic -finer outbound eel 2000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ D. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthemet 0/0/2 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

608. As shown in the following figure, the administrator wants that all the hosts cannot access the Web service (port number is 80) and other services are accessed normally, what AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound in the
interface configuration of GO/0/1,

El

❑ A. act number 3001 rule 5 deny udp destination-port eq www rule 10 porn,'
❑ B act number 3003 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny udp destination-port eq www #
❑ G act number 3000 rule 5 deny top clestmation-port eq www rule 10 permit ip # (Right Answers)
❑ act number 3002 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny tcp destination-port eq www #

Answer, C

609. What is the decimal value of the OSPFv3 packet in the Protocol field in the IPv6 packet header?
❑ A. 69
❑ B. 89 (Right Answers)
❑ G. 92
❑ D. 59

Answer: B
 610. Which of the following ll3v6 address Solicited-node mudicast addresses are F02:1:FFAB:FECA? (Multiple Choice)
0 A. 2030::BBAB:FECA (Right Answers)
I=1 B. 2020::EEAB:FECA (Right Answers)
El C. 2020::FFAB:FECA (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2020::FFBA:FECA

Answer: ABC

611. Which of the following IPv6 addresses are link-wide multicast addresses? (Multiple Choice)
El A. FF02 . :2 (Right Answers)
CI B. FF02::1 (Right Answers)
El C. FF12::1 (Right Answers)
CI ID_ FF12::2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

612. What is the total length of the interface identifier of the link-local unicast address?
CI A. 48bit
I=1 B. 32bit
CI C. 64bit (Right Answers)
1:1 D. 96bit

Answer: C

613. The LER in the MPLS domain is called the Label Egress Router.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

614. If the value of the Type/Length field of an Ethernet data frame is 0x0800, the header length of the upper packet carried by the data frame ranges from 20 to 60B.
El A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False

Answer: A

615. On the VRP platform, which of the following methods can you access the previous history command? (Multiple Choice)
O A. Left cursor
O B. Ctrl+U
El C. Ctrl+P (Right Answers)
El D. Upper cursor (Right Answers)

Answer: CD
 616. What is the full name of VRP?
❑ A. Virtual Routing Platform
❑ B. Versatile Redundancy Platform
❑ C. Versatile Routing Protocol
❑ D. Versatile Routing Platform (Right Answers)

Answer: D

617 As shown. the figure, three Layer 2 switches ere interconnected wrgi one HUB, and the switch is enabled web SIP. For the budge ID setting of the switch SIP, refer to the following Figure_ Others ere default configurations. Which of the
foaming statement is wrong?

❑ A After the bridge 10 comparison, LSWI is the mat bridge

❑ 130/0/1 purl of LSW3. is an PP port and is blocked
Li C Both pods of LSW1 era designated ports and are in Ina forwarding state Might Answer)
11 D. poll of LSW1 is blacked_

Answer, C

618 As shown in the following figure, all switches run the SIP protocol_ After the topology is stable, modify the sending period of the configuration BPDU on which of following switch can affect the sending period of the SWD configuration
BPDU?

❑ A SWD
❑ B_ SWG
❑ a SWB
❑ D SWA (Right Answers)

Answer:

619. As shown in the network below, the MAC address of the switch is marked. Enter the command stp root secondary on the SWD switch. Which of the following switche will be the root bridge of this network?

❑ A SWD (Right Answers)

❑ B SWB
❑ C SWC
▪ SWA

Answer: A

62D. The company has users who report !hal when using SIss network to transfer files, the speed is very taw. The administrator uses Wireshark software to capture packets m the nelerork and hods some Ouphcale frames. Which of 11e honosiiing
descrkhion is correct ebonite reason or solution?
❑ A The switching equipment of he company network must be upgraded
❑ B. The network nos a loop on the second floor (flight Answers)
ci a No PLAN is configured In the network
❑ D. When the switch fennel find the destination MAC address of the data frame in the MAC address tribe, the swath wIt Rood the dais frame.

Answer, 0
 621. Dynamic routing protocols can automatically adapt to changes in network topology.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ 11 False

Answer: A

622. The output information of the router R1 routing table is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.2 is forwarded through Ethernet0/0/1 . (Right Answers)
❑ B. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.1.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/0 interface. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The packet with the destination address of 10.1.1.1 is forwarded through the GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface.
❑ D. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/2 interface. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

623. All interfaces of the router belong to the same broadcast domain.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

624. Which of the following is correct about the command configured for the default route?
❑ A. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.11 (Right Answers )
❑ B. [Huawei-Serial0] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
❑ C. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1
❑ D. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.00.0.0.0

Answer: A

625. What are the advantages of using DHCP to allocate IP addresses using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Can achieve IP address reuse (Right Answers)
❑ B. Avoid IP address conflicts (Right Answers)
❑ C. Heavy workload and poor management
❑ D. The configuration information changes (such as DNS), only the administrator needs to modify it on the DHCP server to facilitate unified management. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
626_ As shown in the following figure, Router A has passed the IP address 10 0_122 Telnet Router B In the current interface, which of the following operations will cause the Telnet session of the router to be interrupted with router, (Multiple
Choice)

❑ A Close GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)

❑ B Modify the IP address of GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Enable OSPF protocol on GO/0/1 interface
❑ D Configure static router

Answer: AB

627. When a port of a switch receives a non-carried VLAN TAG data frame, it must add a PVID.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

628_ Which of the following parameter cannot be used for advanced access control lists?
❑ A. Physical interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Time range
❑ C. Destination port number
❑ D. Agreement number

Answer: A

629 The AGL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the forwarded traffic is filtered. The forwarded traffic includes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

630. An AGL rule is as foIlows: Which of the following IP addresses can be matched by the permit rule? (Multiple Choice)
Rule 5 permit ip source 10.9.1.0 255.0.254.255
❑ A. 7_1.2.1
❑ B_ 6.1.3_1 (Right Answers)
❑ a 8.2.2_1
❑ D_ 9.9_1_1 (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
631. The router output information is as follows. Which IPv6 address is obtained by this interface?

❑ A. 2000..1/64
❑ B. 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3000::3000164
❑ D. 3000::1/64

Answer: B

632. The router's Router ID neighbor relationship is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot exchange the link status information. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This router is a DR Other router (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.0.2. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

633. Which area number does OSPFv3 use to identify the backbone area?
❑ A. 0 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 1
❑ D. 2

Answer: A
 634. A router OSPFv3 adjacency relationship is as follows. The router is an ABR.

❑ A. True (Right Answers )

❑ B. False

Answer: A

635. Which of the following type of addresses are not included in the IPv6 address?
• A. Anycast address
O B. Broadcast address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Multicast address
O D. Unicast address

Answer: B

636. If the network address of a network is 10.1.1.0/30, what is its broadcast address?
O A. 10.1.1.4
O B. 10.1.1.2
❑ C. 10. 1. 1.3 (Right Answers)
O D. 10.1.1.1

Answer: C

637. If the network address of a network is 192.168.1.0, then its broadcast address must be 192.168.1.255.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
638. Which of the following are correct about the analysis of ICMP packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets and are not encapsulated in the transport layer. (Right Answers )
❑ B. ICMP packets cannot be used to detect MTUs in a path.
❑ C. ICMP messages can record time, including original time, receiving time, and sending time. (Right Answers)
❑ D. ICMP protocol does not support redirection function
❑ E. ICMP packets contain ICMP error packets, control packets, request/response packets, and refresh packets.

Answer: AC

639. When the router is powered on, the configuration file is read from the default storage path for initialization of the router.
If there is no configuration file in the default storage path, what does the router use for initialization?
❑ A. Current configuration
O B. New configuration
O C. Default parameters (Right Answers)
O D. Initial configuration

Answer: C

640. In the STP protocol, which of the following factors will affect the election of the root switch? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch interface ID
O B. Switch interface bandwidth
❑ C. IP address of the switch
O D_ The current MAC address of the switch (Right Answers)
❑ E. Switch priority (Right Answers )

Answer: DE

641. As shown in the following figure, all switches run STP, when the topology is stable.
The SWA device is powered off. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

Cl

❑ A. SWB still periodically sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1.

❑ B. The SWC sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1 after the current Max Age time.
❑ C. SWC immediately sends TC-BPDUs from port GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWC and SWB immediately re-elected the root bridge (Right Answers)

Answer: CD
 642. As shown in the figure, all four switches run STP, and each parameter adopts the default value.
When a port on the root switch is blocked and cannot be sent through the port, how long will the port in the network enter the forwarding state?

❑ A. About 15 seconds
❑ B. About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ C. About 30 seconds
❑ D. About 3 seconds

Answer: B

643. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ B. Discarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Listening
❑ D. Learning (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

644. As shown in the figure below, all hosts can communicate normally. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. SWB's 301013 learned 2 MAC addresses (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWA's G01013 learned 3 MAC addresses
❑ C. SWA's G010/3 learned 1 lvlAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA's GO/0/3 learns 2 MAC addresses

Answer; AC

645 The Layer 2 switch belongs to the data link layer device and can identify the MAC address information in the data frame, forward the data according to the MAC address, and record the MAC address and the corresponding pod information
in its own internal MAC address table.
JA True (Right Answers)
rl B. False

Answer, A
646. Which of the following description is wrong about the Layer 2 Ethernet switch?
❑ A. Layer 2 Ethernet switch works at the data link layer
❑ Et. Ability to learn MAC address
❑ C_ Forward according to the Layer 2 header information of the Ethernet frame
❑ fr It is necessary to make certain modifications to the three-layer header of the forwarded message, and then forward it_ (Right Answers )

Answer: D

647_ if the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to enable loopback 0 communication between Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the following command should be entered in Router A?

❑ A_ ip route-static 10 0 22 32 GmabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ l Et_ ip route-static 10 0 22 0 GmabitEthernet 0/0/0
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255 255 255 255100 12 2 (Right Answers)
❑ a ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255100 12 1

Answer: C

648_ As shown in the figure, regarding OSPF topology and configuration, which of the folbwing statement is correct?

❑ A Compared RI with R2, R2 has a better chance of becoming a OR because its interface OR priority value is smaller
❑ B RI and R2 can establish stable neighbor relationships as long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type.
❑ C_ As long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type, and the hello time is adjusted to 10s, RI and R2 can establish a stable neighbor relationship (Right Answers)
❑ CI RI and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationships

Answer: C

E49 As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
ip mute-static 10 02 2 255 255.255 25510 0.12 2
ip route-static 10_0 22 255 255 255 255 10 0 21 2 preference 40

❑ A. if the port GO/0/1 is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/2.
❑ B_ if the GO/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 100 22 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/1_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ The interface that reaches 10 02 2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1
❑ D. The interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/012. (Right Answers )

Answer: BD

650 As shown in the broadcast network, OSPF mns on four routers and in the same area and on the same network segment. OSPF automatically elects a OR Multiple BORs to achieve better backup results.

❑ A True
❑ B_ False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
 651. When logging in to the router through Telnet, which authentication methods can choose? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. AAA local authentication (Right Answers)
❑ B. Not certified
❑ C. password authentication (Right Answers)
❑ MD5 ciphertext authentication

Answer: AC

652. The packet that the DHCP server responds to the client must be a unicast packet.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

653. Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise nehvorks. Which of the following descriptions are the advantages of link aggregation technology? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Improve reliability (Right Answers)
❑ B Improve safety
❑ C. Increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ D Implement load sharing (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

654 A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag, tut finds that the destination MAC address of the data frame is not queried in its MAC address table which is the processing behavior of the switch for the data frame ,
❑ A The switch will drop this data frame
❑ B The switch broadcasts this data frame to all Access ports.
❑ C The switch broadcasts this data frame to all ports (except the receiving part) in the VLAN that belongs to the data frame (Right Answers)
❑ El The switch broadcasts the data frame to all ports

Answer: C

655 In order to check whether the serial port SO/D/1 on the router is a DTE interface or a BCE interface, which of the following commands should he used?
❑ A. display interface 80/0/1 (Right Answers )
❑ B. display current-config
❑ C. display saved-config
❑ D display controller serial

Answer: A

656. Which of the following types of ACLs can match the transport layer port number?
❑ A. Intermediate ACL
❑ B. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ C. Layer 2 ACL
❑ D. Basic ACL

Answer: B

657. What is the total length of an 1Pv€ address?

❑ A. 32
❑ B. 64
❑ C. 128 (Right Answers)
I=1 D. 96

Answer: C
 658. Which protocol packet is required to bear for DHCPv6 packets?
O A. FTP
O B. TCP
O C. UDP (Right Answers)
O Di_ HTTP

Answer: C

659. Which statements are correct about IPv6 address configuration? (Multiple Choice)
O A. FRC addresses can only be manually configured.
O B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
I=1 C. fPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O D. [Pv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

660. The multicast address of the requested node corresponding to 2001 . •12:1 is FF02::1:FF12:1.
O A. True (Right Answers)
E B. False

Answer: A

661 The client has an error accessing the FTP server. Checking that there is no problem with the connectiviy between the server and the client is it possibly caused by which of the following server ports are blocked? (Multiple Choice)
El A 21 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20 (Right Answers)
❑ C 50049
❑ D 80

Answer: AB

662. Which fields are not included in the network layer header format?
D A. TTL
LI B. Source IPv4 Address
LI C. Sequence Number (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Destination IPv4 Address

Answer: C

663. Which of the following descriptions are correct if en AR2200 router needs to be restored to its initial configuration? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Re-specify the configuration file to be loaded next time
171 B. Reset the saved configuration (Right Answers)
171 C. Clear current configuration
171 D. Restart the AR2200 muter (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
 664. The administrator wants to completely delete the old device configuration file config.zip›, then which of the following command is correct?
❑ A. delete /unreserved config.zip (Right Answers)
❑ B. delete /force config.zip
❑ C. clear config.zip
❑ D. reset config.zip

Answer: A

665. In which of the folowing cases does the switch generate configuration BPDUs? (Multiple Choice) A. During the initialization process, as tong as the port is enabled with STP, the configuration BPDU wit be sent from the designated port
according to the interval specified by the Heto Time timer B. When the root port receives the configuration BPDU, the device where the root port resides sends configuration BPOUs from each of its designated ports. C. When a non-designated
port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it immediately sends its own BPDU to the downstream device. D. When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it will immediately send its own
BPDU to the downstream device. Answer ABD
❑ A.select this to commit (Right Answers)

Answer. A

666The port cost calculated by STP has a certain relationship with the port bandwidth, that is, the larger the bandwidth, the () the overhead.
❑ A. Consistent
❑ B. Not necessarily
❑ C. bigger
❑ D. smaller (Right Answers)

Answer: D

667. In the RSTP protocol, the PIA mechanism requires that the link between two switching devices be in point-to-point full-duplex mode.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

668. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. This router is DR (Right Answers)

❑ 13. Router Router ID is 10.0.1.1
❑ C. Router Router ID is 10.0.2.2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The interface address of this router is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACID

669. Which of the following commands can enable the DHCP relay function of the router interface?
❑ A. dhcp select server
❑ B. dhcp select global
❑ C. dhcp select interface
❑ dhcp select relay (Right Answers)

Answer: DI
 670 As shown in the following figure, Switch A and Router A are;connected through two link, The two links are in the manual load balancing mode_ The aggregation port number is 1, and the aggregation link needs to forward data. Carrying
VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. interface Eth-Trunkl port ImIk-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 eth-trunk 1 #
❑ El_ interface GmabilEtherneta/0/1 eth-trunk 1 4 interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. interface Eth-Trunkl mode lacp-static port link-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 4 interface GmabilEthernell)/0/1 eth-trunk 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 4
0 B. interface Eth-Trunkl undo portswitch # interface Eth-Trurnkl _100 doll q termination vrd 100 ip address 10 0 122 255 255 2550 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers)

Answer: B0

071 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the pods connected to the hosts on the two switches es access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure 60/0/1 of SWA and
61:11012 of SWB as trunk pods to allow ail VLANs to pass_ To achieve normal cornmunIcehon between the two hosts, what do you need led do,

VI
A. ConTguro G0011 On the SWC as the monk pad and Way AII 2 1a pass. GArO1porl is se,as the amass pal and PVID 2
0 13. Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure 60.10/1 arid G0,012 as trunk pods, and alp," VLAN 210 pass. Might Amax.)
0 C. Create VLAN2 on the SWC.
D Configure .30.31,1 on the SWC as the trunk port and aBow VLAN 2 to pass.

Answer , B

672 If the Authenticator sends the wrong username and password to the Authenticator during The PPP authentication process, what type of message will the Authenticator send to the Authenticator?
0 A Authenticate-Reject
0 B. Authenticate-Ack
0 G. Authenticate-Nak
0 D. Authenticate-Reply

673. An ACL is a packet filter. The ACL is applied to the service module. The ACL takes effect_
1=I A. True (Right Answers )
I=1 B. False

Answer: A

674. An ACL rule is as follows: Which of the following iP addresses can be matched by the permit rule? (Multiple Choice)
rub 5 permit ip source 10.0.1.0 0.0.254.255
❑ A. 10.0.4.5
El B. 10_0.3.4 (Right Answers)
0 C_ 10_0_1 2 (Right Answers)
El D. 10.0.2.3

Answer: BC

675. When an iPv6 interface receives a packet whose Hop Limit class has a value of 1, the packet is not forwarded.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 676_ By default ; how many seconds is the ❑SPFv3 adjacency Deadtime on a P2P link?
❑ A. 40 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 10
❑ C. 20
❑ D. 30

Answer: A

677 An explicit path can be easily defined by SR (Segment Routing), and nodes in the network only need to maintain Seament Routing information. It can respond to the real-time rapid development of business.
What are the following characteristics of Segment Routing? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Support both the centralized control mode of the controller and the distributed control mode of the repeater. Provides a balance between centralized control and distributed control (Right Answers)
❑ B SR (Segment Routing) uses IP forwarding without additional maintenance of another label forwarding table.
❑ C A better smooth evolution of existing networks by extending existing protocols such as IGP (Right Answers)
❑ D Using source routing technology to provide rapid interaction between the network and upper-layer applications (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

678. Which of the following statement about MPLS Label tags is wrong?
❑ A. The tag is encapsulated between the network layer and the data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. The label is used to uniquely identify the forwarding equivalence class FEC burned by a packet.
❑ C. The label is carried by the header of the packet and does not contain topology information.
❑ D_ The tag is a short identifier with a fixed length and only local significance.

Answer: A

679. Which statement is correct about the VRP operating platform shortcuts? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. CTRL+Z returns to the user view (Right Answers)
❑ B. CTRL+C stops the running of the current command (Right Answers)
❑ C. Move the left cursor key (<--) to the left by one. (Right Answers)
❑ D. TAB prompts for the most recently entered command

Answer: ABC

680.<Huawei>system-view
[Huaweiluser-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-consoleOlauthentication-mode password
[huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-consoleO]guit
Which statement is wrong about the above configuration command?
❑ A. The user who logs in to the device through the console has the highest user prMlege level.
❑ B. The administrator wants to log in and manage the device through the console port.
❑ C. After the configuration is completed, the administrator cannot implement device management through remote login.
❑ ❑ The password of the user who logs in to the device through the console is cipher huawei2012 (Right Answers)

Answer:
 681. In the switch, which of the following is the technology of port and MAC binding?
❑ A. SEP
❑ B. NAT
❑ C. ACL
❑ D. Port Security (Right Answers)

Answer: D

682. Which of the following information does the switch MAC address table not include?
❑ A. MAC address
❑ B. Port number
❑ C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. VLAN

Answer: C

683. What port states might exist on a switch with standard STP protocol enabled? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Listening (Right Answers)
❑ C. Disabled (Right Answers)
❑ D. Forwarding (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

684. Which of the following routing protocols has the highest priority?
❑ A. Direct (Right Answers)
❑ B. RIP
❑ C. OSPF
❑ D. Static

Answer: A
685. Referring to the output result shown in the figure, it can be judged that the routing table of the router is composed of a direct route and a static route.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)

❑ B. False

Answer: A

686. Which of the following description is correct about the display information?

❑ A. GigabitEthemet 0/010 interface was manually closed by the administrator. (Right Answers)
❑ B. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is not configured with an lP address.
❑ C. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface does not enable dynamic routing protocol
❑ D. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is connected with a wrong cable.

Answer: A

687. The output information of a link aggregation port of a switch is as follows. If you want to delete Eth-Trunk 1, which of the following command is correct?

❑ A. undo interface Eth-Trun< 1

❑ B. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. inte GigabitEthernet 0/01 undo eth-trunk quit inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk!
❑ D. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0;2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1

Answer: B
 688. If an Ethernet data frame Length/Tyme=0z8100, which may be the payload of this data frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. TCP data segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. UDP data (Right Answers)
❑ C. ICMP packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. ARP packet (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

689. As shown in the figure, a static NAT command is deployed on the router R1. When the PC accesses the Internet, the destination address in the packet will not change.

0 A. True (Right Answers)

0 B. False

Answer: A

690. What level of encapsulation format is defined by the PPP protocol in the OBI reference model?
❑ A. Network layer
❑ B. Data link layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Presentation layer
❑ D. Application layer

Answer: B

691. Which of the following authentication methods does not require to input a username and password?
❑ A. authorization-mode hwtacacs
❑ B. authentication-mode local
❑ C. authentication-mode hwtacacs
❑ D. authentication-mode none (Right Answers)

Answer: D

692. When forwarding a IPv6 packet, the router needs to find the routing table based on the source FP address of the [P6 packet.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

693. Which order is the 081 reference model from the upper layer to the lower layer?
❑ A. Application layer, session layer, presentation layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ B. Application layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ C. Application layer ; presentation layer, session layer ; transport layer ; network layer, data link layer, physical layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Application layer, presentation layer, session layer, network layer, transport layer, data link layer, physical layer

Answer: C
694. Network administrators use Ping to test network connectivity. Which of the following protocols might he used in the process? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A ARP (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCP
❑ C ICMP (Right Answers)
❑ D. UDP

Answer: AC

695. As shown in the figure, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-999 is a specific host MAC address learned by the switch through ARP, and the host has changed the IP address three times.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

696.<Huawei>system-view [Huaweilcommand-privilege level 3 view user save

Which statement is correct about the above configuration command?
❑ A. Modify the user view command to a permission level of 3. and save the configuration.
❑ B_ Modify the users permission level to 3, and save the configuration.
❑ C. Modify the permission level of the save command in the user view to 3. (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Modify the permission level of the save command used by a user to 3

Answer: C

697. Which of the following OSPF protocol packets can ensure the reliability of the LSA update?
❑ A. [SACK (Right Answers)
ID B. LSR
❑ C. DD
❑ D. LSU

Answer: A

698 Which of the following protocols does not belong to the file transfer protocol?
❑ A. SFTP
❑ B TFTP
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. HTTP (Right Answers)

Answer: 0
699. Apply the following ACL to Telnet:
Aci number 2000
Rure 5 permit source 172.16.105.20

Only devices with an IP address of 172.16.105.2 are allowed to log in remotely.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

700.[RTA] ac12002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0 255.0.0
Using the ACL matching route entry shown above on the router RTA, which of the following entries will be matched? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 192.17.0.0/24
❑ B. 172.16.1.1/32 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 172.16.1.0/24
❑ D. 172.48.0.0/16 (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

701. Which type of ACL does the following command belong to?
rule permit 8021p 7
❑ A. Layer 2 ACL (Right Answers)
D B. Basic ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL
❑ D. Intermediate ACL

Answer; A

702. How many bits does the total length of an IPv6 address increase over IPv4?
❑ A. 32
❑ B. 96 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 64
❑ D. 128

Answer: B

703. What kind of IPv6 address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE6F:4F36?

❑ A. Multicast address
❑ B. Anycast address
❑ C. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global unicast address

Answer; C
 704. If the 1171v6 host wants to send packets up to 10 routers, which parameter should be modified in the Pve header?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Version
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers )
❑ D. Traffic Class

Answer: C

705_ There are two routers RTA and RTB between the source device and the destination device. Use the Traced command to detect the path. When the first hop RTA is detected, the source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to a larger
port of the destination device. When the packet reaches the RTB, the TTL becomes 0, and the RTA responds to the source device. ICMP message.
A Echo Request
B. Port Unreachable
o C. Time Exceeded (Right Answers)
LI D. Echo Reply

Answer: C

706. This is the three packets that the administrator has captured on the network. Which of the following statements is incorrect?

❑ A. These three packets represent the three-way handshake process of TCP.

❑ B. Application layer data is not included in all three packets
D C. The IP address of the Telnet server is 10.0.12.1; and the IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The Telnet client uses the 50190 port to establish a connection with the server.

Answer: C

707. The administrator needs to configure the IP address on the G0f0/0 interface of the router. Which of the following address is correct to use?
❑ A. 145.4.2.55/26 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 237.6.1.2124
❑ C. 127.3.1.4128
❑ D. 192.168.10.112130

Answer: A

708. The subnet mask of a network segment 150.25.0.0 is 255.255.224.0, then which is the valid host address in the network segment? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 150.25.2.24 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 150.15.3.30
❑ C. 150.25.0.0
❑ D. 150.25.1.255 (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

709. How many port states does the RICMP protocol have?
O A. 2
O B. 4
❑ C. 3 (Right Answers)
O D. 1

Answer: C

710. A router running OSPF can reach the FULL state after completing the LSDB synchronization.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 711. Which of the following is not included in the routing table?
❑ A. MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B. Destination/Mask
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. NextHop

Answer: A

/12. Which descriptions are correct about DD packets and LSA in OSPF? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The head of the LSA can uniquely identify an LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DO packet contains only the header information of the LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ C. DO packet contains LSA details
❑ D. LSA head is only a small part of the LSA (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

713. As shown in the figure, the network administrator wants to manually aggregate the two physical links between SWA and SWB into one Eth-trunk link; which of the following description is correct?

❑ A. Cannot be aggregated (Right Answers)

❑ B It works normally after aggregation
❑ C. It can be aggregated. Only GE ports can send and receive data after aggregation
❑ 0. It can be aggregated_ Only Ethernet ports can send and receive data after aggregation_

Answer: A

114. Which descriptions are correct about the Ethernet subinterface? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The subinterface cannot be configured with an IP address.
❑ B. A subinterface can be bound to multiple VLANs (Right Answers)
❑ C. The [P address of the sub-interface cannot belong to the same network segment. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface ID should be the same as the VLAN 10

Answer: BC

115. Ethernet frames are processed and forwarded in the form of ULAN TAGs inside the switch .
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 716_ As shown in the following figure, from the security point of new, Router A refuses to receive OSPF packets, GE packets, IGMP packets from G0/0/1 Which of the following command can funl this requirement?

❑ A act number 3000 mle 5 deny are rule 10 deny 89 rulc15 deny icmp # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound act 3000 #
❑ B acl number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound act 2000 # (Right Answers)
❑ G acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #
❑ B. acl number 3000 rule 5 deny are rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #

Answer: B

117. What is the length of the Traffic Class field in the [Pv€ packet header?
O A. 4
❑ B. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2
❑ D.6

Answer: B

718. How many ways to generate a DHCP device unique identifier DUID?
❑ A. 3
❑ B. 2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 4
❑ D_ 1

Answer: B

719 Which of the following descriptions are correct about IPv6? Choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address length is 128 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. !RC address length is 64 bits
❑ C. When an IPA packet has multiple extension headers the extension header must appear in an orderly manner (Right Answers)
❑ a When an IPv6 packet has multiple extension headers, the extension header can appear randomly

Answer: AC-

720 The packet capture tool captures an Ethernet frame and finds that the value of the Type/Length field of the frame is 0x0800 Which of the following descriptions are correct about the frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The frame carves an IPX message.
❑ B The frame carries an IP packet (Right Answers)
❑ G The frame structure of the frame is the Ethernet_11 format (Right Answers)
❑ B. The frame structure of the frame is 802 3 format

Answer: BC

721 The MAC address table of a switch is as follows lithe switch receives a data frame with the destination AC of 5489-985-I8a 8 from the EthO/0/2 port, which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A Forward this data frame front the Eth0/0/2 port

❑ B Forward this data frame from the Eth0/0/1 pert_
❑ C Discard this data frame (Right Answers)
❑ D Flood this data frame out

Answer: C
 722. The administrator plans to implement a route backup by configuring a static floating route. Which is the correct implementation method?
❑ A. The administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for the primary static route and the alternate static route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrator needs to configure different metrics for the primary static route and the standby static route.
❑ C. The administrator needs to configure different TAGs for the primary static route and the standby static route.
❑ D. The administrator only needs to configure two static routes.

Answer: A

723. Regarding the main function of the router; which of the following statements are wrong? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Establish routing tables through multiple protocols
❑ B. Guide data forwarding according to the routing table
❑ C. Forward according to the source IP address of the received packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. Realize communication between devices on the same network segment (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

724. The administrator finds that the file cannot be transferred to the Huawei AR200 router through TFTP. What is the possible cause?
0 A. TCP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled
❑ B. The username on the TFTP server does not exist.
O C. The username and password on the TFTP server have been modified.
O D. UDP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled (Right Answers)

Answer: D

725. As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. Host B and host C can ping each other (Right Answers)

❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot ping (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host C can ping each other (Right Answers)
❑ D. All hosts can ping each other

Answer: ABC
726. Which of the following descriptions are correct about the PPP? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A PPP supports bundling multiple physical links into logical links to increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext authentication (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP is not scalable and cannot be deployed on an Ethernet link.
❑ 0. For the physical layer, PPP supports asynchronous links and synchronous links. (Right Answers)
❑ E. PPP supports multiple network layer protocols such as 'PCP and IPXCP. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABDE

727. The PPPoE client sends a PADI message to the server, and the server replies with a PADO message. What frame is the PADO packet?
❑ A. Multicast
❑ B. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ C. Unicast
❑ D. Anycast

Answer: B

728. The following rules exist in an ACL of the router: rule deny tcp source 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 destination 172.16.10.1 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21
Which of the following statement is correct?
o A. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.1, and all TCP packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule. (Right Answers)
o B. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.2, and all TCP packets with the destination port number of 21 match this rule.
o C. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.3, and all TCP packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule.
o D. The type of ACL is basic ACL.

Answer: A

729. Which of the following IPv6 extension headers can appear twice?
❑ A. Destination option extension header (Right Answers)
❑ B. Fragment extension header
❑ C. Upper layer protocol data message
❑ D. hop-by-hop option extension header

Answer: A

730. When the host uses the stateless address autoconfiguration scheme to obtain an IPv6 address, the DNS server address information cannot be obtained.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer. A

731 Which of the following packets is sent by the DHCPv6 client before sending a request packet to the DHCPv6 server?
P A RA
❑ 6 RS (Right Answers)
❑ C. NA
❑ 0. NS

Answer: B
 732. Which type does the IPv6 address FE80::2E0TCFF:FE6F:4F36 belong to?
❑ A. Multicast address
❑ B. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Global unicast address
❑ D. Anycast address

Answer: B

733. In the DHCPv6 stateless automatic allocation scheme, the host does not need to send any DHCPv6 packets.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer, B

734. The last option field of IPv4 is variable length optional information. What is the maximum Length of this field?
❑ A. 40B (Right Answers)
❑ B. 20B
❑ C. 60B
O D. 10B

Answer: A

735. Regarding the role of ARP protocol and packet encapsulation, which description is correct?
❑ A. The MAC address of the destination and the address of the UUID can be obtained through the ARP protocol.
❑ B. ARP protocol supports deployment on PPP links and HDLC links.
❑ C. ARP protocol is based on Ethernet encapsulation (Right Answers)
❑ D. Inverse ARP in ARP is used to resolve device names

Answer: C

736. The STP root switch is elected based on the priority of the switch. In RSTP, the switch priority and MAC address are compared at the same time.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

737. Which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A. The switch works at the network layer.
❑ B. The router works at the physical layer.
❑ C. The switch works at the physical layer
❑ D. The router works at the network layer. (Right Answers)

Answer:
738. A router learns routes to the same destination address through RIP, OSPF, and static routes. By default, VRP will ultimately choose which protocol to learn the route through?
❑ A. The routes learned by the three protocols are selected.
❑ B. Static routing
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. RIP

Answer: C

739. If the network administrator does not configure a backbone area, the router automatically creates a backbone area.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

740. What modes does device link aggregation support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Mixed mode (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Manual load sharing mode (Right Answers )
❑ C. Manual master mode
❑ D. LACP mode

Answer: AB
741. The output information of a sub-interface of a router aggregation port 1 is as follows. According to this information, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The sub-interface of the aggregation port carries the VLAN TAG 100 when forwarding the data frame.
❑ B. The IP address of the subinterface of the aggregation port is 10.0.12.2/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C. There are two links in the aggregation port. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface number of the aggregation port is 100. (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

742. As shown in the figure, the RTA uses NAT technology and implements a many-to-many non-NAPT address translation by defining an address pool, so that hosts on the private network can access the public network. Assume that Mere are
only two public IP addresses in the address pool, and the addresses have been assigned to hosts A and B. If host C also wants to access the public network, which of the following description is correct?

- I A RTA assigns the last public network address to host C. and host B is kicked off the line.
0 B. Al hosts can use the public network address in turn to access the public nehvork.
0 C Host C cannot be assigned to the public network address and cannot access the public network. (Right Answers )
0 D. RTA assigns the first public network address to host C, and host A is kicked off the line.

Answer. C
743. The OSPFv3 interface information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The network type of this interface is P2P. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The Router-ID of this interface is 10.0.0.6. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The interface does not establish an adjacency relationship.
❑ D. The interface area number is 1 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

744. Which type of network does OSPFv3 need to elect DR?

❑ A. P2P network
❑ B. P2MP network
❑ C. CLNP Network
❑ D. Broadcast network (Right Answers)

Answer: D

745. Compared to IPv4 ; there is no IHL field in the IPv6 header.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

746. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. OSPFv3 process number is 1. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The DR priority of this router is 1. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This router is BDR
❑ D. The router-ID of the neighboring router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
747 A company applying for a Class C IP address segment needs to be evenly distributed to 8 subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary h. 14 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. What should the subnet mask
be set to,
❑ A 255 255 255 240
❑ B 255 255 255.192
❑ C 255 255 255 0
❑ D 255 255 255 128 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

748. Which of the following commands can be used to check the session status of a PPPoE client?
❑ A. display ip interface brief
❑ B. display pppoe-client session packet (Right Answers)
❑ C. display pppoe-client session summary
❑ ❑. display current-configuration

Answer: B

749. Which of the following configurations belong to Layer 2 ACL?

❑ A. rule 10 permit 12-protacol arp (Right Answers)
❑ B. rule 25 permit source 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0
❑ C. rule 20 permit source-mac 0203-0405-0607
❑ ❑. rule 15 permit vlan-id 100

Answer: A

750. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header of the message and the network layer header.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 Huawei

H12-211

HCIA-Routing &
Switching V2.5 Exam
Version: 12.0

[ Total Questions: 317]

Web: www.marks4sure.com

Email: [email protected]
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Feedback
We have developed quality product and state-of-art service to ensure our customers interest. If you have any
suggestions, please feel free to contact us at [email protected]

Support
If you have any questions about our product, please provide the following items:

exam code
screenshot of the question
login id/email

please contact us at [email protected] and our technical experts will provide support within 24 hours.

Copyright
The product of each order has its own encryption code, so you should use it independently. Any unauthorized
changes will inflict legal punishment. We reserve the right of final explanation for this statement.
Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:1

On an STP-Enabled Switch, a port in learning state can transition to the forwarding state only after the forward
delay

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:2

Which area ID is used by OSPFv3 to identify the backbone area

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

Answer: A

Question #:3

Which of the Following statement about the "ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20"
command are true?

A. This route can guide forwarding of the data packet with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2

B. This route can guide forwarding of the data packet with the destination IP address 10.0.12.2

C. The next-hop IP address of the route is 10.0.12.2

D. The preference of the route is 20

Answer: A C D

Question #:4

After a blackhole MAC address is configured on a device, the device discard packet whose source or
destination MAC address is the blackhole MAC address

A. TRUE

B.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 1 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:5

Which of the following routing protocols are dynamic routing protocols ?

A. Static Routing

B. Direct Routing

C. OSPF

D. BGP

Answer: C D

Question #:6

The DHCPv6 server also provide configuration information such as the DNS server address for hosts?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:7

The last option field (option) of an IPv4 packet is a length-variable and optional field. What is the maximum
length of this field?

A. 40B

B. 60B

C. 20B

D. 10B

Answer: A

Question #:8

In RSTP, an edge port becomes a common STP port after receiving a Configuration BPDU.

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 2 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:9

Which of the following statements are true about ICMP massages

A. ICMP message can record time, including the Original time, packet receiving time, and packet sending
time

B. ICMP message are encapsulated in IP packet but not at the transport layer

C. ICMP message include error message, control message, request/response messages, and update
messages.

D. ICMP does not support redirection

Answer: A B C

Question #:10

Which of the following addresses cannot be used as the IPv4 address of a host

A. Class A address

B. Class B address

C. Class C address

D. Class D address

Answer: D

Question #:11

Apply the Following ACL to telnet?

Acl number 2000

rule 5 permit source 172.16.105.2 0

Only the device whose IP address is 172.16.105.2 is allowed for remote login?

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 3 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:12

The MAC address table of a switch is as follows. The switch receives a data frame whose Source Mac address
is 5489-989d-1d30 and destination MAC address is 5489-9811-0b49. Which of the following statement is
true?

[Huawei]display mac-address MAC address table of slot 0:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

MAC Address VLAN/PEVLAN CEVLAN PortTypeLSP/LSR-ID VSI/SIMAC-Tunnel

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5489-9885-18a8 1---blackhole - 5489-9811-0b49 1--Eth0/0/3static - 5489-989d-1d30 1--Eth0/0/1dynamic 0/-

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total matching items on slot 0 displayed = 1

A. if the data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch forwards the data frame through Eth0/0/3.

B. if the data frame is received from Eth0/0/3, the switch discards the data frame.

C. if the data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch floods the data frame.

D. if the data frame is received from Eth0/0/3, the switch disables Eth0/0/3.

Answer: A

Question #:13

Which of the following routing protocol prefrence can be modified?

A. Direct routing

B. OSPF

C. RIP

D. Static routing

Answer: B C D

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 4 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:14

Which of the following statements are true according to the following configuration of a router?

Huawei]display ospfv3 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 GigabitEthernet0/0/0 is up, line protocol is up

Interface ID 0x3 Interface MTU 1500 IPv6 Prefixes

FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE59:3498 (Link-Local Address)

2004::1/64

OSPFv3 Process (1), Area 0.0.0.0, Instance ID 0

Router ID 10.0.4.4, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State Backup, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 10.0.2.2

Interface Address FE80::2E0:FCFF:FEBB:6CF9 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.0.1.1 Interface Address
FE80::2E0:FCFF:FEC6:4A10

Timer interval configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:05

Neighbor Count is 3, Adjacent neighbor count is 2 Interface Event 2, Lsa Count 4, Lsa Checksum 0xf258

Interface Physical BandwidthHigh 0, BandwidthLow 1000000000

A. The interface has three neighbor relationships

B. The interface has three adjacencies

C. The Router ID of the local router is 10.0.4.4

D. The Router ID of the DR is 10.0.2.2

Answer: A C D

Question #:15

You can run the "startup saved confugiration backup.cfg" command on the user interface of the versatile
routing platform (VRP) to specify the "backup.cfg"file as the configuration file for next startup

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 5 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:16

For the Versatile Routing Platform the login timeout period can be set only on a VTY interface

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:17

A router can assign a specific IPv6 address to a host through stateless address autoconfiguration?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:18

A window Host is started for the first time. If the Host obtains the IP address using DHCP, what is the source
IP address of the first data packet sent by the host?

A. 0.0.0.0

B. 127.0.0.1

C. 169.254.2.33

D. 255.255.255.255

Answer: A

Question #:19

IPsec VPN can only encrypt and trAns mit unicast data, and GRE can encapsulate multicast data

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:20

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 6 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

SNMP packets are transmitted by UDP

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:21

A router cannot function as both a DHCPv6 server and a DHCP server.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:22

Which of the following statements are true about the dynamic MAC address table?

A. After a device is reset , an interfaces card is hot swapped , or an interface card is reset , the saved entries
on the device or interface card are not lost.

B. Dynamic MAC address entries are obtained by learning the source MAC addresses of packets received
by an interface, and can be aged out.

C. After a device is rest , an interface card is hot swapped or an interface card is reset dynamic MAC
address entries on the device or interface card are lost.

D. You can obtain the number of users communicating on an interface by checking the number of specified
dynamic address MAC address entries.

Answer: B C D

Question #:23

which of the following fields is not included in the format of the network - layer packet header ?

A. Source IPv4 Address

B. Destination Ipv Address

C. TTL

D. Sequence number

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 7 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: D

Question #:24

DHCP request packets must be sent in broadcast mode.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:25

In the VRP system you cannot delete files by running the delete or unreserved vrpcfg.zip command. You must
clear files in the recycle bin?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:26

If a 10GE optical module is used to connect two Huawei S5710 switches , by default the interconnected
interfaces work in full -duplex mode.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:27

Apply the Following ACL to SNMP. Which of the following statements is/are false?

Acl number 2000

rule 5 permit source 192.168.1.2 0

rule 10 permit source 192.168.1.3 0

rule 15 permit source 192.168.1.4 0

A. The Device whose IP address is 192.168.1.2 can use the SNMP service

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 8 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. The Device whose IP address is 192.168.1.3 can use the SNMP service

C. The Device whose IP address is 192.168.1.4 can use the SNMP service

D. The Device whose IP address is 192.168.1.5 can use the SNMP service

Answer: D

Question #:28

Which of the following description regarding the STP forwarding state is incorrect?

A. A port in a forwarding state can receive BPDU

B. A port in a forwarding state does not learn the source MAC address of a frame

C. A port in a forwarding state can forward frames

D. A port in a forwarding state can send BPDU

Answer: B

Question #:29

How many TCP connections will be established when FTP is used to transfer files?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Answer: B

Question #:30

Which of the Following are the features of the default VLAN setting in a switch Configuration?

A. The default VLAN cannot be deleted manually

B. By default, all ports on a switches are member of a default VLAN

C. A default VLAN must be created before a port is allocated to a VLAN

D. The IP address configured for a switch is applied only to a member port in the default VLAN

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 9 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: A B

Question #:31

Segment routing (SR) define destination address prefixes/nodes and adjacencies on the network as segments
and allocates segment IDs (SIDs) to these segments . Adjacency and prefix/node SIDs are non- sequentially
arranged in a segment list to form a forwar

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:32

On the command Line interface of Huawei AR routers , the role of the save command is to save the current
system time.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:33

Which of the following packet is sent by a DHCPv6 client before it send a request packet to the DHCPv6
server

A. RS

B. RA

C. NS

D. NA

Answer: A

Question #:34

As shown in the figure, which of the following network devices can be used to implement communication
between host A and Host B?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 10 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. Hub

B. layer 2 Switch

C. Router

D. Hub

Answer: A

Question #:35

An ACL rule is as follows. Which of the following IP address can be matched by the permit rule? rule 5
permit ip source 10.1.1.0 255.0.254.255?

A. 9.1.1.1

B. 8.2.2.1

C. 7.1.2.1

D. 6.1.3.1

Answer: A D

Question #:36

For STP, the massage Age in the configuration BPDUs sent by the root bridge is 0?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:37

::1/128 is an IPv6 loopback address

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 11 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:38

Which of the following SNMP packets is/are sent by the agent on the managed device to the NMS?

A. Get-Request

B. Get-Next-Request

C. Set-Request

D. Response

Answer: D

Question #:39

SR encapsulates the segment list identifying a forwarding path into a data packet header for transmission After
receiving the data packet, the receiver end parses the segment list. If the top SID of the segment list belongs to
the local node, the top SID is popped out, and then further processing is perfermed, if the top SID of the
segment list does not belong to the local node, the data packet is forwarded to the next node in equal cost
multiple path(ECMP) mode?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:40

One of the reasons that segments routing (SR) is introduced is that traditional LDP has some restrictions.
Which of the following statements about LDP restrictions are true?

A. LDP does not support automatic label allocation.

B. LDP supports path computation only based on IGP SPF(minimum cost ), not based on traffic
engineering.

C. LDP path computation depends on an IGP. If the IGP and LDP are not synchronized , black holes are
generated , affecting services.

D.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 12 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. LDP has 11 types of protocal packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and device
CPU usage.

Answer: B C D

Question #:41

In terms of security, tunnel mode is more secure than the transport mode.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:42

<Huawei>display startup MainBoard:

Startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007C00SPC600.cc Next startup system software:

flash:/AR2220E-V200R007C00SPC600.cc

Backup system software for next startup: null

Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.zip Next startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.zip

Startup license file: null

Next startup license file: null

Startup patch package: null Next startup patch package: null Startup voice-files: null

Next startup voice-files: null

The preceding information is the 'Display startup" command output on the AR2220 router. Which of the
following statement is false about Such information?

A. The running Configuration file is not Saved.

B. The System file used for this startup is AR2220E-V200R007C00SPC600.cc

C. The System file for next startup cannot be modified.

D. You can run the 'startup system software' command to modify the system file for next startup

Answer: A

Question #:43

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 13 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which of the following address types are of IPv6 addresses?

A. Unicast address

B. Anycast address

C. Multicast address

D. Broadcast address

Answer: A B C

Question #:44

If the MAC address of an interface is EEE0-AABB-CD7B, the corresponding EUI-64 address is ()

A. ECE0-AAFF-FEBB-CD7B

B. CCE0-AAFF-FEBB-CD7B

C. EEE0-AAFF-FEBB-CD7B

D. CCE0-AABB-FFFE-CD7B

Answer: A

Question #:45

<Huawei>display ospfv3 peer OSPFv3 Process (1)

OSPFv3 Area (0.0.0.0)

Neighbor IDPri StateDead Time InterfaceInstance ID

10.0.1.11 Full/Backup00:00:33 GE0/0/00

10.0.2.21 Full/DR00:00:33 GE0/0/00

OSPFv3 Area (0.0.0.1)

Neighbor IDPri StateDead Time InterfaceInstance ID

10.0.5.51 Full/Backup00:00:33 S1/0/00F

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 14 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:46

A segment routing global block (SRGB) is a set of local labels reserved for global segments, In MPLS and
IPv6 an SRGB is a set of local labels reserved for global labels?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:47

The IP addresses of VLANIF interfaces on the same switch must be different.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:48

If a route destined for the same network has multiple next hops, what is the route?

A. Equal-cost route

B. Sub-optimal route

C. Multi-Path route

D. Default route

Answer: A

Question #:49

Which of the following network parameters can be allocated using DHCP?

A. IP address

B. Gateway address

C. Address of the DNS server

D. Operating system

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 15 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: A B C

Question #:50

Which of the following IP addresses can be used by another host to communicate with the host whose ip
address is 200.200.200.201/30 without the need to forward traffic through a router?

A. 200.200.200.1

B. 200.200.200.200

C. 200.200.200.202

D. 200.200.200.203

Answer: C

Question #:51

In IPv6, the flow label field, source address field, and destination address field specify a forwarding path for a
specific data flow?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:52

What is the default priority of static routes on a Huawei AR router?

A. 0

B. 60

C. 100

D. 120

Answer: B

Question #:53

In RSTP, a backup port can replace a faulty root port

A. TRUE

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 16 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:54

Which of the following IPv6 extension headers can occur twice?

A. Hop-by-Hop Option header

B. Fragment extension header

C. Destination Option header

D. Upper-layer header

Answer: C

Question #:55

Only CHAP authentication can be used for PPPoE sessions?

A. True

B. False

Answer: B

Question #:56

During PPP link setup, which of the following phase can be directly converted from the Dead phase

A. Authenticate

B. Establish

C. Network

Answer: B

Question #:57

Which of the following modes can be used to generate a DUID for a DHCPv6 device ?

A. Link -Layer address (LL)

B.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 17 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. Link -Layer address plus time (LLT)

C. Link -Layer address plus host name ( LLN)

D. Link -Layer address plus operating system ( LLOS)

Answer: A B

Question #:58

The root protection function provided by RSTP can take effect only on designated ports

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:59

When the host accesses web service of the server , the value of the 'protocol' field at the network layer is 6.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:60

An interface on a router cannot function as both a DHCPv6 server and a DHCPv6 client

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:61

Which of the following statements are true about STP BPDUs

A. STP has two types of packets: configuration BPDU and TCN BPDU

B. After STP is enable on a port, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs through the designated port

C. BPDUs are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 18 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211
C.
address

D. During initialization, each switch enabled with STP proactively sends configuration BPDUs.

Answer: A B D

Question #:62

Which of the following port states are included in Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)?

A. Forwarding

B. Learning

C. Discarding

D. Listening

Answer: A B C

Question #:63

Which of the following statements are true about PPP?

A. PPP support both synchronous and asynchronous links at the physical layer

B. The scalability of PPP is low, so PPP cannot be deployed on Ethernet links

C. PPP supports various network layer protocols, such as IPCP and IPXCP

D. In PPP, multiple physical links can be bound to one logical link to increase bandwidth

Answer: A C

Question #:64

Which of the following statement is true about root bridge election of STP?

A. If the bridge priorities of device are the same, the device with the largest MAC address becomes the root
bridge

B. The device with the largest bridge priority becomes the root bridge

C. The device with the smallest bridge priority becomes the root bridge

D. If the bridge priority are the same, the device with the largest number of ports becomes the root bridge

Answer: C

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 19 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:65

To provide the information about the IP addesses that a user packet traverses along the path to the destination,
which of the following does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet

A. Destination port

B. Source port

C. Destination IP address

D. Source IP address

Answer: D

Question #:66

In the case of Huawei router, the Tracert commands uses UDP to encapsulate probe packates

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:67

What is the total length of the port ID in STP

A. 2 bits

B. 4 bits

C. 8 bits

D. 16 bits

Answer: D

Question #:68

In a broadcast address, all host bits are set to 1 and a broadcast address can be used as a host address

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 20 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: B

Question #:69

Which of the following is the full name of VRP?

A. Versatile Routing Platform

B. Virtual Routing Platform

C. Versatile Routing Protocol

D. Versatile Redundancy Platform

Answer: A

Question #:70

According to the following configuration of Router C, how many Global unicast address prefixes are
advertised by Router C?

Huawei]display ospfv3 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 GigabitEthernet0/0/0 is up, line protocol is up Interface
ID 0x3

Interface MTU 1500 IPv6 Prefixes

FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE59:3498 (Link-Local Address) 2003::1/64

2005::1/64

2009::1/64

OSPFv3 Process (1), Area 0.0.0.0, Instance ID 0

Router ID 10.0.4.4, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State Backup, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 10.0.2.2

Interface Address FE80::2E0:FCFF:FEBB:6CF9

Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.0.1.1 Interface Address FE80::2E0:FCFF:FEC6:4A10

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 21 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: C

Question #:71

If a device running STP receives an RSTP configuration BPDU, it discards the BPDU

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:72

On the network shown in figure, the host has ARP cache. Which of the following statement are true?

A. A static route needs to configured on the router. Otherwise , Host A and Host B cannot communicate
with each other

B. Host A and B can communicate with each other

C. The following ARP cauche entry exist on HOST A

11.0.12.1 MAC-B

D. The following ARP cauche entry exist on HOST A

10.0.12.2 MAC-C

Answer: B D

Question #:73

which of the following options is not a segment routing (SR) label action?

A. Push

B. Swap

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 22 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. POP

D. switch

Answer: D

Question #:74

An Eth-Trunk interface can be used only as a layer 2 interface

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:75

Which of the following commands can be used to change the device name to huawei ?

A. sysname huawei

B. hostname huawei

C. rename huwei

D. do name huawei

Answer: A

Question #:76

What are the advantage of the PPP protocol?

A. PPP supports both synchronous transmission and asynchronous transmission

B. PPP support negotiation of link layer parameters

C. PPP support negotiation of network layer parameters

D. PPP support authentication

Answer: A B C D

Question #:77

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 23 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

IPv6 interface do not forward received data packets whose “Hop Limit” field is set to 1?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:78

Which of the following statement about gratuitous ARP packet are true?

A. A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet

B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet

C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address

D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet

Answer: A B

Question #:79

Which of the following packet types are DHCPv6 packet types?

A. Solicit

B. Advertise

C. Discover

D. Offer

Answer: A B

Question #:80

Which of the following network types does OSPF support ?

A. Point- to- point

B. Broadcast

C. Non- Broadcast Multi - Access

D. Point -to- Mutilpoint

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 24 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: A B C D

Question #:81

What is the default interval for sending OSPF Hello packets on a broadcast network?

A. 10s

B. 20s

C. 30s

D. 40s

Answer: A

Question #:82

The maximum number of VTY user interfaces determines how many users can log in to the device through
Telnet or STelnet at the same time.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:83

Refer to the graphic, which of the following statement are true about VLAN configuration on Huawei
Switches?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 25 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. Client 1 belongs to VLAN 10 and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct

B. Client 2 belongs to VLAN 20 and the MAC address based VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is
correct

C. Client 3 belongs to VLAN 30 and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct

D. Client 4 belongs to VLAN 40 and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct

Answer: A B D

Question #:84

What is the UDP port number used by the DHCPv6 server?

A. 546

B. 547

C. 548

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 26 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. 549

Answer: B

Question #:85

A Company applies for a class C IP address for subnetting. It has six branches and the largest branch should
have 26 host. What would be an appropriate subnet mask for the largest branch?

A. 255.255.255.0

B. 255.255.255.128

C. 255.255.255.192

D. 255.255.255.224

Answer: D

Question #:86

Which of the following IPv6 addresses corresponds to the solicited -node multicast address of
FF02::1:FFAB:FECA?

A. 2020::FFAB:FECA

B. 2020::EEAB:FECA

C. 2020::FFBA:FECA

D. 2020::FFBA:FECA

Answer: A B

Question #:87

On an STP- enabled switch, TCN BPDUs are sent only when a port on the local switch is faulty?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:88

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 27 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which of the following IPv4 addresses can be directly used by a host to access the internet ?

A. 192.168.1.1/24

B. 10.255.255.254/24

C. 172.16.255.254/24

D. 172.32.1.1/24

Answer: D

Question #:89

Which of the following statement about IPv6 anycast addresses are true?

A. Packet destined for an anycast address are sent to the nearest interface identified based on routing
distance

B. Anycast and Unicast address space use the same address space

C. IPv6 anycast addresses provide redundancy functions of services

D. IPv6 anycast address implement load balancing for services

Answer: A B C

Question #:90

Which of the following layers are not included in the TCP/IPv4 model?

A. Application layer

B. Session layer

C. Presentation layer

D. Network layer

Answer: B C

Question #:91

The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network, however the router has no loopback
interface. Which value will be used as the router ID

A. The lowest IP address of the router's active interface

B.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 28 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. The highest IP address of the router's interface

C. The IP address of the management interface

D. The priority value of the router

Answer: B

Question #:92

When a switch port receives a frame that does not carry a VLAN tag, it must add a PVID to the frame.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:93

Which of the following statements is true about an STP-enable port in forwarding state?

A. The port forward user traffic and processes BPDUs

B. The port only receive and processes BPDUs and does not forward user traffic

C. The port does not process BPDUs or forward user traffic

D. The port creates MAC address entries based on the received user traffic but does not forward user traffic

Answer: A

Question #:94

The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0/25 is 192.168.1.128

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:95

The Output of the "display ospf peer" command on a router is as follows. Which of the following statements
are true?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 29 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

[Huawei]display ospf peer

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.2.2 Neighbors

Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.2(GigabitEthernet0/0/0)'s neighbors

Router ID: 10.0.1.1Address: 10.0.12.1 State: Full Mode:Nbr is Master Priority: 1 DR: 10.0.12.2 BDR:
10.0.12.1 MTU: 0

Dead timer due in 40 sec

Retrans timer interval: 5 Neighbor is up for 00:00:09 Authentication Sequence: [ 0 ]

A. The Router ID of the router is 10.0.2.2

B. The Local Router is DR

C. The Router ID of the router is 10.0.1.1

D. The Interface address of the local router is 10.0.12.2

Answer: A B D

Question #:96

Which field in the IPv6 packet header can be used for QOS?

A. Traffic Class

B. next header

C. version

D. Payload length

Answer: A

Question #:97

The loop protection function provided by RSTP can take effect only on designated port

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:98

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 30 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which of the following statements are true according to the following configuration?

<Router D>Display ospfv3 peer 10.0.3.3 verbose OSPFv3 Process(1)

Neighbor 10.0.3.3 is 2-way, interface address FE80:2E0:FCFF:FE48:4EC8

In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GE0/0/0

DR priority is 1 DR is 10.0.2.2 BDR is 10.0.1.1 options is 0x000013 (-|R|-|-|E|V6)

Dead timer due in 00:00:35

neighbour is up for 00:00:00

A. The Local router is a DR Router

B. The Router ID of DR is 10.0.2.2

C. The Router ID of DR is 10.0.1.1

D. The Local Router and the router Whose router ID is 10.0.3.3 cannot directly exchange link state
information.

Answer: B D

Question #:99

IPv6 uses NS and NA packets to perform duplicate address detection(DAD)

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:100

The following commands output is displayd on an STP port on a swith. Which of the following statements is
false?

<Huawei>display stp interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

-------[CIST Global Info][Mode STP]------- CIST Bridge:32768.4c1f-cc93-3356

Config Times:Hello 4s MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s MaxHop 20

Active Times:Hello 2s MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s MaxHop 20 CIST Root/ERPC:0 .4c1f-cc7f-3216 / 0

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 31 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.4c1f-cc93-3356 / 0The interval at which the port sends configuration BPDUs is 2
seconds

A. The Max Age timer for configuration BPDUs is set to 20 seconds

B. The Forward Delay timer is set to 20 seconds

C. The switch is not a root bridge

Answer: C

Question #:101

The Following Figure shows the network topology and OSPF area partition. Router R2, R3 and R4 are OSPF
ABR's but R1 is Not?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:102

Which username and password will be used by the peer router to perform PPP link authentication? aaa

local-user test password cipher test

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 32 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

local-user test service-type ppp

local-user test1 password cipher test1 local-user test1 service-type telnet local-user test2 password cipher test2

interface Serial1/0/0 link-protocol ppp

ppp authentication-mode chap

ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0

A. user name:test Password: test

B. user name:test1 Password: test1

C. user name:test2 Password: test2

D. user name:test2 Password: test

Answer: A

Question #:103

Which of the following packets are used by the DHCPv6 client and DHCPv6 server to determine whether the
client uses DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration or DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration?

A. RS

B. RA

C. NS

D. NA

Answer: A B

Question #:104

When Forwarding a data packet, a router need to change the destination IP address of the data packet?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 33 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:105

Which of the following packets is used by the DHCPv6 server to reply to solicit packets ?

A. Advertise

B. Offer

C. Reply

D. Request

Answer: A

Question #:106

Which of the Following statement about the configuration of the G0/0/1 interface on router A is/are true?

Acl number 3000

rule 5 deny 17

rule 10 deny 89

rule 15 deny 6

Interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound acl 3000

A. This interface can establish OSPF neighbor relationships with other routers

B. This interface does not forward received FTP packets.

C. This interface does not forward received SNMP packets.

D. This interface does not forward ICMP packets.

Answer: A B C

Question #:107

Which of the following statements about the link aggregation are true?

A. Eth-Trunk interface cannot be nested

B. GE electrical interface and GE optical interface cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface

C. GE interface and FE interfaces cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface

D. Devices at both ends of an Eth-trunk must use the same link-aggregation mode.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 34 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: A B C D

Question #:108

The Router ID of the OSPF enabled router must be same as the IP address of an interface on the router?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:109

Layer 2 switches are data link layer devices that identify MAC addresses of Layer 2 data frames and forward
Layer 2 data frames based on MAC addresses. In addition, they record mappings between MAC addresses and

interfaces in the MAC address table.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:110

In STP , when a designated port receives an inferior configuration BPDU, the designated port immediately
sends its own configuration, BPDU to the downstream device?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:111

Which of the following parameters is used to elect Root Bridge in STP?

A. Bridge ID

B. Port ID

C. Root Path Cost

D.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 35 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. System Name of the Switch

Answer: A

Question #:112

According to the figure, which of the following statements is true?

A. The IP address mask of host A is different from that of host B, therefore Host A & B cannot
communicate with each other

B. Host A can successfully ping Host B

C. The broadcast address of Host A and Host B are the same

D. Host A and B can communicate with rach other only when the IP address of Host A and Host B have
same masks.

Answer: B

Question #:113

Routing Table: Public Destination: 4 Route: 4

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

A. Proto indicates the routing protocol used to learn the route

B. Destination/Mask indicates the address and mask length of a destination network or host

C. NextHop indicates the local interface address of the route

D. Pre indicate the priority of the routing protocol

Answer: C

Question #:114

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 36 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

DHCPv6 Packet are carried using () packets?

A. UDP

B. TCP

C. HTTP

D. FTP

Answer: A

Question #:115

The VLAN ID cannot be set to 0

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:116

Which of the following bits are used in the Flag field in the RSTP configuration BPDU but not used in the
Flag field in the STP

A. TCA

B. TC

C. Proposal

D. Agreement

Answer: C D

Question #:117

As shown below, the routing table ofthe router consists of direct routes and static routes?

<Huawei>display ip routing-table

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 7Routes : 7

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 37 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Destination/Mask Proto Pre CostFlags NextHopInterface

1.1.1.1/32 Static 60 0D 100.1.1.1GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

10.0.0.2/24 Direct 0 0D 100.1.1.1.GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

10.1.1.255/32 Direct 0 0D 127.0.0.1GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

127.1.1.1/8 Direct 0 0D 127.0.0.1InLoopBack0

127.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0D 127.0.0.1InLoopBack0

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:118

Which of the following is not the reason why RSTP can increase the convergence speed

A. P/A mechanism

B. Edge port

C. Quick transition between root port state

D. The Forward Delay timer is canceled

Answer: B

Question #:119

According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow control?

A. Physical Layer

B. Data Link Layer

C. Network Layer

D. Transport Layer

Answer: D

Question #:120

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 38 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which of the following parameters can be allocated to clients in DHCPv6 statefull autoconfiguration?

A. IPv6 Address

B. DNS Address

C. PD prefix

D. MAC address

Answer: A B C

Question #:121

Which of the following service modules has/have the ACL with the default action of permit?

A. telnet

B. HTTP

C. SNMP

D. flow policy

Answer: D

Question #:122

A switch receives a VLAN tagged fame, but the destination MAC address can't be found in the switch's MAC
address table, how will the switch react ?

A. The switch will broadcast this frame to all ports.

B. The switch will broadcast this frame to all ports in this VLAN.

C. The switch will broadcast this frame to all access ports in this VLAN.

D. The switch will discard this frame.

Answer: B

Question #:123

Which of the following must be consistent at both ends of an OSPF adjacency relationship to be established

A. Router Priority

B. Router Dead Interval

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 39 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. Router ID

D. Area ID

Answer: B D

Question #:124

ACLs on AR G3 series routers , support configuration and auto sequence

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:125

A DHCPv6 client send a ( ) packet to a DHCPv6 server to request an IPv6 address and network configuration
parameters

A. Discover

B. Solicit

C. Advertise

D. Request

Answer: D

Question #:126

Which of the following statements about the static route preference on huawei devices is false?

A. Static route preferences range from 0 to 255

B. Default static route preference is 60

C. Static route preference is either internal or external. Administrators can modify external preferemces.

D. If static route preference is 255, the route cannot be used.

Answer: C

Question #:127

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 40 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

The Routing table on R1 is as follows. Which of the following statement is true?

<Huawei>display ip routing-table

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 7Routes : 7

Destination/Mask Proto Pre CostFlags NextHopInterface

10.0.2.2/32 Static 600D10.0.12.2Ethernet0/0/0

10.0.3.3/32 Static 600D10.0.2.2Ethernet0/0/0

10.0.12.0/24 Direct 00D10.0.12.1Ethernet0/0/0

10.0.12.1/32 Direct 0 0D 127.0.0.1Ethernet0/0/0

A. The Next hope of route destined for 10.0.3.3/32 is not directly connected. As a result, the router does not
forward data packets with the destination IP address 10.0.3.3

B. The Router forwards data packets with the destination IP address 10.0.3.3 through Eth0/0/0

C. The Router forwards data packets with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2 through Eth0/0/0

D. The Router forwards data packets with the destination IP address 10.0.12.1 through Eth0/0/0

Answer: B C D

Question #:128

If the DHCPv6 client and DHCPv6 server reside on different links, a DHCPv6 relay agent is required?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:129

As define in RSTP to improve the convergence speed you can define the port that is directly connected to a
terminal as the ( )

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 41 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. Fast port

B. Backup port

C. Root port

D. Edge port

Answer: D

Question #:130

On P2P networks , OSPFv3 does not need to send DD packets when establishing an OSPFv3 adjacency?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:131

OSPF allows for "multiple" processes By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( )

A. 0

B. 1

C. 10

Answer: B

Question #:132

Which commands can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

A. display ip interface brief

B. display current – configuration

C. display pppoe-client session packet

D. display pppoe-client session summary

Answer: D

Question #:133

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 42 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

How does a trunk port process data frames?

A. If the VLAN ID is the same as the PVID of the port and the port allow traffic with this VLAN ID to
pass through the port removes the VLAN tag from the data frames and forward them

B. If the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port the port removes the VLAN tag from the data
frames and then forwards them

C. If the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, the port replaces the VLAN tag of the data
frames and then forward them

D. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, the port discard the data frames

Answer: A

Question #:134

For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to compare cost values of the paths. If the
cost value are the same the router selects the path based on the preference value

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:135

In the DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration solution, hosts do not need to send any DHCPv6 packet

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:136

In the MPLS domain, the Full Name of LER is label egress router.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 43 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:137

SNMPv1 defines five protocol operations

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:138

As Shown in figure, all switches run STP. When a topology is stable, Power off SWA. Which of the following
statements are true?

A. SWC immediately sends a TC-BPDU through G0/0/1

B. SWC send configuration BPDU through G0/0/1 after the max age timer expires.

C. SWB periodically sends Configuration BPDUs through G0/0/1

D. SWC and SWB immediately re-elect the root bridge

Answer: B C

Question #:139

Which of the following field is/are contained in an IPv6 packet header?

A. Version

B. Traffic Class

C. Next Header

D. TOS

Answer: A B C

Question #:140

An AR2200 router is required to be configured from scratch. Which step are needed to achieve this?

A. Reset the saved configuration

B. Clear the current configuration

C. Reboot the AR2200

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 44 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. Assign the configuration file to be used at next startup

Answer: A C

Question #:141

A. In the PPP frame format, the Protocol field is 0xC223. What is the protocol

B. LCP

C. NCP

D. PAP

E. CHAP

Answer: D

Question #:142

If the network administrator does not configure the backbone area, the router automatically make up the
backbone area.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:143

As shown in the figure the host has ARP cache. Host A sends a data packet to host B. Which of the following
are the destination MAC address and destination IP address of the data packet?

A. MAC –A, 11.0.12.1

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 45 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. MAC –B, 11.0.12.1

C. MAC –C, 11.0.12.1

D. MAC –C, 11.0.12.2

Answer: D

Question #:144

Refer to the graphic, the static NAT command is executed on R1. When a PC connected to R1 accesss the
Internet, the destination address in the packet does not change?

[R1]nat static global 202.10.1.3 inside 192.168.0.2 netmask 255.255.255.255

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:145

When the IPsec data encapsulation mode is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is hidden. In this
way the security of the entire original data packet is protected.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:146

If the value of the "Type/Length" field of an Ethernet data frame is 0x0800, the length range of the upper -
layer packet header carried by the data frame is from 20B to 60B.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:147

According to the topology and configuration of the interconnected interface of switches shown in the figure,

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 46 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

the data frame tagged with VLAN 10 can be forwarded correctly between two switches.

[LSW1]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1

[LSW1-interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port link-type trunk [LSW1-interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port trunk

pvid vlan 20

[LSW1-interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port truck allow-pass vlan 10

[LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1

[LSW2-interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port link-type trunk [LSW2-interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port trunk

pvid vlan 10

[LSW2-interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port truck allow-pass vlan 10

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:148

Refer to the graphic. Four Switch are operating using STP. If port interface G0/0/2 on switch C fails, How
long will it take for the 'Blocked' interface to change to a state of forwarding?

A. 30 Seconds

B. 50 Seconds

C. 15 Seconds

D. 3 Seconds

Answer: B

Question #:149

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 47 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Compared with IPv4 headers, IPv6 header do not contain the IHL field

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:150

When the “delete vrpcfg.zip” command is run on the user interface of the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP),
the file can be permanently deleted only after it is cleared from the recycle bin.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:151

The administrator wishes to change name of the router, Under which view should the administrator be in order
to achieve this?

A. User-view

B. System-view

C. Interface-view

D. Protocol-view

Answer: B

Question #:152

The routers in the backbone area have information about all the LSDBs of other areas.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:153

Which of the following field is added to the IPv6 packet header compared with the IPv4 packet header

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 48 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. Source Address

B. Destination Address

C. Version

D. Flow Label

Answer: D

Question #:154

The IPv6 Address 2001:ABEF:224E:FFE2:BCC0:CD00:DDBE:8D58 can not be abbreviated

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:155

What is the default least time of the IP address allocated by the DHCP server

A. 1 hour

B. 12 hour

C. 18 hour

D. 24 hour

Answer: D

Question #:156

Which is the default value of switch priority when STP is enabled on Huawei switch

A. 4096

B. 8192

C. 16384

D. 32768

Answer: D

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 49 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:157

Which of the following parameters is used for master/slave role election of OSPF?

A. Router ID

B. Interface IP address

C. Sequence for protocols to Start

D. OSPF Process ID

Answer: A

Question #:158

IF the EUI-64 address CA93-93FF-FE7B-057B is calculated based on a MAC address, what is the MAC
address?

A. C89E-9D7B-057B

B. CA9E-9D7B-057B

C. A89E-9D7B-057B

D. C89E-9DFF-057B

Answer: A

Question #:159

If the packet matches the deny rule in an ACL, the packet is discarded

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:160

In Huawei Devices, when NAPT uses a dynamic address pool, addresses in the pool can be used repeatedly.
That is, one IP address can be mapped to multiple intranet IP addresses

A. TRUE

B.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 50 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:161

On the Versatile Routing (VRP), which of the following commands is used to display the current interface
configuration in the interface view?

A. display users

B. display version

C. display ip interface brief

D. display this

Answer: D

Question #:162

Which of the following statements is true about the forward Delay timer of STP?

A. Improves the STP convergence speed

B. Reduces the interval for sending BPDUs

C. Prevent temporary loops

D. Delay is required when a port transitions between Blocking and Disabled

Answer: C

Question #:163

MPLS dual-label stacking packets are ( ) bytes longer than original IP packets

A. 4

B. 8

C. 16

D. 32

Answer: B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 51 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:164

A trunk interface and a hybrid interface process packet in the same way when receiving data frames?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:165

Which of the following statements are true about the default route?

A. If the destination address of a packet does not match any entry in the routing table, the packet is
forwarded through the default route

B. In a routing table, the route to 0.0.0.0 (with the mask being 0.0.0.0) is the default route

C. The routing table of any router must contain the default route

D. The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator

Answer: A B D

Question #:166

When configuring a static route on a broadcast interface , you must specify the next -hop IP address.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:167

If AAA authentication is used on Huawei devices and the remote server does not respond , the authentication
can be performed on network devices?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:168

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 52 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

An ACL does not filter traffic generated by the huawei device towards other devices, but only filters
forwarded traffic including traffic generated by other devices to access the Huawei device.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:169

A DHCP Offer packet can carry only one DNS server address?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:170

NAPT differentiates IP addresses of different users based on protocol ID in TCP,UDP, or IP packet?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:171

Which of the following parameters is not used by advanced ACL

A. Source interface

B. Destination Port number

C. Protocol number

D. Time-range

Answer: A

Question #:172

The IKE protocol is used to set up an SA for IPsec automatic negotiation. Identity authentication can be

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 53 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

performed when the IP address of the initiator changes dynamically

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:173

Which of the following options is the simplest form of IPv6 address

3001:0DB8:0000:0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58?

A. 3001:DB8::346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

B. 3001:0DB8::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

C. 3001:0DB8::0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

D. 3001:DB8::0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

Answer: A

Question #:174

By default in the SNMP protocol, which port number is used by the proxy process to send alarm massage to
the NMS?

A. 161

B. 162

C. 163

D. 164

Answer: B

Question #:175

On Huawei AR G3 Series routers, Which authentication modes does AAA support

A. None

B. Local

C. Radius

D.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 54 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. 802.1X

Answer: A B C

Question #:176

Before forwarding IPv6 packets routers do not need to re-encapsulate the data link layer?

A. True

B. False

Answer: B

Question #:177

When a host uses DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration, the host sends a DHCPv6 ( ) packet to request
configuration information?

A. Information-Request

B. CONFIRM

C. SOLICIT

D. REBIND

Answer: A

Question #:178

Which of the following can prevent host A and Host B from communicating with each other?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 55 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. acl number 2000

rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255

interface G0/0/1

traffic-filter outbound acl 2000

B. acl number 2000

rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255

interface G0/0/2

traffic-filter inbound acl 2000

C.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 56 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. acl number 2000

rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255

interface G0/0/1

traffic-filter inbound acl 2000

D. acl number 2000

rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255

interface G0/0/3

traffic-filter inbound acl 2000

Answer: A B

Question #:179

As Shown in the figure, host A and host B cannot communicate with each other?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:180

UDP does not guarentee data transmission reliability and does not provide packet sorting and traffic control
functions . It is suitable for the traffic that has low requirements for data tramission reliability, but high
requirements for the transmission

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 57 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:181

Which of the following statements is false about ARP packets?

A. ARP Request packets are transmitted in broadcast mode

B. ARP Reply packets are transmitted in Unicast mode

C. Any network device needs to send ARP packets to obtain the data link layer identifier.

D. ARP packets cannot traverse routers and cannot be forwarded to other broadcast domain.

Answer: D

Question #:182

Which of the following ACLs cannot match network layer information?

A. Basic ACL

B. Advanced ACL

C. Layer 2 ACL

D. User ACL

Answer: C

Question #:183

The LACP Priority is shown in the figure. Switch A and Switch B adopt link aggregation in LACP mode, All
interfaces are added to link aggregation group (LAG), and the maximum number of active port is set to
3.Which port of switch A is not an active port?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 58 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. G0/0/0

B. G0/0/1

C. G0/0/2

D. G0/0/3

Answer: D

Question #:184

After an RSTP-enable switch receives the BPDUs with the TC bit set, the MAC addresses learned by all the
ports are cleared

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:185

In which of the following state can an STP- enabled port transition of the forwarding state directly

A. Blocking

B. Disable

C. Listening

D. Learning

Answer: D

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 59 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:186

What is the number range of an advanced ACL?

A. 2000-2999

B. 3000-3999

C. 4000-4999

D. 6000-6031

Answer: B

Question #:187

For an STP- enabled switch, a port in any state can transition to the disabled state

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:188

As shown in Figure, Which of the following port will become the designated port?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 60 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. G0/0/3 of SWB

B. G0/0/1 of SWC

C. G0/0/2 of SWC

D. G0/0/3 of SWA

Answer: D

Question #:189

Huawei VRP platform which of the following can be used to invoke the history commands saved by the
command line interface?

A. Upper cursor key

B. Left cursor key

C. Ctrl+P

D. Ctrl+U

Answer: A C

Question #:190

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 61 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which of the following technologies is used to bind MAC addresses to interface on a switch

A. SEP

B. Port security

C. ACL

D. NAT

Answer: B

Question #:191

Which of the following statements is true about link aggregation in manual load balancing mode ?

A. In manual load balancing mode, all active interfaces forward data and load balance traffic.

B. A maximum of four active interfaces can be configured in manual load balancing mode.

C. In manual load balancing mode, devices at both ends of a link send LACPDUs to each other.

D. The number of active interfaces can be set in manual load balancing mode.

Answer: A

Question #:192

Which of the following information must be configured for a DHCPv6 relay agent?

A. DHCPv6 DUID

B. IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 server

C. DHCPv6 address pool

D. DNS server address

Answer: A B

Question #:193

Which of the following command is/are used to set the authentication Mode to HWTACACS authentication?

A. authentication-mode hwtacacs

B. authentication-mode local

C.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 62 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. authentication-mode none

D. authentication-mode hwtacacs

Answer: A

Question #:194

What packet types are included in DHCP?

A. DHCP Discover packet

B. DHCP offer packet

C. DHCP Request packet

D. DHCP Rollover packet

Answer: A B C

Question #:195

The solicited-node multicast address corresponding to the IPv6 address 2001::12:1 is FF02::1:FF12:1

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:196

When a host uses the IP address 192.168.1.2 to access the internet , NAT must be performed

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:197

What is the value of the type field in RSTP configuration BPDUs?

A. 0x00

B. 0x01

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 63 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. 0x02

D. 0x03

Answer: C

Question #:198

In the MPLS forwarding process, when MPLS packets pass through the ingress LER the ingress LER pops out
a label

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:199

which of the following OSPF packets can ensure LSA update reliabilty?

A. LSU

B. LSR

C. LSACK

D. DD

Answer: C

Question #:200

Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a router ?

A. SDRAM

B. NVRAM

C. Flash

D. BootROM

Answer: C

Question #:201

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 64 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which layer of the OSI reference model does a switch work at?

A. Network layer

B. Data link layer

C. Physical layer

D. Transport layer

Answer: B

Question #:202

Which of the following is/are advantages of inter-VLAN routing in one-arm routing mode?

A. Reduced the number of links

B. Reduced the use of IP addresses

C. Reduced the number of devices

D. Reduced the number of entries in the routing table

Answer: A

Question #:203

For STP the default root path cost of the root bridge is 0?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:204

The network administrator finds that a port on the switch has learnt MAC address but cannot forward data
frames. What is the state of the port?

A. Blocking

B. Disabled

C. Listening

D. learning

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 65 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: D

Question #:205

On the network shown in the following figure, Router A functions as a DHCPv6 relay agent, and Router B
functions as DHCPv6 server. Which of the following paremeter must be configured on Router B?

A. DHCPv6 DUID

B. IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 relay agent

C. DHCPv6 address pool

D. RA on G0/0/1 of Rouer B

Answer: A C D

Question #:206

DHCPv6 is a protocol for stateful IPv6 address autoconfiguration.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:207

Which of the following IPv6 addresses is /are permanent multicast address(es)?

A. FF02::1

B. FF02::2

C. FF12::1

D. FF12::2

Answer: A B

Question #:208

When a source end uses application software to send an image file through a network, the TCP/IP
encapsulation process of the file is : Data -> Segment -> packet -> Frame -> Bit.

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 66 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:209

Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct

A. An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before configuring on OSPF
area

B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

C. A single area can be configured using any supported area number

D. All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0

Answer: B D

Question #:210

The basic header of IPv6 packets has a fixed length

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:211

Which of the following statements about node segments is false

A. Node segments are special prefix segments

B. A node segment is used to identify a specific node

C. The node SID must be different from the prefix SID of the node

D. undo interface Eth-trunk-1

Answer: C

Question #:212

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 67 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

With what kind of routers does a DRother route exchange link state information and route information

A. DR

B. BDR

C. DRother

D. All OSPF neighbors

Answer: A B

Question #:213

Which of the following statements is false about a gratuitous ARP packet?

A. Gratituitous ARP packet are used to check for Duplicate IP addresses. Normally, a Host does not receive
an ARP reply packet after sending an ARP request packet with destination address of its own IP address.
If the Host receives an ARP reply packet, Anoth

B. gratuitous ARP are used to advertise a new MAC address. If MAC address of a host changes because its
network adapter is replaced, the host send a gratitious ARP packet to notify all hosts of the change
before the ARP entry ages out.

C. Gratuitous ARP packet are used to activate gateways when a host is idle

D. Gratuitous ARP packets are used to notify the active/standby switchover of router in a VRRP group.

Answer: C

Question #:214

According to following configuration , R1 And R2 are connected through low speed serial cables and PPP is
used to encapsulate data link layer packets? When the hold down value of R1 & R2 are different, ppp
negotiation

and communication fails?

A. True

B. False

Answer: B

Question #:215

The management information base (MIB) is a virtual Database that is stored on the NMS?

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 68 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:216

What is the destination address of DHCPv6 request packets ?

A. FF02::1:2

B. FF02::1

C. FF02::2

D. FF01::1:2

Answer: A

Question #:217

After the keepalive function is enabled for a GRE tunnel , the local end of the GRE tunnel sends a keepalive
packet to the remote end every 10s.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:218

Based on the following configurations of the interface, from which of the following multicast address can the
interface receive data?

[Huawei] display ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 Current state : UP

IPv6 Protocol Current state : UP

IPv6 is enabled, Link local address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE6F:4F36 Gloabal Unicast Address(es)

2001::12:1, Subnet is 2001::/64

2001::12:1, Subnet is 2019::/64

Joined Grouped Address(es); FF02::1:FF12:1

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 69 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

FF02::2

FF02::1 FF02::1:FF6F:4F36

MTU is 1500 bytes

A. FF02::2

B. FF02::1

C. FF02::1:FF12:1

D. FF02::1:FF6F:4F36

Answer: A B C D

Question #:219

What are the functions of the DR and BDR in OSPF?

A. Reduce the time taken for establishing the OSPF adjacency relationship

B. Reduce the number of OSPF Neighbors

C. Reduce the number of times link state information is exchanged

D. Reduce the types of OSPF packets

Answer: A C

Question #:220

You can run the “pwd” and “dir” commands on the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP) to view file information
in the current directory

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:221

Which of the following information is not included in the MAC address table of a switch

A. MAC address

B. Port number

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 70 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. IP address

D. undo Eth-trunk

Answer: C

Question #:222

Which of the following packet is sent by a DHCPv6 client before it send a request packet to the DHCPv6
server

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:223

The multicast address FF02::1 indicate all nodes within the link-local scope?

A. TRUE

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:224

Telnet is based on TCP?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:225

Which of the following field exits in both IPv6 and IPv4 packet headers?

A. Source Address

B. Destination Address

C. Version

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 71 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. Next Header

Answer: A B C

Question #:226

Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be obtained by the host if the DHCPv6 address pool is configured
as follows

A. 2019::2

B. 2019::4

C. 2019::6

D. 2019::8

Answer: A B C

Question #:227

Which of the following statements are true about the static MAC address table?

A. After a device is reset an interface card is hot swapped or an interface card is reset, the saved entries on
the device or interface card are not lost

B. After an interface is statically bound to a MAC address, other interface discarded a packet whose source
MAC address is the bound MAC address

C. Each static MAC address entry can be bound only to one outbound interface

D. You can check whether data is forwarded between two connected devices by checking the static MAC
address entries

Answer: A B

Question #:228

Which of the following content can an advanced ACL on a Huawei device filter

A. Network traffic sent from specific source addresses

B. Traffic of specific applications, such as QQ

C. Network traffic sent to specific destination addresses

D. Network traffic that passes through the special port number

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 72 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: A B C

Question #:229

The Multicast address FF02::2 indicate all routers within the link-local scope?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:230

When a two-way neighbor relationship is set up between two OSPF-enable routers, it means the LSDB
synchronization has been completed, but the SPF algorithm has not been performed yet

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:231

The TCP protocol uses the three-way handshake mechanism to establish and disable connections. Therefore,
TCP support reliable data?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:232

How many DUIDs can each DHCPv6 server have?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Answer: A

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 73 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:233

Which of the following methods are supported by VRP to configure the router?

A. Through the Console Port

B. Through Telnet

C. Through the Aux port

D. Through FTP

Answer: A B

Question #:234

The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stage?

A. Discovery stage

B. DHCP stage

C. PPPoE Session stage

D. PPP connecting stage

Answer: A C

Question #:235

Which of the following port roles are added to Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) compared with STP?

A. Root port

B. Designated port

C. Alternate port

D. Backup port

Answer: D

Question #:236

In the LCP negotiation phase of the PPP protocol, which of the following packets is sent if all the parameters
sent by the peer end are accepted?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 74 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. Configure- Request

B. Configure- ACK

C. Configure- Nak

D. Configure- Reject

Answer: B

Question #:237

Which of the following protocols belongs to the IGP

A. BGP

B. OSPF

C. Static routing

D. Direct Routing

Answer: B

Question #:238

user-interface con 0

user-privilege level 15 authentication-mode password

set authentication password cipher huawei2012

Which of the following information is false about preceding configuration?

A. The Administrator wants to log in to the device and manage through console port

B. After the configuration is completed, the administrator cannot remotly login to the device to manage the
device

C. the user who log into the device through the console port has the highest level of user rights

D. The password for logging into the device through the console port is "cipher huawei2012"

Answer: D

Question #:239

On the Network shown in the figure, two switches are connected through four links. COPPER indicates the

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 75 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

electrical interface and Fiber indicates the optical interfaace. Which of the following interface can form an
Eth-trunk?

A. G0/0/3 and G0/0/2

B. G0/0/3 and FE0/0/3

C. G0/0/2 and FE0/0/3

D. G0/0/2 and GE0/0/1

Answer: D

Question #:240

As shown in the figure, the administrator requires that all hosts cannot access the internet during 8:00 - 17:00
every day. In this case, which ACL rule needs to be bound to traffic-filter outbound in the interface
configuration of G0/0/1?

A. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17:00 daily

acl number 2001

rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 76 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17:00 daily

acl number 2002

rule 5 permit time-range am9topm5

C. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17:00 Working-day

acl number 2003

rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5

D. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17:00 off-day

acl number 2004

rule 5 permit time-range am9topm5

Answer: A

Question #:241

The solicited-node multicast address consists of the prefix FF02::1:FF00:0/104 and the last 24 bits of the
corresponding unicast address

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

C. quit

Answer: A

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 77 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:242

On the network shown in the figure, host A logs into router A through Telnet and obtains the configuration file
of the Router B through FTP on the remote CLI. How many TCP connections exists on Router A?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Answer: C

Question #:243

The following Shows the Eth-trunk information on a switch. Which of the following commands can be used to
delete Eth-trunk 1?

[SW1]display interface Eth-Trunk 1 Eth-Trunk1 current state : UP

Line protocol current state : UP

IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 4c1f-cc5c-37f5 Input bandwidth

utilization : 0%

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 78 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Output bandwidth utilization : 0%

-----------------------------------------------------

PortNameStatusWeight

-----------------------------------------------------

GigabitEthernet0/0/1UP1

GigabitEthernet0/0/2UP1

-----------------------------------------------------

The Number of Ports in Trunk : 2 The Number of UP Ports in Trunk : 2

A. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 undo eth-trunk

quit

inte Gigabitethernet 0/0/2 undo eth-trunk

quit

undo interface Eth-trunk-1

B. undo interface Eth-trunk-1

C. undo interface Eth-trunk-1|inte gigabitethernet 0/0/1 undo Eth-trunk

quit

undo interface Eth-trunk-1

D. inte gigabitethernet 0/0/2 undo Eth-trunk

quit

undo interface Eth-trunk-1

Answer: A

Question #:244

Refer to the graphic, 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address learned by a switch through ARP and the
host changes the IP address three times?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 79 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: A

Question #:245

In a scenario without virtual links, the next hop of each OSPFv3 route is a link-local address?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:246

When a switch port sends a data frame with the same VLAN tag and PVID , the switch port removes the
VLAN tag and forwards frame.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:247

The Network administrator creates VLAN 10 and assigns an IP address to VLANIF10. When usig the
command "display IP Interface brief", the administrator finds that VLANIF10 is down. What should be done
to enable VLANIF10?

A. use the command "undo shutdown" under the interface view for VLAN10

B. assign a physical interface that has either an active or inactive physical state to VLAN10

C. assign only a physical interface that has an active physical state to VLAN 10

D. add an interface that has an active physical state and a trunk port associated with VLAN 10

Answer: C

Question #:248

As a new tunneling technology that replaces MPLS, segment routing (SR) has attracted more and more
attention. Many users want to introduce the SR technology to simplify network deployment and management
and

reduce capital expenditure (CAPEX). As a mainstr

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 80 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:249

Segment routing (SR) is a protocol designed based on ( ) to forward data packet on a network

A. Source routing

B. Destination routing

C. Policy-based routing

D. Routing policy

Answer: A

Question #:250

Which of the following statement are true about the OSPF neighbor status

A. The master/slave relationship of OSPF is formed in the ExStart state

B. The sequence number of DD packet is determined in the Exchange state

C. In the Exchange state, routers send DD packets that briefly describe link state information to each other
to describe the content of the local link state database (LSDB)

D. After LSDB synchronization is completed, the route state changes to full

Answer: A C D

Question #:251

Packet forwarded between two routers do not carry VLAN tags?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:252

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 81 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

OSPFv3 itself does not provide the authentication function.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:253

Segment routing-traffic engineering (SR-TE) is a new TE tunneling technology that uses SR as a control
protocol. All nodes of an SR-TE tunnel including the ingress and transit nodes, must be aware of the tunnel
and complete label distribution and forwardi

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:254

Which of the following cannot be the length of an IPv4 packet header

A. 20B

B. 32B

C. 60B

D. 64B

Answer: D

Question #:255

The DHCPv6 server adds the management address configuration flag (M) to an RA packet . If M is set to 1,
which of the following statements is true ?

A. DHCPv6 stateful address configuration is enabled on the client

B. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is enabled on the client

C. The client needs to use stateful DHCPv6 to obtain other network configuration parameters.

D. The client needs to use stateless DHCPv6 to obtain other network configuration parameters.

Answer: A

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 82 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:256

As Shown in the figure, if Host A has ARP cauche of Host B, Host A can ping Host B?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:257

The Length of an IPv6 address prefix can be represented by a mask?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:258

A gateway must be configured for communication between a host and other hosts

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 83 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: B

Question #:259

An authentication router has been configured with two domain named “Area1” and “Area2” , following which
a user is created with the username “Huawei” and the password “hello” for authentication. Which domain does
this

user belongs to?

A. Area1 domain

B. Area2 domain

C. default domain

D. default_admin domain

Answer: C

Question #:260

As Shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows. Which of the following
statement about the network and configuration is/are true?

Router A

aaa

local-user test password cipher test local-user test service-type ppp

interface Serial1/0/0 link-protocol ppp

ppp authentication-mode chap

ppp pap local-user test1 password cipher test1

ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0

Router B

aaa

local-user test1 password cipher test1 local-user test1 service-type ppp

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 84 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

interface Serial1/0/0 link-protocol ppp

ppp authentication-mode pap

ppp chap user test

ppp chap password cipher test

ip address 10.0.12.12 255.255.255.0

A. The Authentication mode of the interface on Router A is CHAP.

B. Router A uses the user name "test1" and password "test1" to pass the interface authentication of Router
B

C. The Authentication mode of the interface on Router B is PAP.

D. Router B uses the user name "test1" and password "test1" to pass the interface authentication of Router
A

Answer: A B C

Question #:261

OSPFv2 uses new types of LSAs to support IPv6?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:262

You can run the "mkdir test" command on the Versatile Routing Platform ( VRP) to create a folder named
"test" in the sytem?

A. TRUE

B.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 85 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:263

Which of the following statements is true about direct routes?

A. The priority of the direct route is lower than that of the dynamic route

B. The priority of the direct route is lower than that of the static route

C. The administrator needs to manually configure the destination network and next-hop address for the
direct route

D. The direct route has the highest priority

Answer: A D

Question #:264

When redundant links exist on a switching network, STP can be used to eliminate loops.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:265

A switch process and forwards ethernet frames in tagged mode?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:266

If the maximum number of an ACL rule is 12, by default, no number is specified when a new rule is
configured. What is the number allocated by the system to the new rule?

A. 13

B. 14

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 86 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

C. 15

D. 16

Answer: C

Question #:267

PPP support both unidirectional authentication and bidirectional authentication?

A. True

B. False

Answer: A

Question #:268

By default, it takes at least 30 seconds for an STP-enabled port to transition from disabled to forwarding?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:269

After a device is reset, an interface card is hot swapped, or an interface card is reset, the saved MAC address
entries on the device or interface card are not lost

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:270

Which of the following commands line views exist on the Versatile Routing Platform

A. User view

B. System view

C. Protocol view

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 87 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. Interface view

Answer: A B C D

Question #:271

Which of the following packets are OSFP packets?

A. Hello

B. LSR

C. LSU

D. LSA

Answer: A B C

Question #:272

During device startup, the device selects a VRP version files depends on the configuration saved in the ( )
storage medium?

A. Flash memory

B. SD card

C. NVRAM

D. USB

Answer: A

Question #:273

Which of the following IPv6 addresses is/are multicast address(es) within the link range

A. FF02::1

B. FF02::2

C. FF12::1

D. FF12::2

Answer: A B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 88 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:274

On Huawei switches, you can run the vlan batch commands to create multiple VLANs in batches

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:275

PING 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break

Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=128 time=60 ms Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=56 Sequence=2
ttl=128 time=40 ms

--- 10.0.0.2 ping statistics --- 2 packet(s) transmitted

2 packet(s) received

0.00% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max = 40/46/60 ms

The Network Administartor can run the "ping" command on the AR G3 router to test the connectivity to
10.0.0.2. Wh/ich of the following statement is true about the command output?

A. The Command used by the network administrator is "ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2"

B. The Command used by the network administrator is "ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2"

C. The destination address 10.0.0.2 is unreachable.

D. The network administartor changes the default TTL value to 255

Answer: A

Question #:276

A network administrator has been assigned the IP address segment 192.168.176.0/25, from which he/she must
allocate a subnet to support 20 users in the marketing department. Which IP subnet best supports this
requirements

A. 192.168.176.0/25

B. 192.168.176.0/30

C. 192.168.176.48/29

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 89 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

D. 192.168.176.96/27

Answer: D

Question #:277

[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view users save

Refer to the command output. what is the result of the shown command?

C. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

D. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3

E. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the configuration

F. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.

Question #:278

On the network shown in the following figure, all interface run OSPFv3. How many DRs exist on the
network?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Answer: A

Question #:279

The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address. What is the possible
reason

A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router

B. The authentication mode of Telnet os set incorrectly

C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly

D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 90 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: C

Question #:280

A trunk interface allows frames from multiple VLANs including VLAN 4096.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:281

According to the configuration of the single-armed routing in the following figure, the administrator
department and finance department can communicate with each other even if proxy ARP is disabled on
subinterface of R1?

A. True

B. False

Answer: B

Question #:282

When the values of the M and O flags in the RA packet that a DHCPv6 client receives from a DHCPv6 server
are ( ), the DHCPv6 client uses DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration to obtain an IPv6 address and other
configuration information?

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 91 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. 11

B. 10

C. 1

D. 0

Answer: A

Question #:283

The load balancing modes at both ends of an Eth-Trunk can be different

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:284

According to the following configuration of an interface, if all the displayed IPv6 address are available, how
many global unicast address prefixes are advertised by the interface?

Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0 ipv6 Enable

ipv6 address 2003::1/64

ipv6 address 2004::1/64 ipv6 address 2005::1/64 ipv6 address 2009::1/64 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Answer: D

Question #:285

Refer to the configuration output, Which of the following statements regarding the configuration output are
correct?

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 92 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

[Huawei-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]port link-type access [Huawei-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]port default vlan 10

[Huawei-Gigabitethernet0/0/2]port link-type trunk

[Huawei-Gigabitethernet0/0/2]port trunk allow-pass vlan 10

A. The PVID on interface GIgabitEthernet0/0/1 is 10

B. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 1

C. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 10

D. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 1

Answer: A D

Question #:286

On the network shown in the figure, the ports connecting Switch A and switch B to hosts belongs to VLAN 10
and VLAN 20 respectively. The ports through which two switches are interconnected are trunk port, and the
PVID of the ports are 10 and 20 respectively. which of the following statement are true?

A. Host A and Host B belongs to different VLANs and cannot ping each other

B. Host A and Host B can ping each other.

C. When the data frames sent by the hosts are forwarded between switches, the frames are untagged

D. ARP request from host A cannot be forwarded to host B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 93 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Answer: B C

Question #:287

Which of the following packet is used by OSPFv3 to maintain neighbor relationship

A. Hello packet

B. Database Description (DD) packet

C. Link State request (LSR) packet

D. Link State Update (LSU) packet

Answer: A

Question #:288

Which of the following values of the Length/Type field in an Ethernet data frame indicates the PPPoE
discovery stage?

A. 0x8863

B. 0x8864

C. 0x0806

D. 0x0800

Answer: A

Question #:289

The authentication, authorization and accounting schemes and HWTACACS or RADIUS server templates
created or AR routers take effect only after being applied to a domain

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:290

The MPLS architecture consists of the control plane and forwarding plane. The following plane switches
lables and forwards packets

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 94 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:291

After a network administrator enable the traceroute function on a router what is the value of the “TTL” field in
the IPv4 header of the first data packet sent by the router?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 254

D. 255

Answer: B

Question #:292

As shown in Figure, Host A and Host B cannot communicate with each other?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:293

Which of the following statement about Length/Type = 0x8100 in an Ethernet data frame is/are true?

A. The data frame must carry a VLAN tag

B.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 95 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. The upper layer of the data frame must have an IP header

C. The upper layer of the data frame must have a TCP header

D. The upper layer of the data frame must have a UDP header

Answer: A

Question #:294

NAPT uses the same public IP address but different port number to translate private IP addresses. Which
statement regarding the port number is correct

A. It is necessary to configure port mapping manually

B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range

C. It is not necessary to configure port number

D. An access control list is needed to assign port number

Answer: C

Question #:295

Which of the following types of routes can be used by a router to establish a routing table ?

A. Direct Route

B. Dynamic Route

C. Static Route

D. Aggregated Route

Answer: A C

Question #:296

The packets returned by the DHCP server to the DHCP client must be unicast packets.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 96 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:297

When a switch running standard STP receives an inferior configuration BPDU through a port, it immediately
sends its own configuration BPDU through the port?

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:298

On the network shown in the figure, when planning traffic, the network administrator requires that the data
packet sent from host A to host B pass through G0/0/3 on the router, and the packets sent from host B to host
A pass through G0/0/4 on the router, which of the following command can be used to meed this requirement?

A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2

Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.5

B. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.6

Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1

C. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12.2

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 97 of 104

PracticeC.Test Huawei - H12-211

Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12.5

D. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12.6

Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12.1

Answer: A C

Question #:299

If the EUI-64 address 78BC-FEFF-FFFE-EFAB is calculated based on a MAC address, what is the MAC
address

A. 7ABC-FEFE-EFAB

B. 78BC-FEFE-EFAB

C. 7ABC-FFFE-EFAB

D. 78BC-FFFE-EFAB

Answer: A

Question #:300

Which of the following port number is used by the FTP control plane

A. 21

B. 22

C. 23

D. 24

Answer: A

Question #:301

DHCPV6 clients must obtain both IPv6 addresses and other configurations from the DHCPv6 server.

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 98 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Question #:302

What is the destination MAC address of STP BPDUs?

A. 01-80-C2-00-00-00

B. FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

C. 00-80-C2-00-00-00 D

D. 01-80-C2-04-05-06

Answer: A

Question #:303

Which of the following are necessary to configure OSPF on a huawei Router?

A. Configuration of a router ID

B. Enabling of an OSPF process

C. Specifying an OSPF area

D. Configuration of the network segments within each area

Answer: B C D

Question #:304

What are the advantages of using DHCP to allocate IP addresses

A. DHCP provides heavy workload and is difficult to manage

B. DHCP can prevent IP address conflicts

C. IP addresses can be reused

D. If the configuration information changes, for example the DNS server address changes, the administrator
only needs to modify the configuration information on the DHCP server, facilitating unified
managemnet

Answer: B C D

Question #:305

The DHCP server function is enabled on an interface of a route. What gateway address will be obtained by the

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 99 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

DHCP CLIENT?

Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1

Ip address 11.0.1.1 255.255.255.0

dhcp select interface

dhcp server excluded-ip-address 11.0.1.2 11.0.1.127

A. 11.0.1.1

B. 11.0.1.100

C. 11.0.1.254

D. 11.0.1.255

Answer: C

Question #:306

All interface on a router running OSPF must belong to the same area

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: B

Question #:307

Which of the following statements is true about the alternate port in RSTP?

A. An Alternate port acts as a backup of the designated port and provides a backup path from the root
bridge to the related network segment.

B. An Alternate port acts as a backup of the root port and provides a alternate path from the designated
bridge to the root bridge.

C. An alternate port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address.

D. An alternate port forward user traffic and learns MAC address.

Answer: B

Question #:308

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 100 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

Which of the following methods is not used for logging in to the VRP system ?

A. Telnet

B. SSH

C. Web

D. Netstream

Answer: D

Question #:309

Which of the following is the format of application data after being processed by the data link layer

A. PDU

B. Packet

C. Frame

D. Segment

Answer: C

Question #:310

How many port states are involved in RSTP?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

Answer: C

Question #:311

Segment routing (SR) can be used to define an explicit path. Nodes on a network only need to maintain SR
information to deal with the real time and rapid development of services. What are the characteristics or SR?

A. SR supports smooth evolution of the existing network by extending protocol (such as IGPs)

B. SR supports both the controller’s centralized control mode and forwarders distributed control mode,

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 101 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211
B.
providing a balance between the two modes

C. SR uses the source routing technology to support fast interaction between the network layer and upper-
layer applications

D. SR uses IP forwarding, and router do not need to maintain another label forwarding table

Answer: A B C

Question #:312

The Output of the "display vlan" command o SWA is as follows. Which of the following interface can forward
data packets with VLAN ID 40 untagged mode?

[Huawei]display vlan

The total number of vlans is : 5

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

U: Up;D: Down;TG: Tagged;UT: Untagged;

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

VID Type Ports

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 common UT:GE0/0/1(U)GE0/0/2(U)

20 common TG:GE0/0/1(U)GE0/0/5(U)

30 common TG:GE0/0/1(U)

40 common UT:GE0/0/5(U)GE0/0/2

A. GE0/0/3

B. GE0/0/4

C. GE0/0/5

Answer: C

Question #:313

On a serial interface you can configure a static route by spending the next hop address or outbound interface ?

A. TRUE

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 102 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:314

Which of the following technologies is used by the shared media network to forward data?

A. CSMA/CD

B. CDMA/CD

C. CSMA/AC

D. TDMA/CD

Answer: A

Question #:315

When configuring the PPP auhentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are necessary

A. Add the user name and password of the authenticator party to the local user list.

B. Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected of the peer as PPP

C. Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP

D. On the authenticated end, configure the user name and password that are sent to authentidcator

Answer: A B D

Question #:316

Static NAT can only implement one-to-one mapping between private and public addresses

A. TRUE

B. FALSE

Answer: A

Question #:317

All interface on a router belongs to the same broadcast domain?

A.

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 103 of 104

Practice Test Huawei - H12-211

A. True

B. False

Answer: B

Pass Your Certification With Marks4sure Guarantee 104 of 104

About Marks4sure.com
marks4sure.com was founded in 2007. We provide latest & high quality IT / Business Certification Training Exam
Questions, Study Guides, Practice Tests.

We help you pass any IT / Business Certification Exams with 100% Pass Guaranteed or Full Refund. Especially
Cisco, CompTIA, Citrix, EMC, HP, Oracle, VMware, Juniper, Check Point, LPI, Nortel, EXIN and so on.

View list of all certification exams: All vendors

We prepare state-of-the art practice tests for certification exams. You can reach us at any of the email addresses listed
below.

Sales: [email protected]
Feedback: [email protected]
Support: [email protected]

Any problems about IT certification or our products, You can write us back and we will get back to you within 24
hours.
 Reference Solution for
H12-
211.examcollection.premium.exam.325q
H12-211

H12-211

Huawei Certified Network Associate- Huawei Networking Technology and Device

Version 10.0

Score: 800/1000
Version:
Time Limit: 120 Minutes

1
Licensed to Mohamed Elshair [email protected]
Exam A (325 questions)
Question 1
The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB cable.

How can this be achieved? (Choose all that apply.)

 The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini
USB port of the AR2200 router.
 The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB
port of the AR2200 router.
 The AR2200 router cannot support configuration updates through a USB cable.
 The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after
connecting the USB.

Question 2
Host A has been connected to switch A and configured with an IP address.

When Host A initially forwards a frame, what action will be taken by Switch A?

 Switch A will drop this frame.

 Switch A will attempt to flood the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
 Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
 Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.

Question 3
The network administrator creates VLAN 10 and assigns an IP address to VLANIF10. When using the
command “display ip interface brief”, the administrator finds that VLANIF10 is down. What should be
done to enable VLANIF10?

 Use the command “undo shutdown” under the interface view for VLANIF10
 Assign a physical interface that has either an active of inactive physical state to VLAN
10
 Assign only a physical interface that has an active physical state to VLAN 10
 Add an interface that has an active physical state and a trunk port associated with
VLAN 10

2 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 4
Refer to the graphic.

The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to interface
G0/0/0. Which of the following steps can be used to help the administrator identify the problem?
(Choose two)

 Check whether the host has configured the gateway IP address.

 Check whether the switch has configured the gateway IP address.
 Use the ping tool to check connectivity between host and router.
 Check the telnet server configuration is right on the router.

Question 5
SNMP packets are encapsulated in TCP packets.

 True
 False

Question 6
ICMP packets do not contain port numbers. Therefore, NAPT cannot be used.

 True
 False

3 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 7
What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?

 A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

 An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
 A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
 An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000

Question 8
Refer to the command output. Which statement is true regarding this command?

 The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168.1.1 network

 The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network.
 The preference value of this configured route is 100.
 If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing
protocol, the static route will always take precedence.

Question 9
The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify
connectivity to the router and has been informed that other administrators have no difficulties using
telnet.

Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose all that apply.)

 The user’s status has been blocked

 The user’s privilege level has been changed to 0.
 The user has been deleted.
 The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.

4 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 10
Refer to the graphic, which of the following statements are true about VLAN configuration on Huawei
switches? (Multiple Choice)

 Client1 belongs to VLAN 10 and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
 Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the MAC address-based VLAN assignment command
on LSW1 is correct.
 Client3 is in VLAN 30, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
 Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
 Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is
incorrect.

5 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 11

Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?

 The current configuration file has not been saved.

 The current startup system software is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
 The next startup system software cannot be changed.
 The next startup system software can be changed by using the “startup system
software <startup-softwarename>.cc” command.

Question 12
An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destination MAC address of host D.

Which statement is true about regarding the ARP reply?

 The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A.
 The destination IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A.
 The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A.
 The destination IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.

Question 13
Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise network. Which of the following description is
the advantages of link aggregation? (Multiple Choice)

 Improves link bandwidth.

 Implements load sharing.
 Improves network reliability.
 Facilitates data copy for analysis.

6 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 14
If Host B also configured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address config will occur.
What will happen as a result?

 Host B will send an ICMP request to the destination with the configured IP address. If
a reply is received, the host will notify of an address conflict.
 Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the
destination 192.168.1.1, for which Host B will reply.
 Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the
destination 192.168.1.1, for which Host A will reply.
 Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destination 192.168.1.1.

Question 15
Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)

 The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be
different in different areas.
 The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
 The router ID must be configured manually.
 A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.

Question 16
If a network’s address is 192.168.1.0, the broadcast address of the network is 192.168.1.255.

 True
 False

7 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 17
Which of the following statements are true according to the following command output?

 The OSPFv3 area ID is 0.

 The OSPFv3 process ID is 1.
 The DR priority of the local router is 1.
 The router ID of the neighbor is 10.0.1.1.

Question 18
Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destination by using RIP, OSPF and
Static Route respectively. By default, the Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best
route.

 RIP
 OSPF
 RIPv2
 Static route

Question 19
On Huawei devices, you can use the undo summary command to prohibit automatic route
summarization of RIPv2.

 True
 False

8 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 20
Refer to the graphic.

In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts
without port translation. Host C wishes to access the public network while addresses are assigned to
Host A and Host B. What will occur as a result?

 The first public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced offline.
 The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced offline.
 Host C will be unable to forward traffic over the public network.
 All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.

Question 21
With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state information and route
information? (Choose two)

 DR
 BDR
 DRother
 All OSPF neighbors

Question 22
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are
true? (Choose three)

 The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

 The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
 The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
 The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

9 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 23
An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be
achieved? (Choose three)

 The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router
as the FTP client.
 The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router
as the FTP server.
 The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router
as the TFTP server.
 The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router
as the TFTP client.

Question 24
When configuring the PPP authentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are
necessary? (Choose three)

 Add the user name and password of the authenticated party to the local user list.
 Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
 Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP.
 On the authenticated party end, configure the user name and password that are sent
to authenticator.

Question 25
UDP is connectionless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?

 Internet Protocol
 Application Layer Protocol
 Network Layer Protocol
 Transmission Control Protocol

Question 26
What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when
the router is the IP destination?

 The MAC address of the switch.

 The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
 The MAC address of the host.
 The destination MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.

10 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 27
InARP resolves the protocol address of the remote device on each virtual circuit, including IP
addresses and IPX addresses.

 True
 False

Question 28
A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor.

Which of the following statements regarding routing update are correct? (Choose three)

 The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop
count value is less than 16.
 The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when
the next hop is the router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
 The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when
the next hop is not the router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
 The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when
the next hop is the router's neighbor and the cost value has been changed.

Question 29
Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct?
(Choose three)

 Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

 Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
 Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
 Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
 Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain

11 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 30
According to the configuration on R1 shown in the following figure, the two PCs can correctly access
the ISP network.

 True
 False

Question 31
Which of the following commands can be used to display the routing table on a Quidway router?

 display ip path
 display ip routing-table
 display interface
 display current-configuration

Question 32
Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)

 The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID.
 Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID.
 Two routers in different OSPF areas can have the same router ID.
 A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit dotted decimal format.

12 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 33
When configuring a router as a PPPoE client, which configuration is not necessary?

 Configuration of the dialer-rule

 Configuration of the dialer interface
 Configuration of an IP address on the dialer interface
 Configuration of a password on the dialer interface

Question 34
Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select four)

 SDRAM
 NVRAM
 Flash
 Hard Disk
 CF Card

Question 35
Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation.

Which parameters must be negotiated to establish the PPP connection? (Choose three).

 MRU
 Authentication password
 Magic-Number
 IP address

13 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 36
Refer to the graphic. OSPF is used on four routers that are in the same area and on the same network
segment. In this scenario, OSPF selects one DR and multiple BDRs to ensure backup.

 True
 False

Question 37
What is the total length of the port ID in STP?

 4 bits
 8 bits
 2 bits
 16 bits

Question 38
Which of the following applications can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are
transmitted from the source to the destination?

 Route
 Netstat
 Tracert
 Send

14 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 39
Which of the following statements are true about the default route?

 In a routing table, the route to 0.0.0.0 (with the mask being 0.0.0.0) is the default
route.
 If the destination address of a packet does not match any entry in the routing table,
the packet is forwarded through the default route.
 The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
 The routing table of any router must contain the default route.

Question 40
Which of the following statements are true about ACL deployment on Huawei devices? (Choose all
that apply)

 ACL can only be used in the outbound direction of an interface

 The same ACL can be used on multiple interfaces
 The ACL rules can only be configured in the following sequence: 10, 20, 30…
 ACLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF does not use UDP to
encapsulate packets
 ACLs can be used to match with the TCP/UDP port IDs of packets and to designate
the port ID range

Question 41
Which of the following statements are true about STP BPDUs?

 During initialization, each switch enabled with STP proactively sends configuration
BPDUs.
 BPDUs are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and the destination MAC address is a
multicast MAC address.
 After STP is enabled on a port, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs through the
designated port.
 STP has two types of packets: configuration BPDU and TCN BPDU.

Question 42
A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose
two).

 DUID-LL
 DUID-LLT
 DUID-EN
 DUID-LLC

15 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 43
Which of the following address types are of IPv6 addresses?

 Unicast address
 Anycast address
 Multicast address
 Broadcast address

Question 44
Which of the following authentication method is more secure for PPP?

 CHAP.
 MD5.
 SSH.
 PAP.

Question 45
When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is active, the link state will transit
from dead to establish.

Which of the following protocols is used to negotiate the link parameters during this phase?

 IP
 DHCP
 LCP
 NCP

Question 46
Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and configuration of
RIP?

 display protocol rip

 show rip
 display rip
 display this rip

16 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 47
A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination
address in the packet is not intended for itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

 Discard the packet.

 Check for a route that matches the destination address.
 Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the
destination address is available.
 Broadcast the ARP request packet.

Question 48
In the PPP protocol, which of the following encryption algorithms is used by CHAP?

 DES
 MD5
 AES
 None

Question 49
A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA.

Which configuration should be used?

 [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1

8080
 [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1
8080
 [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside
192.168.1.1 8080
 [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside
202.10.10.1 8080

17 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 50
Which of the following statements are correct about TTL field in IP packet? (Choose two)

 The maximum value of TTL is 65535.

 Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
 The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulating endlessly in a
network which can consume a lot of bandwidth.
 TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices
such as hub, LAN switch and router.

Question 51
The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the
command fails.

Which of the following may cause this?

 The interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

 The interface has been shutdown.
 The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
 The interface is an access port.

Question 52
During STP calculation, the port cost is associated with port bandwidth. Which of the following
statements about the relation between port cost and port bandwidth is true?

 Port cost decreases when port bandwidth increases.

 Port cost increases when port bandwidth increases.
 Port cost is consistent with port bandwidth.
 Port cost varies randomly according to port bandwidth.

Question 53
Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?

 System-view
 Router
 Quit
 User-view

18 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 54
An administrator of a company supporting a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on
the network as opposed to RIP. Which of the following points should the administrator use to
support his reasoning for this change? (Choose three)

 OSPF has no hop count limitation.

 OSPF has a lower routing update overhead.
 OSPF has a simpler configuration.
 OSPF supports faster convergence.

Question 55
In an RIP process on a Huawei device, which of the following configurations are correct for
advertising network 10.1.1.1/30? (Multiple Choice)

 network 10.1.1.0
 undo summary
 network 10.1.1.0
 version 2
 undo summary
 network 10.0.0.0
 undo summary
 network 10.1.0.0
 network 10.0.0.0

Question 56
On the VRP, what is the function of the “interface vlanif <vlan-id>” command?

 It is used to create a VLANIF interface

 It is used to create a VLANIF interface and enter the VLANIF interface view
 It is used to configure a VLAN for a VLANIF interface
 There is no such command

Question 57
OSPF allows for “multiple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).

 0
 1
 10
 100

19 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 58

Refer to the configuration output. RTA has been configured using AAA as shown, and associated with
the “huawei” domain. For users in the huawei domain, which authentication-scheme will be used?

 au1
 au2
 au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
 au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1

Question 59
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0”
has been configured.

Which following statements are correct? (Choose two).

 The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

 The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
 The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routing-table
 The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routing-table

Question 60
A user can view the information for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age time” in the
returned result of the command mean?

 The interval of updating an RIP packet

 The aging time of an RIP route
 The suppression time of an RIP route
 The time spent on switching between RIP routes

20 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 61
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network
administrator wishes to configure PPP authentication to improve security on this link.

Which PPP authentication method provides a more secure solution?

 CHAP
 PAP
 MD5
 SSH

Question 62
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication
method as PAP?

 ppp pap
 ppp authentication-pap
 ppp authentication-mode pap
 ppp pap-authentication

Question 63
Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)

 DLCI is locally significant

 DLCI is allocated by DTE
 The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
 The same DLCI can be configured on different physical interfaces

Question 64
Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)

 A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a

gratuitous ARP packet
 A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
 A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
 A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

21 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 65
The MAC address table of a switch is as follows. If the switch receives a data frame whose destination
MAC address is 5489-9885-18a8 from Eth0/0/2, which of the following statements is true?

 The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/2.

 The data frame is flooded.
 The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/1.
 The data frame is discarded.

Question 66
How many domains can be configured on a Huawei router?

 30
 31
 32
 33

Question 67
How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?

 The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

 The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
 The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
 The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

22 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 68
What are the three protocol components defined by PPP? (Choose three).

 Data encapsulation.
 LCP
 NCP
 IPCP

Question 69
The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website
www.huawei.com.

The command line shows a request time out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.

Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?

 The MAC address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
 The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.
 The IP address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
 The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.

Question 70
On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command
to specify the source address of an echo request message?

 -a
 -s
 -d
 -n

Question 71
There are two routers (RTA and RTB) between the source device and destination device. The Tracert
command is used to detect the path between the two devices. During detection of the first hop
(RTA), the source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to an interface with a large interface
number on the destination device. The TTL turns to 0 when the packet arrives at RTB, upon which
RTA sends an ICMP ______ message to the source device.

 Time Exceeded.
 Echo Request.
 Echo Reply.
 Port Unreachable.

23 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 72
As specified by the RSTP protocol, when a root port fails, which type of port will function as a new
root port and enters the forwarding state without any delay?

 Forwarding Port
 Alternate Port
 Backup Port
 Edge Port

Question 73
Which of the following statements are true about ICMP messages? (Multiple Choice)

 ICMP messages can record time, including the original time, packet receiving time,
and packet sending time.
 ICMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets but not at the transport layer.
 ICMP messages include error messages, control messages, request/response
messages, and update messages.
 ICMP does not support redirection.
 ICMP messages cannot be used to detect a path’s MTU.

Question 74
Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?

 ARP protocol
 RARP protocol
 InARP protocol
 Map protocol

Question 75
What is the main function of DHCP Discover packets?

 The client sends DHCP Discover packets for requesting to confirm the configuration
or renew the lease time of the IP address.
 The DHCP server sends DHCP Discover packets to respond DHCP Request packets.
 The DHCP Discover packet carries various configuration information.
 The client sends DHCP Discover packets to search for the DHCP server.

24 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 76
Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platform to configure the router? (Choose
three)

 Through the Console port

 Through Telnet
 Through the AUX port
 Through FTP

Question 77
In the MPLS domain, the full name of LER is label egress router.

 True
 False

Question 78
Refer to the graphic.

The switch is operating using STP. All default parameters have been maintained. Which port will be
assigned a designated port role?

 E0/0/2 of the hub.

 G0/0/2 of switch A.
 G0/0/1 of switch A.
 E0/0/1 of the hub.

25 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 79
According to the topology and configuration of interconnected interfaces of switches shown in the
figure, the data frame tagged with VLAN 10 can be forwarded correctly between the two switches.

 True
 False

Question 80
In the VRP system, what are the functions of Ctrl+Z?

 Return from the system view to the user view

 Exit from the current view
 Exit from the interface view
 Exit from the console interface view
 Return to the user view

26 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 81
On an FR network, when the fr inarp command is executed, the interface where static address
mapping entries have been configured sends an Inverse ARP Request packet to the remote device to
replace the static address mapping entries.

 True
 False

Question 82
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router.

Which of the following describes the likely reason for this?

 The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.

 TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
 UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
 The username and password had been modified.

Question 83
Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classified into? (Choose two)

 ICMP transport packet

 ICMP error reporting packet
 ICMP query packet
 ICMP application packet

Question 84
An authenticator router has been configured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”,
following which a user is created with the username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for
authentication. Which domain does this user belongs to?

 Area1 domain
 Area2 domain
 default domain
 default_admin domain

27 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 85
NAPT allows for multiple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address.

How does NAT distinguish between the different private addresses when mapping to the same public
address?

 The source MAC address is used.

 The destination MAC address is used.
 The source port number is used.
 The destination port number is used.

Question 86
FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system file on Huawei routers. Which of the following
statements are correct? (Choose three)

 Huawei router can be configured as FTP Client

 Huawei router can be configured as FTP Server
 Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Client
 Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Server

Question 87
In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the
following? (Choose all that apply.)

 Maximum number of Up member links

 Minimum number of Up member links
 Number of Up member interfaces
 Number of interfaces.

Question 88
VLSM can expand any IP network segment, including Class D addresses.

 TRUE
 FALSE

28 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 89
Which of the following statements about the “ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2
preference 20” command is true?

 The destination network address of the route is 10.0.12.2/32.

 The mask length of the destination network address of the route is 32 bits.
 The preference of the route is 100.
 The route must exist in the routing table.

Question 90
Which of the following encapsulation modes is/are supported by IPsec VPN?

 Routing mode
 Tunnel mode
 Transport mode
 Switching mode.

Question 91
An ACL does not filter traffic generated by the Huawei device towards other devices, but only filters
forwarded traffic, including traffic generated by other devices to access the Huawei device.

 True
 False

Question 92
A network administrator wishes to implement VLAN 10 to isolate certain users. It is common
however for these users to often change their physical location. Which of the following VLAN
implementations should be used?

 Port based VLAN assignment

 Protocol based VLAN assignment
 MAC based VLAN assignment
 IP subnet based VLAN assignment

Question 93
What is the total length of the VLAN frame defined by IEEE 802.1Q?

 4
 3
 2
 1

29 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 94
When a network engineer enters a command, the following information is displayed:

Error: Unrecognized command found at '^' position. Which of the following statements is true about
such information?

 The parameter type is incorrect.

 The entered command is incomplete.
 The entered parameter is not specified.
 No keyword is found.

Question 95
Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6 address
2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).

 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B

Question 96
After the keepalive function is enabled for a GRE tunnel, the local end of the GRE tunnel sends a
keepalive packet to the remote end every 10s.

 True
 False

Question 97
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured
the routers to run OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what behavior will occur as a
result of the configuration?

 The routers will build a neighbor relationship even though both routers are using the
same router ID.
 VRP will notify of a router ID conflict between the two routers.
 The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same
router ID.
 The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the
same router ID.

30 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 98
The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator
be in order to achieve this?

 User-view
 System-view
 Interface-view
 Protocol-view

Question 99
According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following
represent the correct sequence for direct route, static route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high
preference to low preference?

 Direct, Static, RIP, OSPF

 Direct, OSPF, Static, RIP
 Direct, OSPF, RIP, Static
 Direct, RIP, Static, OSPF

Question 100
A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be
configured on the enterprise network egress router in order to achieve this? (Choose all that apply.)

 NAT Easy IP
 DHCP
 BGP
 Default route

Question 101
Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)

 There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

 A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotiations that are defined
by OSPF protocol.
 Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
 Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR.

31 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 102
Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?

 Source interface
 Destination port number
 Protocol number
 Time-range

Question 103
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are
true? (Choose three)

 The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

 The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
 The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
 The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Question 104
Which of the following WLAN standards support operation in the 5GHz range? (Choose all that apply)

 802.11a
 802.11b
 802.11g
 802.11n

Question 105
In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is
used.

 display mode serial 1/0/0

 display controller
 display interface serial 1/0/0
 display current-config

32 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 106
<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform
configurations when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be
lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:

When an administrator first initializes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding
this warning is correct?

 If Auto-Config is required, the administrator should select ‘y’.

 If Auto-Config is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which
subsequent configuration of the DHCP server, routing, DNS server and VTY user configuration
is lost.
 When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is active.
 When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is inactive.

Question 107
A DHCP Offer packet can carry only one DNS server address.

 TRUE
 FALSE

Question 108
Refer to the graphic.

The routing table includes direct routes and static routes and the preference of the direct routes
cannot be changed.

 True
 False

33 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 109
Which of the following parameters must be specified when configuring static mapping for Frame
Relay network? (Choose two)

 Local DLCI
 Remote DLCI
 Local network layer protocol address
 Remote network layer protocol address

Question 110
After checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a
TWOWAY state with the peering router.

What can be understood from this information? (Choose two)

 The routers are configured using the same process ID

 The routers are configured using the same area ID
 The routers are configured using wrong router ID
 The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network

Question 111
A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the
device, found that he is unable to use the system-view command to enter the system-view.

What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)

 The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the
system-view command.
 The user’s telnet software restricts use of this command.
 The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view
command.
 The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the
user.

Question 112
On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved
by the command line interface? (Choose two)

 Up cursor key < >

 Left cursor key < >
 Ctrl+P
 Ctrl+U

34 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 113
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured RIPv2 in the two routers. What will happen
after configuring the following commands: (Choose all that apply)

 RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

 RTB will have the route learned from the RTA
 RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
 RTB will have no neighbor relationship with RTA

Question 114

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?

 Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

 Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
 Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
 Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permitted.

35 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 115
Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destination MAC
address.

Which statement is true?

 The destination IP address of the ARP request is Host C.

 The destination MAC address of this ARP request is Host C.
 The destination IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
 The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA.

Question 116
A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem.
The client assumed that the problem was with the port configuration.

The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)

 21
 80
 20
 50649

36 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 117

As shown in the preceding VTY configuration, the user privilege level is set to 3.

 True
 False

Question 118
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured OSPF on the two routers, following which he
then implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have
on the network? (Multiple Choice)

 The link information advertised by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database
of RTA.
 The OSPF neighbor relationship will fail between two routers.
 The configuration will not affect the OSPF neighbor relationship between the two
routers.
 The link information advertised by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State
Database of RTA.

Question 119
In STP, the priority of the STP root switch ranges from 0 to 65536.

 True
 False

37 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 120
When a router is powered on, the router reads the configuration file saved in the default save
directory to get itself initialized. If the configuration file does not exist in the default save directory,
what does the router use to initialize itself?

 New configuration file

 Initial configuration file
 Default parameters
 Current configuration file

Question 121
Which of the following descriptions about STP are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)

 A layer-2 switching network can have only one designated switch.

 All the ports of the root switch are root ports.
 All the ports of the root switch are designated ports.
 The switch with the smallest priority value is elected as non-root switch.

Question 122

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in
order to assign an IP address to the customer’s terminal device.

Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP
addresses?

 dhcp select relay

 lease day 1
 lease 24
 lease 0

Question 123
Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei
router?

 system-view
 enable
 configure terminal
 interface system

38 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 124
Which of the following statements regarding the routing table are correct? (Choose all that apply.)

 The next hop in the routing table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be
used for packet forwarding.
 The routes from generated by different protocols have different preferences.
 The metrics of different routing protocols are comparable.
 The metrics of different routing protocols are not comparable

Question 125
In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

 multiple areas
 Router-ID
 authentication
 multicast updates

Question 126
Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6
address 2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to configure the
interface IPv6 address?

 DHCPv6
 Auto-link
 ARP
 EUI-64

Question 127
Which of the following configurations regarding default route configuration is correct?

 [Quidway] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1

 [Quidway] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 172.16.2.1
 [Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1
 [Quidway] ip route static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1

39 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 128
The IPv6 address architecture does not include which of the following address types?

 unicast
 multicast
 broadcast
 anycast

Question 129
Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose
three)

 Same DLCI number is configured on the same router

 LMI type mismatch
 Frame Relay encapsulation type mismatch
 Incorrect configuration of the DLCI number

40 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 130
As shown in the following figure, switch A and router A are connected through two links. The two
links are aggregated in manual load balancing mode. The aggregation port number is 1. The
aggregated link needs to carry VLAN tag 100. Switch A uses the trunk link.

Which of the following configurations need to be performed on switch A?

41 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 131
How can the default route be generated? (Choose all that apply.)

 Manually configured.
 Automatically generated by the router.
 Generated by dynamic routing protocols.
 Generated by link layer protocols.

Question 132
An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only
supports one single mode.

Which of the following represents this mode?

 Full-duplex
 Half-duplex
 Auto-negotiation
 Simplex

Question 133
Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship establishment?

 display ospf neighbor

 display ospf brief
 display ospf peer
 display ospf interface

Question 134
If the MAC address of an interface is 0EE0-FFFE-0FEC, the corresponding EUI-64 address is ( ).

 0CE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
 0EE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
 0EE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC
 0CE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC

42 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 135
Which of the following commands can be used to view the current configurations on a Huawei
router?

 display current-configuration
 display saved-configuration
 view saved-configuration
 show startup-configuration

Question 136
<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
Warning: The action will delete the saved configuration in the device.
The configuration will be erased to reconfigure. Continue? [Y/N]:

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)

 A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved configuration file.
 The saved-configuration file that the device starts with can be erased.
 The saved-configuration will be deleted after typing N
 The saved-configuration file will be replaced with the current-configuration.

Question 137
Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both
peering devices?

 Encapsulation mode
 Transform mode
 Proposal name
 authentication algorithm

Question 138
What are the advantages of OSPF?

 OSPF supports packet authentication.

 OSPF can load balance traffic among equal-cost routes.
 OSPF supports Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR).
 OSPF supports area partition.

43 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 139
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertised 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to
the RIP network. Which routes will exist in the IP routing table of RTB? (Choose all that apply)

 10.0.0.0/8
 192.168.1.1/32
 10.1.12.1/32
 192.168.1.0/24

Question 140
A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation
protocol.

Which of the following commands is required to be configured at the serial interface view?

 link-protocol ppp
 encapsulation ppp
 enable ppp
 address ppp

Question 141
On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level,
Monitoring level, Configuration level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is
permitted to configure service but is not permitted to operate the file system?

 Visit level
 Monitoring level
 Configuration level
 Management level

44 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 142
The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member
interfaces operate at different rates. In terms of the resulting behavior, which of the following is
true?

 The two switches will not be able to communicate.

 The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
 The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
 The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.

Question 143
In the case of Huawei router, the Tracert command uses UDP to encapsulate probe packets.

 True
 False

Question 144
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer
encapsulation type of a serial interface as HDLC?

 encapsulation hdlc
 link-protocol hdlc
 hdlc enable
 link-protocol ppp

45 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 145
Refer to the graphic.

Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. When interface G0/0/1.2 of RTA
receives a frame from Host B, what will RTA do?

 RTA will immediately forward the frame via interface G0/0/1.1.

 RTA remove the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame.
 RTA will remove the VLAN tag and add a new tag for VLAN10 before forwarding the
frame.
 RTA will discard the frame.

Question 146
Which of the following network types does OSPF support? (Multiple Choice)

 Point-to-Point.
 Broadcast.
 Non-Broadcast Multi-Access.
 Point-to-Multipoint.

46 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 147
Which of the following statements regarding static and dynamic routing is incorrect?

 The static route can be easily configured and managed on the enterprise network.
 The use of dynamic routing is more convenient for the administrator to manage the
network following network convergence.
 The static route can automatically recover when a link failure is encountered.
 Dynamic routing will use more resources than static routes.

Question 148
According to the following configuration of Router C, how many global unicast address prefixes are
advertised by Router C?

 1
 4
 2
 3

47 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 149
Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network
address and DLCI?

 display fr interface
 display fr
 display fr map-info
 display fr brief

Question 150
The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface
cards of both devices operates at 100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses
full duplex mode.

What will occur as a result?

 The end stations cannot communicate.

 The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large
amounts of traffic.
 The end stations will operate normally
 The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of
large amounts of traffic.

Question 151
What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?

 6
 8
 10
 12

Question 152
PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentication protocols such as ( ). (Choose
two)

 PAP
 MD5
 CHAP
 SSH

48 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 153
Which of the following configurations regarding static route are correct? (Choose all that apply)

 ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 serial 0

 ip route-static 10.0.0.2 16 129.1.0.0
 ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 10.0.0.2
 ip route-static 129.1.0.0.255.255.0.0 10.0.0.2

Question 154
You can configure a static route on a broadcast interface by specifying the next-hop IP address or
outbound interface.

 True
 False

Question 155
Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectivity are false? (Choose
three)

 The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is
correctly inserted into the host’s Ethernet port.
 The ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify
that the TCP/IP protocol suite is functioning correctly.
 The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local
gateway.
 The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems
between the host and the local gateway.

Question 156
While inspecting packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the
destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3.

What can the administrator determine from this?

 The MAC address is a unicast address.

 The MAC address is a broadcast address
 The MAC address is a multicast address.
 The MAC address is incorrect.

49 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 157
On Huawei switches, VLAN 4095 cannot be created and VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.

 TRUE
 FALSE

Question 158

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator configured the device using the commands in
the configuration output. Regarding these commands, which statement is false?

 The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

 Following configuration, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
 A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege
level.
 The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’.

50 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 159
The output of the “display vlan” command on a switch is as follows.

Which of the following statements are true?

 When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are
untagged.
 When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 10, the frames are
untagged.
 When GE0/0/2 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are
tagged.
 Four VLANs are manually created.

Question 160
Which of the following entries is not included in the routing table?

 source address
 next hop
 destination address
 cost

51 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 161
Which of the following OSPF versions is specific to IPv6?

 OSPFv1
 OSPFv2
 OSPFv3
 OSPFv4

Question 162
Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a “single” OSPF
area are correct? (Choose two)

 The link-state databases that all routers build are identical.

 The link-state databases that all routers build are different.
 The routing-tables that all routers calculate are different.
 The routing-tables that all routers calculate are identical.

Question 163
An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one
switch support Fast Ethernet, while the ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts
connected to one switch are able to communicate, however communication between the two
switches fails.

What is the possible reason for this?

 The ports have disabled auto-negotiation.

 One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the
port of the other switch.
 The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the
other switch is using full duplex mode.
 A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.

Question 164
The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards
frames based on which of the following parameters?

 The same source or destination IP address.

 The same source or destination MAC address.
 The same protocol type.
 The same source or destination port number.

52 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 165
Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is
powered on for the first time?

 SSL
 SSH
 Console port
 Telnet

Question 166
The IKE protocol is used to set up an SA for IPsec automatic negotiation. Identity authentication can
be performed when the IP address of the initiator changes dynamically.

 True
 False

Question 167
Which of the following statements is true about the MAC address table of a switch?

 The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator.

 The MAC address 5489-989d-1d30 is manually configured by the administrator.
 The MAC address 5489-9885-18a8 is manually configured by the administrator.
 After the switch restarts, all the MAC addresses need to be learned again.

53 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 168
Which area ID is used by OSPFv3 to identify the backbone area?

 0
 3
 2
 1

Question 169
If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security
Associations (SA) are required in total?

 1
 2
 3
 4

Question 170

Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface
Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1 of the router. Which IP address will the client obtain?

 An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

 An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
 The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
 An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.

54 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 171
According to the following topology and configuration, R1 and R2 are connected through low-speed
serial cables and PPP is used to encapsulate data link layer packets. When the Holdtime values of R1
and R2 are different, PPP negotiation and communication fail.

 True
 False

Question 172
Which of the following problems are caused by routing loops? (Choose three)

 Slow convergence
 Packets circulate between routers
 Router restarting
 Inconsistency of routing information

Question 173
If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the
authenticator?

 Authenticate-Ack
 Authenticate-Nak
 Authenticate-Reject
 Authenticate-Reply

55 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 174

Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the
packet to the destination host 9.1.4.5?

 The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet
because the preference of OSPF is higher than the preference of RIP.
 The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet
because the cost of RIP is lower than that of OSPF.
 The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet
because the outgoing interface is an Ethernet interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet
interface is faster than the forwarding speed of a serial interface
 The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet
because the router will match the most specific address.

Question 175
Which of the following data packets are the OPSF protocol packets encapsulated into?

 HTTP packet
 TCP packet
 IP packet
 UDP packet

Question 176
On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto
negotiation"? (Choose two)

 duplex negotiation auto

 duplex auto-negotiation
 duplex auto
 undo duplex

56 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 177
Two routers are configured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router.

Which of the following is true in the event that the network administrator does not configure a
Router-ID?

 The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID.
 The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID.
 The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID.
 No router ID will be assigned to the router.

Question 178
If a network’s broadcast address is 172.16.1.255, which of the following addresses can be the
network address?

 172.16.2.0
 172.16.1.253
 172.16.1.128
 172.16.1.1

Question 179
In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC
bits set generated by the root switch?

 Root port
 Backup port
 Designated port
 Alternate port

Question 180
A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An
administrator discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of
the DHCP server’s address pool.

What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).

 Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that
happen to be within a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server.
 The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own
address in the 169.254.0.0 address range.
 The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own
address in the 127.254.0.0 address range.
 All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned.

57 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 181
If an Ethernet data frame carries Length/Type = 0x8100, which of the following cannot be the
payload of the data frame?

 RSTP data frame

 OSPF packet
 ARP response packet
 STP data frame

Question 182
Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which fields?

 TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.

 ESP, TCP and Data.
 ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.
 ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth.

Question 183
Which of the following can be displayed on the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP) to indicate that GE
port 2 on subcard 0 in slot 3 of a router?

 interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0

 interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/2
 interface Ethernet 3/0/2
 interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2

Question 184
[Huawei]rip 1
[Huawei-rip-1]version 2

Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to configure RIP. Which other command
needs to configured for RIP routes to be advertised?

 import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

 network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
 network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
 network 192.168.1.0

58 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 185
Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a
Huawei router through the Console port?

 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control
 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control
 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control

Question 186
According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow
control?

 Physical layer
 Data link layer
 Network layer
 Transport layer

Question 187
In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC
address table based on received data frames.

 True
 False

Question 188
The following configuration commands implement route backup on RTA for a route to the same
destination 10.1.1.0.

 TRUE
 FALSE

59 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 189
Refer to the graphic.

A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA. Which configuration should be used?

 [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www.inside 192.168.1.1

8080
 [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www.inside 202.10.10.1
8080
 [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www.inside
192.168.1.1 8080
 [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www.inside
202.10.10.1 8080

Question 190
Which of the following is abbreviation of VRP?

 Versatile Routine Platform

 Virtual Routing Platform
 Virtual Routing Plane
 Versatile Routing Platform

Question 191
The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no
loopback interface.

Which value will be used as the router ID?

 The lowest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.

 The highest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.
 The IP address of the management interface.
 The priority value of the router.

60 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 192
[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the configuration output. What does the value “2000” refer to?

 It represents the ACL number.

 It represents the NAT number.
 It represents the translated port number.
 It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is
returned to the public address pool.

Question 193
An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one
AR2200 router is out of date. The administrator needs to upgrade the VRP software.

Which of the following options regarding file transfer is false?

 The AR2200 router can function as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
 The AR2200 router can function as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
 The AR2200 router can function as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
 The AR2200 router can function as an FTP client to support the upgrade.

Question 194
The following figure shows a routing table. When this router receives a packet with a destination IP
address of 9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet based on the route 9.1.0.0/16 because the
matched bit number in this route is the largest.

 True
 False

61 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 195

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the
configuration of the ACL on RTA? (Choose two).

 Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

 Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied.
 Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied.
 Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.

Question 196
The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots,
which message will the host first send to the DHCP server?

 DHCP DISCOVER
 DHCP REQUEST
 DHCP OFFER
 DHCP ACK

Question 197
What benefits does port aggregation yield? (Choose three)

 Improves link bandwidth

 Implements load sharing
 Improves network reliability
 Facilitates data copy for analysis

Question 198
Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)

 [Huawei]ospf area 0
 [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
 [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
 [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable

62 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 199
The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps
can the administrator take? (Choose two)

 Change the work mode to full duplex of each end station.

 Link the end stations together using a switch.
 Change the work mode to half duplex of each end station.
 Link the end stations together using a hub.

Question 200
Refer to the configuration output. Which following statements are correct? (Multiple choice)

 VLAN 1 cannot pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.

 VLAN 1 can pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.
 Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass
vlan all” must be used to renew the default configurations.
 Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass
vlan 2 to 4096” must be used to renew the default configurations.

Question 201
On the command line interface of Huawei AR routers, the role of the Save command is to Save the
current system time.

 TRUE
 FALSE

63 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 202

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the
configuration of the ACL on RTA?

 Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be denied.

 Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
 Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be denied.
 Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Question 203
The authentication, authorization and accounting schemes and HWTACACS or RADIUS server
templates created on AR routers take effect only after being applied to a domain.

 TRUE
 FALSE

Question 204
In OSPFv3, router IDs can be used automatically generated by the system.

 True
 False

Question 205
Which of the following is/are not included in AAA?

 Audit
 Authentication
 Authorization
 Accounting

Question 206
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two
serial interfaces are different, in PPP LCP negotiated stage, what will happen?

 LCP negotiation will fail

 Negotiation will use the smaller value
 Negotiation will use the larger value
 Negotiation will use 1500

64 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 207
Refer to the graphic, after the ping 10.1.1.2 command is executed on R1, LSW1 receives a tagged
data frame from VLAN 10 on LSW2.

 TRUE
 FALSE

Question 208
Which of the following descriptions regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)

 IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

 IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
 IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
 IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.

65 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 209
A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network.

Which protocols will be used during this process? (Choose two)

 ICMP
 TCP
 ARP
 UDP

Question 210
Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the
interface encapsulated with Frame Relay?

 fr inarp
 fr reverse-arp
 inverse-arp
 reverse-arp

Question 211
On the VRP platform, which of the following commands is used to configure the Router ID of a router
as 1.1.1.1?

 <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
 [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
 [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
 [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

Question 212
Which of the following statements is true about the PPP configuration and deployment?

 PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.

 PPP supports both CHAP and PAP authentication.
 PPP cannot change the keepalive time.
 PPP does not support bidirectional authentication.

66 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 213
Assuming all STP enabled switches have the same bridge priority. The MAC address of switch A is 00-
e0-fc-00-00-40, the MAC address of switch B is 00-e0-fc-00-00-10, the MAC address of switch C is 00-
e0-fc-00-00-20, and the MAC address of switch D is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80.
Which switch will be elected as the root switch?

 Switch A
 Switch B
 Switch C
 Switch D

Question 214
Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet
are true? (Choose three)

 A Database Description packet contains all information about each LSA.

 A Database Description packet contains only the header of an LSA.
 The header of an LSA is the unique identifier of the LSA.
 The header of an LSA is only a small portion of all the data of the LSA.

Question 215
On Huawei AR G3 Series routers, which authentication modes does AAA support? (Choose all that
apply.)

 None
 Local
 Radius
 802.1X

Question 216
If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?

 LMI protocol
 ARP protocol
 RARP protocol
 InARP protocol

67 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 217
Which of the following is the feature of port-based VLAN assignment?

 VLAN IDs are allocated based on the protocol type and encapsulation format of data
frames.
 The VLAN does not need to be configured again when hosts move.
 The VLAN tag is added to data frames based on the IP address carried in the frames.
 The VLAN needs to be configured again when hosts move.

Question 218
In RSTP mode, both alternate and backup ports cannot forward user traffic but can receive, process,
and send BPDU.

 True
 False

Question 219
A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.

 Source MAC address

 Destination MAC address
 Source IP address
 Destination IP address

Question 220
Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

 display ip interface brief

 display current-configuration
 display pppoe-client session packet
 display pppoe-client session summary

68 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 221
Refer to the graphic.

VLANs 10 and 20 have been created on both SWA and SWC. VLAN 10 has been manually created on
SWB. SWB has learned VLAN 20 from SWA via GVRP, allowing the hosts to belong to different VLANs
as shown. If port Interface G0/0/1 on SWB is changed to fixed mode, what will happen?

 Host A will still be able to communicate with Host C.

 Host B will still be able to communicate with Host D.
 Hosts that belong to the same VLAN will still be able to communicate.
 All hosts will be unable to communicate with any other host.

69 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 222
Refer to the graphic.

A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0.

Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose all that apply.)

 The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of
the router interface G0/0/0.
 The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of
the switch.
 The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
 The destination IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the Router interface
G0/0/0.

Question 223
An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password,
however the company wishes to introduce another two administrators and provide unique user
credentials and privilege levels for telnet access to the network devices.

What action can be taken? (Choose three)

 Configure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a different password.
 The authentication mode must be changed to AAA.
 Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
 A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access

70 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 224
Which of the following descriptions regarding eSight is not correct?

 eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.

 eSight supports only Huawei devices.
 eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
 eSight supports the backup of configuration files and network traffic analysis.

Question 225
An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process.

Which IP address may be used by the client?

 0.0.0.0
 127.0.0.1
 169.254.2.33
 255.255.255.255

Question 226
A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this
server to be linked to this interface on the switch.

Which method can be used to achieve this?

 Configure a static ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the
switch.
 Configure a static MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the
interface in the switch.
 Configure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP
address.
 It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.

Question 227
An AR2200 router is required to be reconfigured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve
this? (Choose all that apply.)

 Reset the saved configuration.

 Clear the current configuration.
 Reboot the AR2200.
 Assign the configuration file to be used at next startup.

71 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 228
Two end stations in a point-to-point network perform address resolution.

Which of the following statements is correct?

 The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a unicast MAC
address.
 The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a broadcast IP
address.
 The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a unicast MAC
address.
 The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a broadcast MAC
address.

Question 229
What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?

 remote logical channel ID

 local DLCI
 remote interface ID
 remote node ID

Question 230
Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

 DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.

 If the priorities of two routers are different, the router with the lower priority will be
elected as DR.
 If the priorities of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be
elected as DR.
 DR and BDR must be adjacent.

Question 231
Which of the following protocols can be used on a Layer 2 network with redundant links to prevent
loops?

 UDP
 VRRP
 STP
 ARP

72 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 232
The RADIUS information of the router is configured as follows.

Which of the following statements is/are correct?

 The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1.

 The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1.
 The source IP address of the RADIUS packets sent by the router is 200.0.12.2.
 The IP address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1.

Question 233

Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the
behavior is not as expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is
the source of the problem?

 R2 has configured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

 R2 has enabled split horizon.
 R1 is using authentication, however R2 is not.
 R2 is operating using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.

73 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 234
You can run the “startup saved-configuration backup.cfg” command on the user interface of the
Versatile Routing Platform (VRP) to specify the “backup.cfg” file as the configuration file for next
startup.

 True
 False

Question 235
Which of the following technologies is used to bind MAC addresses to interfaces on a switch?

 SEP.
 Port security.
 ACL.
 NAT.

Question 236
On the network shown in the figure, if all links are Ethernet links and all routers run OSPF, how many
DRs will be elected on the entire network?

 2
 4
 3
 1

74 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 237
Which of the following SNMP packets is/are sent by the agent on the managed device to the NMS?

 Get-Request
 Response
 Get-Next-Request
 Set-Request

Question 238
Which of the following descriptions about STP designated ports is correct?

 Designated ports forward frames destined for the root switch.

 Designated ports represent the path leading to the root switch.
 Each bridge can have only one designated port.
 Designated ports are responsible for sending BPDU to connected network segments.

Question 239

A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a
Huawei AR series router.

Which statement regarding the output is correct?

 The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

 The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
 The path between the source and destination is not OK.
 The network administrator changed the default TTL value.

75 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 240
Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

 An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before

configuring an OSPF area.
 The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
 A single area can be configured using any supported area number.
 All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0.

Question 241
FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image.

Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?

 binary mode
 ASCII mode
 byte mode
 letter mode

Question 242
A user accesses a server supporting AAA, for which the authorization mode on the AAA server has
been configured using the command “authorization-mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”.

Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).

 If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using local
authentication.
 If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using remote
authentication.
 If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentication.
 The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.

Question 243
Which of the following authentication methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)

 Password authentication
 AAA local authentication
 MD5 authentication
 No authentication

76 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 244
An administrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The
administrator has been instructed that after logging into the router, he must first permanently erase
the current configuration file config.zip from the system.

Which command should he use to achieve this?

 delete /force config.zip

 delete /unreserved config.zip
 reset config.zip
 clear config.zip

Question 245

Refer to the capture output. The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which
statement regarding the captured packets is incorrect?

 This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.
 The three packets contain no application data.
 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connection.

Question 246
An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch office, which method can be
used?

 Telnet
 FTP
 Console Connection
 DHCP

77 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 247
Refer to the graphic.

The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure
a default gateway.

What effect will this have on the hosts?

 Neither host will be affected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the
peer.
 Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.
 Hosts will be unable to communicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
 The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations.

Question 248
Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?

 Static route
 Dynamic route
 Route import
 NAT

Question 249
In RSTP, a backup port can replace a faulty root port.

 TRUE
 FALSE

78 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 250
Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

 A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

 A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
 A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
 A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.

Question 251
Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)

 NAT is the abbreviation for "Network Address Translation".

 NAT is used for translation between private and public network addresss.
 When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not
required.
 NAT provides an effective way to solve the problem of insufficient IP addresses.

79 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 252
Refer to the graphic, 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address learned by a switch through ARP
and the host changes the IP address three times.

 TRUE
 FALSE

Question 253
A network administrator wishes to assign an IP address to a router interface G0/0/0. Which of the
following IP addresses can be assigned?

 192.168.10.112/30
 237.6.1.2/24
 145.4.2.55/26
 127.3.1.4/28

Question 254
Refer to the graphic.

Both switches are operating using STP. With exception to those shown, all other default parameters
have been maintained. Which port will be blocked?

 Port G0/0/1 of switch A.

 Port G0/0/2 of switch B.
 Port G0/0/1 of switch B.
 Port G0/0/2 of switch A.

80 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 255
Which SNMP version focuses on two main aspects, namely security and administration. The security
aspect is addressed by offering both strong authentication and data encryption for privacy. The
administration aspect is focused on two parts, namely notification originators and proxy forwarders.

 SNMPv1
 SNMPv2
 SNMPv2c
 SNMPv3

Question 256
In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

 multiple areas
 Router-ID
 authentication
 multicast updates

Question 257
Which of the following information must be configured for a DHCPv6 relay agent?

 DHCPv6 address pool

 DNS server address
 IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 server
 DHCPv6 DUID

Question 258
Which of the following steps are necessary to configure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)

 Configuration of a router ID
 Enabling of an OSPF process
 Specifying an OSPF area
 Configuration of the network segments within each area

81 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 259
Refer to the graphic, which of the following statements is true about OSPF topology and
configuration?

 A stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.

 After the default network type of the interface on R1 is restored to broadcast, a
stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.
 After the default network type of the interface on R1 is restored to broadcast and the
hello packet sending interval is changed to 10s, a stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be
set up between R1 and R2.
 Compared with R1, R2 is more likely to become the DR because the DR priority of the
interface on R2 is lower than that of R1.

82 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 260
The network administrator needs to configure static NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to
communicate with Host C.

Which command is correct?

 [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

 [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0
 [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
 [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1

Question 261
What functions does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)

 Neighbor discovery
 Deletion of unreachable neighbors
 Maintaining of neighbor relationships
 Negotiation of parameters among adjacent ports

Question 262
Which of the following descriptions regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is correct?

 The TTL defines how many packets the source can send.
 The TTL defines the duration during which the source can send packets.
 The TTL value will decrement by 1 each time the packet is routed.
 The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed.

83 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 263
Which layer of the OSI reference model does a router work at?

 Application layer
 Data link layer
 Network layer
 Transport layer

Question 264
Refer to the configuration output.

Which of the following statements regarding the configuration output are correct? (Choose all that
apply.)

 The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 10.

 The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 1.
 The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 10.
 The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 1.

84 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 265
Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and
RTE? (Choose all that apply)

 When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
 When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
 When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1
 When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0

Question 266
Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay
addresses?

 display fr interface
 display fr map-info
 display fr inarp-info
 display interface brief

85 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 267
When a network administrator configures STP in the network, BPDU begin to be sent by switch.
Which of the following statements regarding the BPDU frame are correct?

 A BPDU uses the IEEE 802.3 standard frame type

 A BPDU uses the Ethernet II standard frame type
 The BPDU frame’s control field is 3
 The destination MAC address field of a BPDU frame is a broadcast address

Question 268
Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?

 The switch learns MAC addresses automatically.

 The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
 The layer-2 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
 The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer.

Question 269
On Huawei switches, you can run the vlan batch command to create multiple VLANs in batches.

 True
 False

Question 270
When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)

 The source MAC address

 The destination MAC address
 The source IP address
 The destination IP address

86 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 271
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save

Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

 The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

 The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
 The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the
configuration.
 The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.

Question 272
The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0/25 is 192.168.1.128.

 True
 False

Question 273
How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the
path along which packet is sent from source to destination?

 3
 4
 6
 8

Question 274
The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router.

How can this be achieved?

 A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and
the console port of the router.
 A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and
the ethernet port of the router.
 A connection should be established between the console port of the terminal and the
ethernet port of the router.use console cable connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s
console port.
 A connection should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the
console port of the router.

87 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 275
On Sx7 series switches, which of the following VLANs can be removed by using command “undo”?
(Choose all that apply.)

 vlan 1.
 vlan 2.
 vlan 1024.
 vlan 4094.

Question 276
In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP
operating system used to set?

 Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

 Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
 Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
 Destination IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet

Question 277
In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which
packet?

 PADI
 PADO
 PADR
 PADS

Question 278
Which of the following route entries can be aggregated into 10.0.0.24/29? (Choose all that apply.)

 10.0.0.25/30
 10.0.0.23/30
 10.0.0.26/30
 10.0.0.22/30

88 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 279
Refer to the graphic. GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are configured as hybrid interfaces. Which
of the following statements are true? (Choose all that apply)

 The administrative department and the finance department cannot communicate

with each other because the VLANs of the two departments are different.
 The data frames sent by the administrative department carry tagged VLAN 20 on the
switch.
 On the switch, the data frames sent by the finance department carry tagged VLAN
20.
 The switch can be a Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch because communications do not need
to be transmitted through a Layer 3 gateway.
 If GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are changed to trunk ports, the administrative
department and finance department can communicate with each other.

89 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 280
The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address.

What is the possible reason?

 Communication failures occur between the user and the router.

 The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
 Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
 SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.

Question 281
Which of the following statements about static route preference on Huawei devices is false?

 Static route preference ranges from 0 to 255.

 Default static route preference is 60.
 Static route preference is either internal or external. Administrators can modify
external preferences.
 If static route preference is 255, the route cannot be used.

Question 282
Which of the following mechanisms are used for flow control? (Choose three)

 Acknowledgement
 Buffering
 Source quench messages
 Windowing

Question 283
If AAA authentication is used on Huawei devices and the remote server does not respond, the
authentication can be performed on network devices.

 True
 False

90 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 284
<Huawei>

Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform
configurations when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be
lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:

Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed,
however after rebooting this router, the notice disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose all
that apply.)

 This notice only appears during the very first device startup.
 The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the
notice to disappear.
 The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration.
 The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the configuration.

Question 285
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route has been
learned via OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a
metric of 4.

Which route (s) will be found in the routing table?

 The RIPv2 route.

 The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
 The OSPF route.
 Neither of these routes will be found in the routing table.

Question 286
What is the function of the “ip address ppp-negotiate” command?

 Enables the function of requesting for an IP address from the peer device.
 Enables the function of accepting the request for an IP address from the remote
device.
 Enables the function of statically allocating IP addresses to the peer.
 None of the above.

91 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 287
NAPT uses the same public address but different port numbers to translate private addresses.

Which statement regarding the port number is correct?

 It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.

 It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
 It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
 An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.

Question 288
The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose all that apply.)

 Discovery stage
 DHCP stage
 PPPoE Session stage
 PPP connecting stage.

Question 289
A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destination IP address of an
external website, however the trace path displayed only a timeout result.

Which of the following statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)

 The source router had shutdown the ICMP function.

 This destination IP address does not exist.
 The gateway cannot find a route to the destination.
 This is a normal phenomenon.

Question 290
Which of the following OSPF packets can ensure LSA update reliability?

 DD
 LSR
 LSU
 LSACK

92 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 291
Refer to the graphic. Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. What must be
configured on interface G0/0/1.1 of RTA to achieve this?

 dot1q termination vid 1.

 dot1q termination vid 10.
 dot1q termination vid 20.
 dot1q termination vid 30.

Question 292
Whilst configuring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands.

Which of the following will help support the administrator? (Choose two)

 TAB
 question mark
 ctrl+b
 ctrl+c

93 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 293
On an FR network, the DLCI identifies a virtual circuit on an interface. The DLCI must be unique
during planning and deployment.

 True
 False

Question 294
Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be configured on a router’s interface? (Choose two).

 fe80:13dc::1/64
 ff00:8a3c::9b/64
 ::1/128
 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64

Question 295
An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator
wishes to update the VRP software.

What should he/she do?

 The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and
directly upgrade the device.
 The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP software, by configuring the
AR2200 router as an FTP client.
 The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200
router as a TFTP client to download the VRP software from the server.
 The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the
device, and upgrade the VRP software.

Question 296
In a small network supporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng.

Which of the following commands should be used to enable this protocol?

 [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
 [RTA]ripng 1 enable
 <RTA>ripng 1 enable
 [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable

94 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 297
Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose all that apply.)

 IP
 OSPF
 BGP
 IPX

Question 298
A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP
address from the DHCP server, the user decided to modify the IP address manually.

In what way may this affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

 The client may experience an IP address conflict.

 The client may access the network normally.
 The client’s interface connection will shutdown.
 The client will associate with another DHCP server.

Question 299
Which of the following fields are contained in an ARP packet?

 Source Hardware Address

 Hardware Type
 Source Protocol Address
 Operation Code

Question 300
10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0

Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true?
(Choose two)

 The address 10.0.23.3 has been configured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
 The route preference has been changed by the administrator.
 The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
 The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.

95 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 301

Refer to the graphic. A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 5489-98ec-f011.
What operation will occur on the switch?

 The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
 The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the
source.
 The switch will flood the frame via all ports, with exception of the port on which the
frame was received.
 The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address
table.

96 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 302
On the network shown in the figure, if all routers run OSPF, which router is elected as the BDR?

 Router B
 Router A
 Router D
 Router C

97 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 303
Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the configuration in
one of the enterprise routers had been changed.

What actions can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes? (Choose three)

 The administrator should limit access by setting the login privilege of users to 0.
 The administrator should configure AAA to manage user authorization on the router.
 The administrator should configure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage
the router.
 The administrator should configure port-security on the router.

Question 304
An OSPF area is a collection of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defines that routers that have
the same ( ) belong to the same OSPF area.

 neighbors
 LSDB
 LSA
 adjacency

Question 305
To provide the information about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the
destination, which of the following does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?

 Destination port
 Source port
 Destination IP address
 Source IP address

Question 306
Segment routing-traffic engineering (SR-??) is a new ?? tunneling technology that uses SR as a control
protocol. All nodes of an SR-TE tunnel, including the ingress and transit nodes, must be aware of the
tunnel and complete label distribution and forwarding.

 True
 False

98 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 307
Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect function? (Choose two)

 When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be
forwarded, and the source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect
message will be sent by the router to the source.
 When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the
destination IP of the data, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
 When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be
forwarded, and the source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP Redirect
message will be sent by the source to the router.
 When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be
forwarded, and the source is on a different segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect
message will be sent by the router to the source

Question 308
What is the default authentication mode for the default_admin domain?

 None
 Local
 Radius
 802.1X

Question 309
Layer 2 switches are data link layer devices that identify MAC addresses of Layer 2 data frames and
forward Layer 2 data frames based on MAC addresses. In addition, they record mappings between
MAC addresses and interfaces in the MAC address table.

 True
 False

Question 310
After a command for displaying RIP route information is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on
Serial1/0/0 is displayed in the returned result.

What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?

 Address of a RIP neighbor

 Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
 Next hop address of the RIP route
 Transmission address of the RIP protocol

99 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 311
The output of the following command on router R1 is as follows.

Which of the following statements are true?

 The router discards the packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8.

 The packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through Ethernet0/0/0 on the
router.
 The router forwards the packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8.
 The packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through GigabitEthernet0/0/0 on
the router.

Question 312
A network requires a solution to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single
public address is available for use.

Which translation method can be used to support this requirement?

 Static NAT
 Dynamic NAT
 Easy-IP
 NAPT

100 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 313
Refer to the graphic.

The switch is operating using STP. All default parameters have been maintained. Which port will be
assigned a designated port role?

 G0/0/1 of switch A.
 G0/0/2 of switch A.
 E0/0/1 of the hub.
 E0/0/2 of the hub.

Question 314
An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length field
is 0x0800.

Which of the following statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)

 The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

 The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
 Its upper layer protocol is IP
 Its upper layer protocol is IPX

101 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 315
According to the following topology and configuration, R1 and R2 are connected through low-speed
serial cables and PPP is used to encapsulate data link layer packets. When the Holdtime values of R1
and R2 are different, PPP negotiation and communication fail.

 TRUE
 FALSE

Question 316
<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei]history-command max-size 20

Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose
two)

 The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer.
 The default value of the history command buffer is 5.
 The command should be configured in the user-interface view.
 Once configured, commands totaling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.

Question 317
Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a router?

 SDRAM
 NVRAM
 Flash
 BootROM

102 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 318
The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network.

Which of the following represent advantages of link aggregation? (Choose three)

 Load balancing.
 Improved bandwidth.
 Enhanced reliability.
 Improved security.

Question 319
Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

 MAC address + port number

 IP address + port number
 Only MAC address
 Only IP address

Question 320

Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?

 Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

 Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
 Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defined route.
 Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.

Question 321
To establish multiple PPP point-to-point connections in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server
establishes connections with multiple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port.

How does PPPoE differentiate between each connection?

 MAC address.
 IP address and MAC address
 MAC address and ppp-id
 MAC address and session-id

103 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 322
Which of the following statements about a port on a switch is/are false?

 If the port receives data frames without VLAN tags, the switch needs to add VLAN tag
200.
 If the VLAN tag carried in a data frame is 100, the switch removes the VLAN tag and
sends the frame.
 The link type of the port is trunk.
 The port cannot send data frames carrying VLAN tag 200.

Question 323
In port aggregation, “multiple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregation group so that all the
member ports in the group share the outgoing/incoming load.

At which layer is port aggregation implemented?

 Physical Layer
 Data Link Layer
 Network Layer
 Transport Layer

Question 324

Refer to the configuration output. A network administrator configured the ACL on router RTA, as
shown.

Which of the following statements regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).

 The rule-number of the first rule is 1

 The rule-number of the first rule is 5
 The rule-number of the second rule is 2
 The rule-number of the second rule is 10

104 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]
Question 325
According to the configuration of single-armed routing in the following figure, the administrative
department and finance department can communicate with each other even the proxy ARP is
disabled on the subinterface on R1.

 True
 False

105 Licensed to Mohamed Elshair

[email protected]